Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 355
CIP-DATA KONINKLUKE BIBLIOTHEEK, DEN HAAG Giani, Gian Paolo Rock slope stability analysis / Gian Paolo Giani: (transl. from align]. ~ Rotlerdam fete. Balkema.~ Ml, Transl, of: Analisi di stabilita dei pedi, ~ Part: Chassifiewzione dei fenoment di stabil pendii naturafi ¢ fronti di scavo in roccia. Torino: Associazione Minecana Sul 1988, with ee ISBN 90 5410 122.9 bound Subject headings: rock slopes: alysis Authorization to photocopy items for internal or personal use. or the internal oF personal use of specific clients, is granted by A.A.Balkema, Rotterdam, provided that the hase fee of USS1.00 per copy, plus USSO. 10 per page is paid directly to Copyright Clearance Center. 27 Congress Sirect, Salem, MA 01970, USA. For thoxe organizations that have been photocopy license by CCC. a separate system of payment has been arranged. The fee eau for users of the Transactional Reporting Service is: 90 5410 122 9/92 USS1.00 + USSO.10. Original text Anolisi di siobilité dei pend ~ Parte b: Classifienzione dei fenomeni di instabilita. pendit nannroli e fromtidi scavo in raccia ©1988 Associazione Mineraria Subslpina, Turin Completely revised and updated edition in English: ©1992 A.A. Balkema, PO. Box 1675, 3000 BR Revtterdam, Netherlands ISBN 9054101229 Distributed in USA & Canada by: ‘A.A. Balkema Publishers, Olel Post Road, Brooklicld, VT S134, USA Printed in the Netheslands Contents PREFACE TO REVISED ENGLISH EDITION 1 PROBLEM DEFINITION AND LANDSI.IDE CLASSIFICATION 1 Natural slopes 2 Anificial slopes 1.2.1 Excavation slopes 2 Embankments and dams 1.2.3 Wastes 1.3 Aim of a slope stability analysis 1.4 Classification of slope movements 1.5 Slope movement and analysis types 1.5.1 Falls. 1.5.2 Topples 1.5.3 Slides (5.4 Lateral spreads 15.5 Flows 1.5.6 Complex movements ROCK SLOPE ENGINEERING 2.1 Inteoduction 2.2 Problem definition 23 Stability analysis methods 2.4. Static and dynamic equilibrium equations 2.5 Safety factor and limit equilibrium method 2.6 Effect of water pressure in rack discontinuities 2.7 Principal factors affecting rock slope stability analys xt 29 20 29 39 40 42 44 45 VI Rock slope stability analysis 3 GEOMECHANICAL CHARACTERIZATION OF DISCONTINUITIES 3.1 Discontinuity types 3.1.5 Bedding planes 3.1.2 Cleavage planes 3.1.3 Schistosities 3.1.4 Folds 3.1.5. Faulis 3.L.6 Joints 3.2. Rock slope discontinuity classification 3.3. Rock feature description methods. 3.4. Orientation 3.4.1 Angle definition 3.4.2 Spherical projections 3.4.3. Equal-area projection 3.4.4 Discontinuity orientation survey analysis and interpretation 3.4.5. Statistical interpretation of pole contour diagrams 3.5 Spacing 3.5.1, Definitions, measurements and scopes 3.5.2 Precision of the mean spacing and spacing distribution 3.6 Persistence definitions, scones and measurements 3.7 Roughness 3.7.1 Definitions and scope 3.7.2. Measurement and presentation of results 3.8 Wall strength 39 Aperture 3.10 Filling 3.11 Seepage 3.12 Number of sets 3.13 Block size 3.14 Discontinuity description using drill core and drill hole analysis 3.15 Geophysical surveys 4 SHEAR STRENGTH 4.1 Basic concepts 4.1.1 Intact rock strength envelope 4.1.2. Types of sicength criterion 4.1.3 Coulomb shear strength criterion 4.2. Rock discontinuity shear strength 4.2.1 Planar discontinuity surfaces 4.2.2 Inclined discontinuity surfaces 47 47 47 a7 50 50 5 52 53 55 56 56 ST SR 64 oe 73 7 14 78 85. 85 BS 88 1 92 93 94 95 96 97 9 99 99 99 101 103 103 105 6 Contents 4.2.2. Multiple inclined discontinuity surfaces 4.2.4 Ladanyi & Archambault criterion 4.2.5 Rough discontinuity surfaces 4.2.6 Barton criterion 4.2.7 Scale clfects 4.2.8 Joint Roughness Coefficient measurements from large scale index tests 4.2.9 Statistical methods for IRC determination and shear behaviour prediction 4.2.10 Fractal characterization of joint surface roughness for estimating shear strength 4.2.11 Geostatistical operators applied to the rock joint shear strength prediction 4.2.12 Influence of the wall discontinuity interlock tevel on the shear resistance 4.2.13 Filled discontinuities 4.2.14 Discontinuity shear behaviour under dynamic conditions: 4.2.15. Concluding remarks on joint shear resistance 4.3 Shear strength of rock mass GROUNDWATER FLOW IN ROCK MASSES S.A Introduction 5.2 Basic concepts 5.3 Flow in discontinuous media 5.4 Flow in porous media 5.5 Rock mass flow models 5.6 Hydraulic conductivity of a single discontinuity, 5.7 Hydraulic conductivity of a discontinuity ser 5.8 Hydraulic characterization of discontinuous rock masses 5.8.1 Practical example of pumping tests in boreholes 5.9 Hydraulic characterization of equivalent contimious masses 5.10 Mathematical models 5.10,t Single fracture models 5.10.2 Joint network mouels GEOMECHANICAL MODEL 6.1 Introduction 6.2. Rock joint system models 6.2.1 Orthogonal mode} 6.2.2. Unbounded random plane model vil 106 108 iW 13 116 129 132 134 138 139 141 141 146 146 146 148 150 151 153 154 156 159 162 163 163 165 167 167 167 167 169 Vill Rock slope stabiluy analysis 63 64 6.5 6.2.3 Co-planar polygonal model 6.2.4 Mosaic block tessellation models 6.2.5 Poisson disk model 6.2.6 Other joint modelling approaches 6.2.7 Concluding remarks on the joint system modelling techniques Potential instability phenomena identification Design sectors 6.4.1. Statistical models 6.4.2 Geostatistical models Application example 7 ROCKFALLS, TOPPLES AND BUCKLES, VW 72 73 Rockfall 7.1.1 Analytical formulations of rock fall 7.1.2 Rockfall movement analysis Toppling 7.2.1 Toppling mechanisms 7.2.2. Single block toppling limit equilibrium 7.2.3 A block system loppling analysis Rock buckling 7.3.1 Flexural buckling of plane slabs 7.3.2 Thice hinge bean models for plane slopes 7.3.3. Three hinge buckling of curved slopes 8 SLIDING PHENOMENA ANALYSIS 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 Siiding instability types Simplified methods 8.2.1. Plane sliding 8.2.2 Sliding on a two plane intersection line Stability analysis using vector methods 8.3.1 Equations of lines and planes 8.3.2. Volumes, areas, angles and forces 8.3.3 Warburton procedure for stability analysis of a polyhedral rock block 8.3.4 Block theory Probabilistic methods 8.4.1 Introduction 8.4.2 Stability indexes 8.4.3 Monte Carlo method 8.4.4 Rosenblucth point estimare method 7 174 74 176 176 7 179 (80 180 185 191 I 191 193 208 208 215 218 222 222 224 226 229 229 229 231 242 282 253 256 259 264 281 281 282 283 285 Contents 1X 8.4.5 Application example 286 8.4.6 Conditioned probability and Bayes theorem 287 8.4.7 Application example 288 8.4.8 Fuzzy set theory 289 8.4.9 Rock slope stability analysis ap} 290 8.5. Concluding remarks on the graphical methods in rock slope stability analysis, 292 9 DYNAMIC EQUILIBRIUM EQUATION METHOD 295 9.1 Method of analysis 295 9.2. Distinet Element Method 295 9.2.1 Introduction 295 9.2.2 Theoretical fonnulation of the method 296 9.2.3 Block deformability 297 9.2.4 Discontinuity behaviour model 298 9.2.5 Motion equations 301 9.2.6 Calculation sequence 302 9.2.7 Static analysis 303 9.2.8 Boundary element representation for zones distant from the examined arca 304 9.29 Coupled problems 304 9.2.10 Dynamic analysis 306 9.2.1] Other main DEM applications 306 9.3. Seismic analysis, 307 9.3.1 Pscudo-statie method 307 9.3.2. Overall displacement method 308 10 STABILIZATION AND PROTECTION METHODS 3IS 10.0 Introduction 315 10.2 Excavation and geometrical slope parameter design 315 10.2.1, Rock sliding along discontinuity planes 317 10.2.2. Rock slope toppling and sliding 322 10.2.3 Circular failure in soft or weitk rock 322 10.2.4 Secondary toppling failure 323 10.3 Drainage measures 324 10.4 Support and reinforcement systems 329 10.4.1 Active reinforcements 333 10.4.2 Passive reinforcements 337 10.5. Methods of protection 340 REFERENCES 347 Preface to revised English edition This English cdition of the book: Analisi di, stabilita dei pendii ~ Parte 1. Classificazione dei fenomeni di instabilita, péndii naturali ¢ fronti di scavo in roccia vepresents an updated and revised ,version of the first Halian edition published by the Associazione Mineraria Suibalpina of Turin. ‘The book deals with the methods of assessing the stability of rockélapes and the techniques of improving the stability conditions of natural and artificial slopes which arc at risk. a , The book also deals with the-description ofurvey.and measurement methods used (o mode! the mechanicalehaviour of rock masses and theouilinifig.of field observations to calibrate numerical or analytical methods of slope analysis. The main {opiés of the book are: "Slope instability movement classification and description in order to establ- ish a connection between engineering geology and rock and soil slope engineer ing ficlds; = Different modes of slope instability and the correspondent types of slope analysis: _ ~The geometrical and physical featurés of the rock mass and the rock discontinuity; ~ ‘Sheatstrength; Rock mass modelling for flow and mechanical analysis; Rock slope stability analysis in static and dynamic fields, Rock fall modelling: Methods of improving rock slope stability and the protection methods for rockfalls. The first 1988 Italian edition of the book was written especially for the students of the course of ‘Fisica de! suolo ¢ stabilita dei pendii’ of the Technical University of Turin and contained the resulis of scientific researches published in books, magazines and international conference proceedings as far as possible. This new edition of the book has been updated with some real case application examples and with the results of new rescarch and experimental data gathered. ‘abovelall from Malian research laboratories such as those of the “Gvorisorsé ¢ xt XII Rock slope stability analysis Territorio’ Department of the Technical University of Turin and ISMES of Bergamo. 1 would like to thank all my colleagues who helped me in the writing of this book by giving me their opinions and technical papers and the other international authors of the papers quoted in the references from which I gathered scientific material I would also like to thank the past-president Prof. L. Stragiotti and the President Prof. S. Pelizza of the Associazione Mincraria Subalpina who permitted the publication of this English edition Finally | would like to thank the following persons for their important contribu- tions: ~ Dr Margherita Ferrero who assisted me in the discussing and reading of the text; — Nuova Copisterin who did the typing of the manuscript; Mrs Marguerite Jones who helped me in the English translation of the book: Miss Cristiana Catino and Miss Marina Berardi for the drawings; Dr Gabriele Pancotti who reproduced the photographs; My wife who put up with me during this period Gian Paoto Giani Turin, July 191 CHAPTER | Problem definition and landslide classification (1 NATURAL SLOPES Natural slopes can be classified by referring to the activily state (Varnes, 1978). Active slopes are those (hat are cither currently moving or not moving al the present but have moved within the last seasonal cycle. Inactive slopes are thse where there is no evidence that movement has taken place within the last seasonal cycle. These slopes may be dormant, when the faiture causes are still present and a movement may occur again, or they may be stabilized when the factors causing the movement have been removed naturally or by human activity. Zaruba & Mencl (1969) and Vames (1978) subdivided slope movements according to age. A slope movement is called ‘recent’ when it has occurred in recent decades ina slope which has not yet been the center of mass movements. A movement for which there is no memory or historical records is called ancient. A fossil movement, finally, is where a slope movement occurred in a previous geological age. ‘The causes which determine sliding movement in a slope depend on pheno- mena which contribute to a shear stress increase and/or to a reduction of shear strength. The principal phenomena which contribute to a shear stress increase involve the toe or the slope surface weakening or the slope surcharging. ‘The toe or the slape surface weakening can be due to: 1. Erosion by streams, rivers, glaciers, waves. tidal currents. sub-acrial weath- cring, wetting and drying and frost action; 2. Subsidence. previous rock fall, toppling, sliding and superiicial scaling: 3. Phenomena connected to human activity such as mining or civil excavations, channel construction or water level variation in the toc zone of reservoirs. Surcharges can also be induced by natural causes or human activity. Natural surcharges are due to rain water or snow weight, or to water percolation in rock discontinuities. Surcharges due (o human work are embankments, mining ' 2 Rock slope stability analysis and industrial waste disposal, weight of buildings and other structures and water weight in channels and reservoirs. The principal causes which contribute to a shear strength reduction depend on: Soil texture, rock fabric and rock structural defects; physical and chemical reactions; and changes in intergranular forces. 1. Texture plays an important role in sensitive soil behaviour such as clay, shale, loess, loose sand and organic porous material. The rounded shape of the sand particles decreases shear resistance, whilst sharp shapes increase shear res- istance, The principal parameters affecting the rock mass shear resistance are the structural discontinuities, the contrast in stiffness and resistance in non- homogencous masses, the unfavorable orientalion of beddings and joints, the slope orientation and the cementation degree of semi-coherent rocks such as sandstone and conglomerates. 2. Physical and chemical reactions can be due to: a) The softening in fissured clays; b) The physical disintegration of granular rocks such as granites or sandstones under frost action or thermal eycle effects; Plate 1.1. Fissure in over- consolidated clays. By F Lida, Problem definition and landslide classification 3 c) The hydration in clay soils, when a large quantity of water is absorbed by clay fraction thereby decreasing initial shear strength (smectitic clay swelling determines a shear decrease): d) The oversaturation of loess with a consequent destruction of the bonds between the clay particles and large soil particles; c) Cement dissolution phenomena in sandstones and conglomerate: 3. The principal intergranular force varistion phenomena depend on: a) The water content which determines the pore pressure and the water pressure in the rock discontinuities. Meicoric events and human works such as the diversion of streams, biackage of drainages, irrigation and pondin, b) The clearing of vegetation and forests. 4, The soil texture and rock fabric variation can be caused by: a) Fissures of shales and overconsolidated clay (Plate 1.1): ‘b) Weathering and fracturing duc to the release of vertical or horizontal stresses. in valley cuts or walls; c) Remoulding or revelling which can decrease the shear strength of fine Particle material such as loess, loose sands and sensitive clays. 1.2 ARTIFICIAL SLOPES Anificial slopes can be subdivided into three categories: Excavation slopes; dams and embankments; and wastes (Chowdhury, 1978). 1.2.1 Excavation slopes “She excavation design aims at determining the average excavation height and inclination which can keep the slope stable, while taking economical aspects into consideration The period for which an excavation slope has to remain stable varies according tothe: — Mining or civil work type: ~ Foreseen mainicnance works; = Forescen stability control measurements. The principal parameters affecting rock slope excavation stability arc: 1. Rock matrix shear and deformation features; Physical and geometrical features of discontinuities in the siope rock mass; Average height, slope angle and the complete geometry of benche: Discontinuity and rock mass water flow; Drainage works: Reinforcing works (rockbolis, cables, ete.) which can also be considered in the design phase for a suitable slopé stability condition. The principal parameters which must considered in the slope excavation design are: Queen 4 Rock slope stability analysis: 1, Shear resistance parameters in drained and undrained conditions (the stabil- ity analysis of an excavation slope in a clay material is usually carried out in effective stress terms with drained parameters); 2. Stress state history; both those induced in the geological formation before excavation and those duc to the excavation; 3. Pore pressure distribution and change in pore pressure during and after the slope excavation; 4. Long (c’, ’) and short (S,) term stability conditions. 1.2.2 Embankments and dams The mechanical properties of the materials used to construct embankments and dams can be known before or “in situ’ determined both from soit and rocktiil composition and from the compaction degree points of view. Careful investiga- tions and “in situ" tests are insicad required in order to characterize the subsoil Embankmients and dams constricted on a cohesive soil require a staged construction by consolidating with controlicd loading rates in order to strengthen the foundation soil (Ladd, 1987). Consolidation may be accelerated by the \stallation of vertical drains. Ficld observations are necessary for important works built on cohesive soil foundations in order to estimate the rate of pore overpressure dissipation Stability analysis must consider staged construction problems according to the CU (consolidated undrained) case which represents the most realistic and critical conditions. The CU case rclers toa full or partial consolidation of soil as far as the applica stresses and undrained failure are concerned. Numerical methods such as the Finite Element Method (FEM) can be used for the coupled deformation-flow problem in order to help the enginecr in the staged construction parameter definition, The principal advantages of FEM use in designs are: = The possibility of simulating the staged construction by varying soil detor- mation modulus with confining siresses and by choosing an appropriate soil stress-strain constitutive law; ~ The possibility of computing and comparing the settlements determined for each dam layer application with experimental results; = The possibility of examining the interacting soil core rockfill behaviour and of computing effective stresses in the soil core for cach dam layer loading: ~ The possibility of assessing overall dam stability conditions for each con- struction stage on the basis of the effective stresses and the pore pressures computed When a dam is working, control grid measurements are periodically or continuously carried out and the stability analysis usually relcrs to the following critical situations: Problem definition and landslide classification $5 Atthe end of the dany construction; I. 2. In ong term conditions with full water load; 3. In rapid water emptying conditions; 4. Inscismic conditions. 1.2.3 Wastes In many European laws waste disposals are classificd according to the toxicity degree and the material types (such as sanitary landfill, industrial muds or mining, and civil work debris). The principal Factors governing the waste disposal slope stability problems are: 1. The site choice which depends on environmental problems, soil mompholo- gy. stratigraphy and mechanical features and hydrogeological conditions of the basin housing the waste disposal; 2. The waste disposal construction method choice which must allow one (o store the required waste volume while maintaining the designed slope stability conditions; 3. The mechanical characteristics of the waste material and the tailing dams; 4. The seepage control. Waste material can be shoveled or set in place by means of hydraulic filling techniques. In the first case the material can be, from a geomechanical point of view, considered a debris or a sand, according to the material particle size distribution. In the second case, different kinds of problems affecting the waste disposal slope stability should be considered. Two problems which influence the hydraulic fill structure stability are here bricfly discussed: The construction methods of tailing dams for hydraulically transported waste material and the sclection of shear strengih for static and dynamic stability analysis. Tailing dam construction methods (Morgenstern & Kupper, 1988) (Fig ae = Upstream method: = Downstream method; — Centerline method. The upsircam method is the oldest, simplest and most economical method of tailing dam construction. However, the most famous examples of hydraulic filled structure collapses were constructed using an upstream method (Morgenstern & Kupper, 1988). Morgenstern & Kupper have pointed out that the failure statistics reflect the fact that the upstream method of tailing dam construction is the most Trequently used; if correctly designed, safe structures can also be built using the upstream method. Morgenstern & Kupper also pdinted out that the most significant characteristics which affect the design and the performance of hydraulic filling structures re 1.1) CHAPTER | Problem definition and landslide classification (1 NATURAL SLOPES Natural slopes can be classified by referring to the activity state (Varnes, 1978). Active slopes are those that are cither currently moving or not moving al the present but have moved within the last seasonal cycle. Inactive slopes are those where there is no evidence that movement has taken place within the last seasonal cycle. These slopes may be dormant, when the faiture causes are stil! present and a movement may occur again, or they may be stabilized when the factors causing the movement have been removed naturally or by human activity, Zaruba & Mencl (1969) and Varnes (1978) subdivided slope movements according to age. A slope movement is called ‘recent’ when it has occurred in recent decades in a slope which has not yet been the center of mass movements. A movement for which there is no memory or historical records is called ancient. A fossil movement, finally, is where a slope movement occurred in a previous geological age. The causes which determine sliding movement in a slope depend on pheno- mena which contribute to a shear stress increase and/or to a reduction of shear strength The principal phenomena which contribute to a shear stress increase involve the toe or the slope surface weakening or the slope surcharging. The toc or the slope surface weakening can be due to: 1. Erosion by streams, rivers, glaciers, waves. tidal currents. sub-acrial weath- cring, wetting and drying and frost action; 2. Subsidence, previous rock fall, toppling, sliding and superficial scaling: 3, Phenomena connected to human activity such as mining or civil excavations channel construction or water level variation in the toe zone of reservoirs. Surcharges can also be induced by natura) causes or human activity. Natural surcharges are due to rain water or snow weight, or to water percolation in rock discontinuities, Surcharges due to human work are embankments, mining 1 Problem definition and landslide classification 7 independent of the method of construction are: — The particle size separation; ~ The drainage measures; ~ The compaction = Earthquake resistance. The selection of the strength parameters is of vital importance for the design of a stable embankment and fora stable hydraulic filled structure. Poulos (1988) poinicd out that the steady state strengths of soils ultimately control stability for both static and earthquake loading in every case. The steady state strength is the strength at a very large strain (i.e. the strength when the soil is in a stcady state of deformation - Figure 1.2). The ‘in situ® peak strength is of a temporary nature and should nol usually be relied on for a long term. 1.3 AIM OF A SLOPE STABILITY ANALYSIS In the geotechnical ficld, stability analyses aim to support the safe and functional design of rock and soil slopes. Preliminary analyses can be carried out in order to determine the critical parameters of a work stability. Parametric analyses allow ‘one to assess the physical and geometrical problem parameter influence on the slope stability. A rock and soil slope stability analysis allows one to evaluate: 1. The optimal staged excavation or construction time sequence determina- tion; 2. The role, which design parameters such as slope angle and excavation or embankment height, play in the work stability; 3. Consolidation works such as retaining walls, drainage systems or rockbolt- ing, which can stabilize a slope. A stability analysis can also be carried out to assess the equilibrium conditions of a natural slope. Civil works are often constructed on natural slopes which are in limiting equilibrium conditions or which were the center of a landslide movement. In these cases, stabilily back analyses are carried out with the purpose of assessing the values of shear strength parameters and pore pressure distributions in potentially unstable masses in the absence of undisturbed specimen laboratory tests. Dynamic equilibrium equation analyses can be carried out in order to predict unstable mass movements. This is the case of flow or fall instability phenomena where soil mass and rock block paths are determined until the statical equilibrium condition is reached Stability analysis can be carried out with the aim of analyzing the seismic shack event effect on a natural or artificial slope. Two analyzing methods are usually used for this purpose: The first is Called pscudostatic and simulates the seismic shock effect by adding an external force proportional to the maximum seismic 8 neck slope stability analysis designed acceleration to the active forces: the second, called the overall displace- ment method, solves the dynamic equitibrium equations of the examined unstable mass by taking the time variation of the seismic acceleration. according 10 2 designed seismogram. into account The instability risk is a concep! which should be introduced into stability analysis because of the uncertainties connected to the geological material parame- ter determination, Probabilistic analyses are carried out for this purpose. Geostat- istical models for the geological variables governing slope stability problems can finally be carried out, by considering the regionalized aspect of those variables and by therefore decreasing the uncertainties of the slope stability assessment 1.4 CLASSIFICATION OF SLOPE MOVEMENTS ‘The most widely used classification of slope movements was compiled by Varnes (1978) for the US Trasportation Research Board and the National Academy of Sciences. There are six basic considered types of slope movements: Falls, topples. slides. lateral spreads. flows and complex movements. Sliding movements are further divided into rotational and translational slides. Every type of moveme: is also considered on the basis of the geological formation type which has besn subjected! 10 the movements. Geological formations are subdivided into: Bedrock, debris soil and earth soil Slope movements were therefore classified by Varnes into 18 types Table 1.1 repons the abbreviated classification af slope movements proposed by Vames. The types of slope movements occur with a different Irequence. An earth block slide is. in nature. more frequent than an eanh topple. Table 1.1, Abbreviated classification of slope movements proposed by Vames (1978). Type of movement Type of material Engineering soils Bedrock Predominantly coarse Fails Rockfall (a) Debris fail (hi Earth falt (oy Topples Rock topple (b) Debris topple tit Earth toppte 1p) Slides: Revational A few units Rock slumpic) Debris slump (1) Earth stump (7) Slides: Transiational A few units Rock block slide Debris block slide Earth block slide Many usits Rock slide td) Debris slide (mi Earth slide «n) Lateral spreads Rock spread (e) Debris spread anh spread (s) Flows Rock How (deep Debris Naw (soil Ean flow (Soil creep) it) creep (ny creep) (t) Complex Combination of to of more principal types of movements ig) Problem definition and landslide classification 9 Carrara et al. (1985) examined the different frequencies of the Varnes classifi- cation of movement types in the Jtalian geological environment The tems used to refer to the frequency of a slope movement type are 1. Large diffused types 2. Average diffused types: 3. Rare diffused ty pes. Carrara et al. also referred to the identification difficulty degree of slope move- ment in the lalian environment. A slope movement can be: 4. Easily identitied and classified on the basis of ‘in situ’ observations: 2. Identitied and classified only on the basis of geological and geotechnical investigations, Table 1.2 reports (Carrara et al., 1985) the diffusion and the investigation difficulty degree of slope movements for the Italian environment. A slope analysis is carried out by usit an analy tical or numerical model which can determine the limiting equilibrium conditions or the movement of a poten tially unstable mags. Slope analyses can in fact be devoted to examining either stability conditions or motion equations of a slope mass. by determining. in the latter case. the paths and the velocities of the unstable body Table 1.3 reports the terms used (9 qualitatively describe the slope movement velocity according to the Vames classification Table 1.2. Frequency of the Varnes classification movement pes and identitic ty degree in the lalian geological environment (afler Carrara et al. 19 a Fee soo ho #438 p db 4400 ie 4 ce #4 000 1 44 eoo r d 44 0e m #4 409 $ e488 n 40 1 fo 48 obo ato v gs Fe edd Slope movementiypes: # # # Large dittused slope: # # Average diffused: # Rare diffused 090 Easily identifiable slope: ¢¢ Difticutt o identify: © Unlikely identifiable. Table 1.3. Slope movement scale (alter Varnes, 1978 Rae Delinition term aims Extremely rapid > 3 mimin Nery rapid > 1S miday Rapid > 13 m/month Moderate > 15 mésear Slow > 006 méyear Very 100 km/h) on the Spriana (Valteltina. Italy) landslide site, over a path of more than 1000 m (Plate 1.2) Rock block fall analysis methods. as discussed in Chapter 7. are used in order to predict the block path and the block energy during movement. Protection darriers. catch fences, catch nets and other rockfall protection systems can be reliably designed when the block path and enerey are predicted Plate 1.2. Path of block falling. at Spria- na Valiellina, Lombardy, Italy 7 duced by permission of ISMES Geo- mechanical Division, Problem definition and landslide classification Figure 1.3. Main types of falls accosd- ing to Hurchinson (1988). a) Primary. Rock and soil fatis: b) Secondary: ny {b) Stone Plate 1.3. Debris falls in an alluvial deposit in Soncala, Valtellina, Waly Stone and boulder fails involve rock bodies already physically detached from the cliff and merely lodged upon it and have been as a secondary fall category (Hutchinson. 1988) in contrast to the primary fall category which refers to the fresh detachment of material from the parent mass (Figure 1.2, Plate 1.3). 1.5.2 Topples Toppling movements are due to forces that cause an overturning mement about a pivot poim below the toppling block unit center of gravity. {n.a blocky rock mass, 12 Rock slope stability analysis (2) 3 (cy Figere ‘a. Toppling & res:a) Si-> +S tiple: c) Debris topple: 1) \Y ke stches'ratum: 2) Streuny erosion: 3) Beh; 4) Sund: 5) Tension crack: 6) Clayey yravel:” set al is due to block w the resultant force which determines the block top! water pressure in the joint and the adjacent block thnust Rock block single toppling conditions can be analyzeu. as discussed in Chap- ter 2, by means of rotational and traslational block equilibrium equations. Rock block multiple toppling phenomena were classified, as is discussed in Chapier 7, by Goodman & Bray (1976) according to the rock block system geometry and to the forces acting on the blocks The block movements which follow a topple are falls, rollings and slides. A block fall analytical model can be used to determine the path and energies of a falling block which stans to move by toppling. Rock and soil toppling failure schemes are reported in Figure 1.4 1.5.3 Slides A sliding movement is determined by unbalanced shear siress along one or more surfaces. These surfaces are visible or may be inferred by analyzing ‘in sity’ observations. Sliding surface determination is one of the most important prob- lems in a landslide analysis. A landslide phenomenon may already have occurred and the sliding surface shape and position can be identified by means of site investigations (Walker et al., 1987). In this case slope stability analysis is carried out with the purpose of assessing unstable slope mass strength or pore pressure parameters by means of @ landslide back analysis. Problem definition and landslide classification 13 A landslide phenomenon can be incipient or a sliding condition can be determined for a man-made slope. In these cases, slope stability analyses are carried out with the purpose of locating a critical failure surface. The methods proposed to automatically locate the critical failure of an ‘engineering soil" slope by considering it to be the surface that has the minimum safety factor (Mostyn & Small, 1987) are: 1. The minimum safety factor research into families of surfaces that pass through a pre-determined slope zone (for exaniple: The toe, the crest of the slope or acontact zone between two different layers) 2, The use of the operation research /dynamic programming method to guide the search. 3. The application of the variation calculus. Figure 1.5 shows the grid search pattem forthe critical circular sliding surface of a triangular slope. This procedure of minimum safety factor determination has disadvantages and limitations. Disadvantages occur because the critical surface obtained by the grid search pattern does not always correspond to the absolute minimum safety factor but often corresponds 1o a local minimum surface for non-homogeneous slopes. Limitations of the minimum safety factor determination using a grid search Pattern occur when the centre of the critical circular surface is not located inside the grid. In many cases the center is located at an infinite point or along the lowest border of the grid. The first situation occurs when a non-cohesive soil is examined Figure 1.3, Determination of the minimum safety factor circular surface in a homogeneous slope: 1) The circles pass through the slope toe; 2) Radius of the circular surface which refers to the minimom safety factor: 3) The centers of the examined circles lie on grid points: 4) Contours of iso-safety factor curves. 14 Rock slope stability analysis with a linear Mohr-Covlomb shear strength envelope. The second occurs when an embankment is built on a cohesive soil and an undrained loading condition has to be verified. ‘The second method of locating the critical failure surface has no arbitrary restrictions on the shape and position of the critical surface. This method involves establishing an initial estimation of the location of the critical failure surface and evaluating the safety factor for this surface. The initial estimation is then modified and the safety factor is re-evaluated for the new surface location. The process is continued iteratively until a minimum safety factor has been obtained. The limit equilibrium method is the most used method applied to determine the safety factor along a surface. Different alghorithms were instead proposed for the critical surface location. The secant method (Nguyen, !985 a, c) is a numerical procedure often adopted in order to locate the critical surface with a few iterations, A probabilistic analysis method was proposed by Oboni & Bourdeau (1983) in order to find the most probable critical failure surface. The method, which applies the calculus of variations, consists of the deriving of an analytical function for the safety factor and then, by using calculus, the determination of the condition for which this function is a minimum. The geometry and cther variables of the stability problem need to be expressed as a differentiable function in order to apply this method A summary of the various methods of applying the variation calculus for the enitical surface location has been given by Fredlung (1984), Since field investigations have » dominant influence on the soi) and rock mass geotechnical characterization and consequently on the landslide analysis model choice. the principat landslide parameters which should to be classified are: ~ Failure surface: ~ Depositional area: ~ The way in which the movement occurs; ~ The rate of the movement; The size of materials and the degree of disruption of the displaced mass: — The parent material involved; - ‘The age of the failure; — Various combinations of the above parameters The failure surface shape is determined by the landslide movement Planar slides are characterized by slides on a plane or on more than one plane. These planes are dip directed out of the existing ground surface. Slides are, in this case, translation movements. Much of the material is forced down the slide plane as blocks of material which are often held together by vegetation roots. Rates of movement range from mm/s to a few m/s. Rotational slides, also called stumps, are characterized by curvilinear (concave upward) shear planes. ‘The dominant characteristic of the failed mass is a backward rotation. Slumps Problem definition and landslide classification 15. are generally deep compared to their length. The failed material remains intact in that only one or a few discrete blocks are likely to be produced. Slumps are rare on natural hillslopes, even though they are perhaps the most common mode of failure in man-made excavations and in soft ground fills. Rates of movement range from mm/y to m/day (Walker et al., 1987) Walker et al. (1987) gave typical ranges of geometrical features of various slope movements, based on published sets of experimental data. The examined slope movement geometrical feature is the ratio between the maximum thickness (D) of the moving mass and the maximum length (L) of the moving mass im the direction of the maximum slope ‘The translational slide phenomena varied in a range between 5 to 10 of D/L%, the rotational slide phenomena in a range between 15 10 30 and flows in a range between 0.5 10 3 1.5.3.1 Rotational slides The most common rotational sliding phenomena involve a sliding surface with a spoon shape or a convex cylindrical shape. The sliding surface is seldom a uniform concave upward spherical segment: often the presence of beddings. joints, faults and non-homogeneity zones influence the sliding surface shape. The 3-D stabilizing effect. given by a non-constant sliding surface along the transversal direction to the ground surface. can be taken into account in a linziting equilibrium analysis. Figure 1.6 illustrates the principles of a method available to include 3-D effects in a classical 2-D limit equilibrium method approach (Plate 1.4). The sliding surface, determined on the principal landslide vertical section, is therefore often composed of straight lines and circular arcs Rotational slides mainly occur in slopes made up of relatively homogereous clay and shale deposits. This phenomenon also occurs in slopes of granular material or closely jointed rock. in which pore water pressures are sufficiently high (© cause a rotational rather than a shallow (ranslational failure. Rotational failures aiso occur in slopes of highly alterated and weathered rocks. Methods of assessing stability conditions in closely jointed rock slopes, alterated and wea- thered rock slopes are discussed in Chapter 8 (Sarma, 1973; Hoek & Bray, 1981: Hoek & Brown, 1980; Hoek, 1983). Hutchinson (1968) has defined and described the following three main types of rotational landslide (Figure 1.7) \. Single rotational slide; 2. Successive rotational slides; 3. Multiple rotational slides. The first type is characterized by the presence of a single, concave upward sliding surface upon which the unstable mass moves as an essentially coherent unit. The second type, characteristic of the latter stage of degradation in freely 16 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 1.6. Approximate method of 3-D stability analysis for a cireular or non-circular surface in terms of tolal or effective stress (after Hutchinson & Del Prete. 1985). The 2-D factor of safety Fon section J-1 (fora | m wide strip) is: F, = (Resisting moment of forces, ER)/{Disturding moment or forces, SD). The 3-D safety factor, Fy, is given by F; =(B,- IR + Ry + Ry)! (B,- ED). where B, is the arm of an equivalent rectangular sliding body. Ry is the restoring moment or force on end ptane M and Ris the restoring moment or force on end plane N. a) Slide boundary; 1) Section 1-1: 2)8,: 3) End plane Mf: 4) End plane N; 5) Idealized equivalent rectangplar slide boundary; b) Section }-1 of the landslide, Plate 1.4. Rotational sliding in clay at Craco. Basilicata, ltaly. By M. Del Prete. Problem definition and landslide classification \7 Figure 1.7. Main types of rotational slides (after Varnes, 1978): a) Single: b) Multiple: c) Successive; 1) Slope degrading cliffs or stiff fissured clays, refers to a succession of shallow rotational slips. arranged approximatively head to toe up @ slope and usually of the retrogressive type. The third phenomenon type can occur, under certain circumstances, as a retrogression of a single rotational slip and results in the formation of two or more slipped blocks. each with curved, concave upward slip surface tangeras to a common, generally deep-seated, slip sole. The classical limit equilibrium methods can be applied to assess slope stability conditions or to carry out a slope back analysis for circular sliding surface cases (Bishop, 1955; Spencer, 1967) or for non-circular sliding surface cases (Janbu, 1973: Morgenstern & Price, 1965: Fredlung & Krahn, 1977; Sarma, 1973). 1.5.3.2 Translational slides Translational slides involve shear failure on-alrnost planar surfaces in a down slope section. These phenomena were subdivided by Hutchinson (1988) into the following principal types (Figure |.8): 1, Sheet slides: 2. Slab slides; 3. Peat slides; 18 Rock slope stability analysis 9 h Figure 1.8. Principal «ypes of sliding translations: 1) Sheet slides: 2) Slab slides: 3) Rock slides (a-d: 2-D phenomena: e-h: 3-D phenomena); 4) Debris slides: 5) Sudden spreading failures (after Hutchinson. 1988; Kovari & Fritz, 1984). 4. Rock slides: 5. Debris slides; 6. Sudden spreading failures. Sheet slides are very shallow translational movements of essentially dry and cohesionless materials. Slab slides involve coherent but unlithified soils, The phenomenon often occurs when a greater contrast between a very soft slipping zone and the overlying, stiffer, but still unlithified zone, occurs. Peat slides usuaily affect blanket bogs and the failure surface often occurs in mineral soils just below the base of the peat, or in mineral peats Rock slides can be subdivided on the basis of the movement type, of the sliding plane surface shape or of the number of sliding rock blocks. Sliding movement can occur along a single plane (Plate 1.5) or at the intersection line between two planes (Plate 1.6). Sliding surfaces can be planar (Plate 1.7), stepped or poly- gonal. Rock sliding movement can involve a single unit, a few units or many units, Chapters 8 and 9 are devoted to the analysis of the rock slide phenomena Slides of debris can involve, in non-periglacial zones, movement along a bedrock or along a more consolidated debris material. Problem definition and landslide classification 9 Sa Sot Jello Plate 1.5. Plane sliding in a layered excavated rack wall in Valnoci, Tuscany. lta. By A. Azzoni. ISMES. Plate 1.6. Rock wedge failures in the Corinto channel walls, Greece. 20 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 1.7. Sliding plane along a bedding surface in marl, Basilicata, Naly. Debris slides can be caused in a periglacial zone by the thaw of a thin layer of soil. In this case, the saturated debris material slides over a planar surface, which is generally the permafrost table Sudden spreading failure usually occurs in varved clays and in other quaternary deposits, in particular, in quick clays or with sub-horizontal layers of loose saturated sand or silt, prone to liquefication by earthquakes Hutchinson (1988) also defined compound slides as intermediate types as far as, the proportions between rotational and translational slides are concerened (Figure 1.8). Compound slides are characterised by markedly non-circular slip surfaces formed by a combination of a steep, curved orplaner rear part and a flatter sole. Compound slides usually reflect ihe presence of hetereogeneity beneath a slope which is often a weak layer or a boundary between weathered and unweathered material Problem definition and landslide classification 21 The limit equilibrium method is often, for the above quoted sliding types, not able to take all the factors affecting the slope equilibrium conditions into account, A stress-strain analysis method should be used when failure stresses are due to stiffness contrast between a potentially unstable mass and the underlying soi) ‘The relative displacements of rock blocks may affect the equilibriuma condi- tions of a rock mass formed by several block units. The slope analysis method has to consider the joint stiffnesses in order to compute relative block movements. A numerical method able to determine interstitial overpressure, caused by cyclic or impulsive loadings. should be used when an instability phenomenon can be caused by soil liquefaction 1.5.4 Lateral spreads ‘The prevailing mode of movement of lateral spreads is a lateral extension created by shear or tensile fracture generation. These movements are often determined when the slope is formed by a stiff formation lying on a soft formation or when a stiff and soft layer sequence occurs In the case in which a stiff slab lies on a soft layer, the slab weight can induce yield zones in the Jower layer. Subvertical tensile fractures in the slab are the consequence of these yield zones. These fractures can be extended from the slab basis up to the top, dividing the whole slab imto a set of blocks. Lateral spread movements can be generated or increased when the fractures are water or debris filled. Two pictorial examples of lateral spreads, given by Vames (1978), are reported in Figure 1.9. (a) (b) Figure 1.9. Examples of lateral spread proposed by Varnes ()978): a) Lateral rock spread (Zarvba & Mencl, 1969); b) Lateral soil spread; 1) Compact clay; 2) Soft clay layered with send and silt; 3) Compact clayey gravel 22. Rock slope stability analysis Different lateral spread phenomena can be numerically modelled by means of 1. Computation of the yield zones induced by external loadings; 2. Analysis of failure propagation in the stab, 3. Analysis of lateral extension movements, 4. Analysis of stabilization methods. ‘The computation of the yield zones induced by external loading can be carried out using a stress-strain analysis method such as the finite element method. In this case: a) deformability and strength features of geological formations, b) body forces, c) boundary conditions and d) plasticity laws for the formations, need to be assigned to the numerical model. The failure propagation analysis in the slab can be examined by using a method such as the displacement discontinuity method (Crouch & Stanfield, 1983) by also assigning the fracture toughness to the numerical model. The analysis of lateral extension movements can be examined as a sliding movement and sliding analysis methods can be used for this purpose The analysis of the stabilization method can be carried out by simulating cables or other reinforcing techniques with a numerical method such as the distinct element method or finite element method The use of the distinct element method allows one to schematize a blocky system; in finite clement method application, the fracturated slab can be consi- dered as an equivalent continuous method or can be alternatively schematized as a jointed system and joint elements must be used 1.5.5 Flows Several types of movements cannot be classified into falls, topples, slides or lateral spreads. These movements have a flow aspect in unconsolidated materials, both with low or high rates, whether saturated or drained The moving mass rate distribution is found in several cases and especially in fine soils similar to that of a viscous fluid. 15.5.1 Rock flows ‘A rock flow movement includes deformations that are distributed among many large or small fractures, or even microfractures, without a concentration of displacements along a through-going fracture. The movements are usually slow and sometimes are so slow as to be called gravitational movements. Flow movernents may result in folding, bending. bulging or other manifesta- Lions of plastic behaviour (Varnes, 1978) A numerical simulation is extremely difficult as it is difficult to assess rock mass paramelers and have experimental displacement measurements available to compare with numerical results in so slow and Jong term movements. 1.5.5.2 Debris and earth flows In debris and earth flows. the sliding surface is not usually visible and when a Problem definition and landslide classification 23 sliding surface is visible, it occurs for a short period of time. The limit between the moving mass and the underlying soil can be a clear differential movement surface ora distributed sliding zone. Varnes classified the debris flows as: Debris flows, debris avalanches, solifiuctions, block streams, soil creeps. 1. Debris flows are called mud flows in some other classifications. Vames (1978) distinguished debris from mud flows on the basis of the particle size of the materials which are involved in the flow movement. Some typical distributions of the particle size of materials involved in mud flows and debris flows are reported in Figure 1.10. Debris flows commonly result from unusual heavy rainfalls or cles V fa) 199 /|—_—_—. 80 60 aoe 20 — —- ) Figure 1.10. Grain size distribution of mud flow and debris flow materials. a) After Hutchin: son (1988): 1-2) Mud flows; 3-5) Debris flows; 6) Wet concrete. b) After Giani & Mancini (1988): 1) Specimens gathered on the side of the debris flow area: 2) On the flowing material: 3) On the material in the toe zone in a debris flow which occured in 1987 in Valiellina (haly, 24 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 1.8. Debris flow in Val Brem- bana, Lombardy. Italy. By A. Frassoni, iSMES from snow or frozen soil thawing. The debris flow movement has been classified as very rapid (Plate 1.8). 2. Debris avalanches are those types of movement which have similar charac- teristics to the classical movements of snow or ice. In debris avalanches the rate of movement is very rapid or extremely rapid, whilst the phenomenon is progressive and always involves greater masses of debris during the flow and tumble, 3. Solifiuctions or soil flows involve the movement of superficial debris. This phenomenon is, in areas of perennially or permanently frozen ground. better termed gelifluction and is however dependent on the frost-thaw cycles which can seasonly determine a weakening of the debris mantle cavering the slope bedrock. with a consequent viscous curling debris movement. Solifluctions are typical in gentle slopes ang are also recognizible (Civita, 1982) because of the unusual tree forms with the trunk being bent near to the root and straight in the upper part 4. Block streams are typical movements in semi-arid environments and can be caused by the rapid lowering of rock mass mechanical features combined with Problem definition and landslide classification 25 5. Soil creeps are extremely slow movements which are imperceptible if displacement measurements are not carried out over a long period of time. Movernents have a viscous character and involve almost fine grain debris material in non-periglacial areas. The rate of movement is in the 10 mm/year range, the movements are determined by the wet content variation in the debris material; these wet variations are usvally cavsed by temperature variation The earth flow movements have been classified by Varnes as: Wet sand or silt flows, rapid earth flows, earth flows, dry sand flows, loess flows 1. Wet sand or silt flows have been identified for natura! and man made slopes, both in sub-aqueous and in a wholly sub-aerial environment. In the first environ ment. instability ofien occurs when banks of sand in the toe zone of a submerged slope are subjected to score and to repeated fluctuations of pore water pressure because of the rise and fall of the tide or the stormy sea wave action. In the sub-acqueous environment, the flow may be of a liquefaction type. This occurs when. in the lower saturated slope part. high excess of pore pressures are induced by the weight of the upper part of the slope. Flow movements vary from rapid to very rapid 2. Rapid earth flows occur in fine-grained silt, clay and clayey sand. These flows form a complete gradation with slides involving failure caused by lateral spreading. They involve not only liquefaction of the subjacent material. but also retrogressive failure and liquefaction of the entire slide mass. This phenomenon usually takes place in sensitive materials, that is. in those materials whose remoulding strength is decreased to a small fraction of its original value at constant water content (Varnes, 1978). Flow movements are very rapid. 3. Slower and drier earth flows are typical in plastic earth whenever there is a combination of clay or weathered clay-bearing rocks, moderate slopes, and adequate moisture to provoke instability (Plate 1.9) (Varnes, }958). 26 Rock slope stability analysis 4, Dry sand flows vary from rapid to very rapid movements. These movements are common along shores or embankments underlain by dry granular material Flowing material may be channelized or sheetlike. 5. Loess flows are dry and extremely rapid movements. The instability is caused by earthquake shock which destroys the fairly coherent internal structure of the porous silt which makes up the loess. The loess therefore becomes similar toa dry sand which can flow. Water action can be superimposed onto this failure mechanism and in seismic conditions liquefaction phenomenon can arise, deter- mining an earth-like flow movement Analytical models of Aow-slide phenomena have been proposed with the purpose of determining the motion equations of the Rowing material and conse- quently the maximum extension of the movement. Hutchinson (1986) has analyzed slope failure due to a structural collapse and the consequent flow-slide of the unstable material. The analyzed slopes can be formed by a metastable, non coherent matenial and the instability is caused by extemal actions such as those due to an earthquake or to pile driving. Hutchinson analyzed the movement of a generic flow slice by applying the rigid motion equation and neglecting every possibie viscous movement inside the flowing mass. The model schematizes the flow evolution and exhaustion as being dependent on the slice consolidation due to the natural drainage which occurs during the flow movements. Results of the model application were also compared successfully to some real cases such as that of the Aberfan industrial waste landslide (1965). Plate 1.10. Complex landslide which occurred in 1988 in Mount Zandila in Valteltina, Italy. The movement started with a rock sliding on two orthogonal discontinuity planes and a subsequent rockfall occured (Govi, 1988). The movement continved with a debris-avalanche and a dehrie-flow which is reraenizable in the lower dart Problem definition and landslide classification 27 1.5.6 Complex movements Slope movements are often the combination of one or more of the above described principal movements. Complex instability movements can be those in which the moving mass is subjected in one part to one movement type and in an other part to another type of movement (Case 1). A second complex movement type is that in which the moving mass passes from one movement type to a second movement type during travelling (Case 2; Plates 1.10-1.12). Varnes (1978) described: 1. Rockfall and debris avalanche (Case 2); 2. Rock topple and rotational slide (Case 1); 3. Rock slide and rock fall (Case 2); 4. Cambering and valley bulging (Case 1); 5. Slump (or rotational sliding) and earth flow (Case 2). Some of these phenomena types are analyzed in Chapter 7. Plate 1.11. Debris flow at Mount Zandila. By G. Robiglio, }988. 28 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 1.12. Mount Zandila landslide blocked Val Pola with a 300 m rise of the debris Sow on the opposite valley slope. The landslide movement occurred on a path of about 100m. Taken in 1988. CHAPTER 2 Rock slope engineering 2.1 INTRODUCTION The Varnes classification of slope movements considers the sliding phenomena by differentiating the movements involving a few block units from those move- ments which involve several block units. The examples of Varnes, used for the examplification of lateral spreads. gravitational rock creep or complex movements, involve large masses and consequently large landslides Traditionally, large scale (km) instability phenomena are examined in the engineering geology field, while small scale instability analysis pertains to the soil and rock mechanics field, even though both the geological and engineering backgrounds are required in order to study both large and smal! landslide problems. Rock slope engineering (Piteau & Peckover, 1978) is not concerned with large landslides, but with individual rock block falls, translation of small rock masses, occasional slides of accumulated debris from gullies, talus slopes and postglacial slide areas. The main purposes of rock slope engineering are to determine rock slope stability conditions, to stabilize unstable natural slopes and to design, while maintaining safety conditions, the rock excavation slopes by obtaining optimal conditions from the reliability and the economical points of view The subsequent chapters of this book are mainly dedicated to rock slope engineering even though the geomechanical rock mass characterization and the slope stability analysis methods here reported are equally uscfu) for large land- slide engineering analysis. “Some examples of typical complex movement mechanisms are also dealt with 2.2 PROBLEM DEFINITION From an engineering point of view, ‘rock’ means a compact semi-hard mass of a variety af minerals 30 Rock slope stability analysis All the features, starting from ultra microscopic to macroscopic, which in- fluence the strength and the deformation characteristics of rocks, can be called defects. The influence of these defects (Lama & Vutukuri, 1978) is to decrease the load carrying capacity of rocks and cause a concentration of stresses in cenain directions around an excavation. Defects in rocks can be grouped into the following categories: Fabric defects and structural defects ‘The first defect category refers to the component part of the rock which may be arranged in a regular or irregular order relative to each other which defines what is known as rock fabric (Plate 2.1), Structural defects in rocks are of three types: Folds. faults and joints. These defects are mainly duc to tectonic stresses to which the rocks have been subjected during the course of history. The quantitative description of structural defects, Plate 2.1. Volcanic tuff flow structures on Ischia is- land, Campania, Haly. By G. Miglian. Rock slope engineering 31 commonly called ‘discontinuity’, is one of the main problems of rock slope engineering and is dealt with in Chapter 3 (see also Plate 2.2), Rocks can also be weathered by different causes such as mechanical processes or chemical dissolutions. Rock weathering is a process which causes alteration of the rock due to the action of water, carbon dioxide and oxygen. The effect of weathering is not limited to the surface, but extends deeper depending on the presence of channels, which permit the flow of water and contact with the atmosphere. Weathering, results in a decreased competency of the rock from the engineering point of view. Rock slope stability depends on the strength features of the rocks. the geome- trical and strength features of the discontinuities and the presence of weathering action on the rock and rock defects. Rock slope excavations have been classified on the basis of the relative importance of the defects and alterations to the slope stability (Duncan & Goodman, 1968). Plate 2.2. Quarry faces in porphiric formation, Rock discontinuities determine the columnar shape of the rock. By M. Fomaro. 32 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 2.1. Rock slope excavation classification (after Duncan & Goodman, 1968): 1-3) Continuous masses, 4-5) Pseudo-continuous; 6-10) Discontinuous: 1) Strong homogeneous; 2) Weak homoge- neous; 3) Terraced rocks; 4) Ravelling: 5) Slumping rocks: 6) Sheeted: 7) Slabby; 8) Blocky; 9) Buttressed; 10) Schistose rocks. Excavated rocks are divided into continuous, pseudo-continuous aid disconti- nuous masses. The diffent types of rock slopes are illustrated in Figure 2.1, with examples of relative rock types and include: ~ Continuous masses: !) strong homogeneous, 2) weak homogeneous and 3) terraced rocks; ~ Pseudo-continuous masses: 4) ravelling. 5) slumping rock; — Discontinuous: 6) sheeted, 7) slabby, 8) blocky, 9) buttressed and 10) schistose rocks. ‘A rock slope can be homogeneous or can be made up of a complex of rocks of different geological origins with a different sequence of sediments or be intruded by bodies of igneous rocks or partially metamorphosed Different lithological units can have different strength, deformation and com- petence features. Rock slope engineering 33 The weathering of friable rock material, such as sandstone, or of closed fractured shales can be the cause of slope ravelling. When the slopes are faulted, fault zones can be subjected to slumping. A fault gauge behaves like a clay material, while a fault breccia behaves like debris composed of broken rack fragments varying in size from centimeters to deci- meters. Rock slopes can be affected by sheet structures parallel to the slope face. The thickness of the individual sheets may increase from a few decimeters near the surface to several metres at a depth. Sedimentary rock depositional features can determine regular bedding and the principal weakness surfaces. present at the excavation faces, are the parallel bedding planes (Plates 2.3-2.5). Different types of mechanisms can cause the development of the forces that result in the jointing formation. ‘A buttressed rock slope can be determined by the intersection of joint planes with conjugate planes. Unstable rock wedges can therefore be exposed on the slope faces (Plate 2.6). Blocky rocks can be determined by the intersection of different joint plane sets and by the presence of other weakness planes in regular or irregular shapes (Plate 2.7). 34 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 2.4. Subvertical closely layered limestone at the Strozza quarry, Lombardy, Italy. By A Auzoni, ISMES. a Bees se esata ars Seok Plate 2.5. Closely jointed and layered limestone excavation faces at the Antoigne quarry, Belgium. By M. Cardu. Rock slope engineering 35 Plate 2.7. Quarry faces in Baveno ink. Piedmont, ttaly, The three recognizable exploitation splitting joint sets, are almost perpendicular. By G. Gola A rock slope is called schistose (Plate 2.8) when the foliation, which occurs in the coarse-grained metamorphic racks, is closely spaced Slope failure mechanism can be differentiated on the basis of the Duncan and Goodman rock slope classification. 36 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 2.8. Quarry faces in onthogneiss. The wo conjugate joint sets are perpe schistosity which is the main splntubility plane of the explo icvlar to the ion. By G. Gola, ITEA. Table 2.1. Typical shear strengih and unit weight rock values (afer Hoek & Bra Rock type Dry unit weight (kN/m3) Hard igneous rocks: Granite, basalt, porphyry 25-30 35-53 35-45 Metamorphic socks: Quarzite. gneiss, st: 25-28 20-40 30-40 Hard sedimentary rocks: Limestone, dolomite, sandstone 23-28 10-30 33-45 Soft sedimentary rocks: Sandstone, coal. cha'k, shale 17-23 The shear strength characteristics and unit weight of intact rock determine the stability conditions of a homogencous slope. A typical range of cohesion. friction angle and unit weight value, of the main geological rock groups are given (Hoek & Bray, 1981) in Table 2.1 ‘As the intact rock shear failure envelope is nonlinear, the strength features depend on the applied normal stress level as described in Chapter 5 Uniaxial compressive strength is probably the most important feature for the mechanical characterization of intact rocks. The uniaxial compressive strength of the intact rock is a characteristic required Rock slope engineering 37 in many cases, including stability problems, which are governed by the shear strength of the discontinuity planes. This can be utilized, forexample, as a reference point, for the disconsinuity wall trength, or for the buckling analysis of rock slabs. Table 2.2 reports some typical values of uniaxial compressive strength ob- tained in Italian rock mechanics laboratories. Terraced rocks can determine stability problems when deformation. features of the alternate layers are different and tensile stresses can be induced im the stiffer layers, as a result of ‘extrusion’ of the more deformable layers. As the tensile of rocks is very weak. vertical tension cracks open in stiff rock. Tension cracks, filled by water, can induce near surface failure in the slope. The ravelling of the weathered surface material on a slope is a phenomenon which produces the fall of small individual pieces of the detenorated rowk and the accumulation of a debris material at the base of the slope. The stability conditions of the rock slope can be reduced by ravelling, above all, if the detached rock pieces come from above, from the foot of the slope. In this case, topplimg, fall and sliding of the overhanging slope rock mass can be released and an analysis of these movements should be carried out, Stability analysis of fault breccia or fault gouge are performed by examining the potential sliding of the filling material on rotational or translatiorzal sliding surfaces. Rock slope engineering is devoted to the discontinuous rock slope: analysis. The failure surface, in discontinuous rock masses, tends to follow the pre-existing discontinuities and does not occur throughout the intact rock portions. tev any great extent, unless the rock is very soft. The shear strength of the rock mass is determined largely by the presemce of the discontinuities and the result is that the rock mass behaviour results to be anisotropic in its strength and deformation features The principal instability phenomena of discontinuous rock slopes axe due to toppling and sliding Toppling conditions of a rock block are reached when the block is: zs tall and thin as the weight force vector of the block falls outside its base. Sliding conditions of a rock mass are determined when the sheaw’ strength mobilized on the potential sliding surface reaches the shear strength available for maintaining the mass stable. The ratio between available and mobilized shear strength defines the safety factor of a slope. The rock slope stability analysis and the consequent safety factor determination depend on the identification of the potentially unstable phenomenon ard on the quantitative description of the physical and geometrical features governing the Problem; this description also involves the hydraulic pressure determinazion. Rock slope stability conditions are more influenced by movements than soil slope stability conditions, Sma}] movements can determine a large fall in the available shear strenoth and therefnre rance a Larne enfety reduntion 38 Rock slope stability analysis Table 2.2. Uniaxial compressive strength of rocks C. (Mal . to | ost | | I | or) dil log a me ig | | | | | gE 3 ee 38 ge 828 BEES PEPER EBEE § fs £8 é83 8 828 88382 F 855 § 1) Carbonate rocks; Ml) Lithified argilaceous rocks; Ill) Arenaceous rocks; IV) Metamorphic crystalline rocks (trom finer grained to coarser grained): V) Igneous rocks (from finer to coarser). 1. Finale, 2. Pioganismi, 3. Fiastrone, 4, Fiume Santo, 5. Vicenza, 6. Porto Torres, 7. Rive del Garda, 8. S. Vito dei Normanni, 9. Pineroio, 10. Carrara, 11. Vaidieri, 12. Valdieri, 13, Perlato di Sicilia, 14. Riva del Garda. 15. Porto Tories, 16. Salafossa. 17. S. Vito dei Normanni, 18 Premagio, 19. Edolo, 20, Lavagna, 21. Pavana, 22. Ridracoli, 23. Pavana, 24. Potenza, 25. Pavana, 26. M. Aniola, 27. Salatossa, 28. Ridracoli,29 Pavana, 30. Brasimone, 31, Rivoli, 32 Gioveretto, 33. Edolo, 34. Cervinia, 35. Voliri, 36. Vaimalenco, 37. Vaimalenco, 38. Voitri, 39. Sondrio, 40. Chiotas, 41. Luserna, 42. Bussoleno, 43. Luserna. 44. Adamelio, 45. Bronzolo, 46. Albiano, 47. Albiano, 48. Lasa, 49. Baselga ci Pine, 50. Gioveretto. 51. Orvieto, 52. S. Fecelino, 53. Traverselle, 54. S. Federico, 55. Tatoro, 56. Baveno, 57. Monte Stefano. Rock slope engineering 39 Consequently, the risk to a rock slope excavation is greater than that (o a soil slope, even though the two average designed safety factors are the same. ‘The safety factor designed for a rock slope should be greater than the safety factor for a soil slope in order to maintain the same risk degree, otherwise, residual shear strength features should be assumed to be *a priori’ in ordes to define the available sliding surface strength. A rational rock slope design, minimizing rock slope excavation and reinforcing works, must take the reliability of the works into account. The terms of reference. conceming safety factors, work reliability. and long term mining and civil work stability conditions are completely different (Scavia et al., 1988). Mining excavations are designed on the basis of the maximum mineral recovery and the instability risks are mainly assessed by means of economical criteria. Civil excavations, however, are designed on the basis of the different maintenance, control and efficiency necessities of the civil works. 2.3 STABILITY ANALYSIS METHODS A procedure. which is able to define the geometry of blocks or of the system of blocks isolated by discontinuity planes and exposed on the examined excavation face or on the natural slope surface, is developed in every stability analysis method. Sliding analysis methods can use static or dynamic equilibrium equations. ‘A static equilibrium analysis firstly examines the kinematic possibitity of the sliding or toppling of each block which has a face exposed on the slope face. The weight forces, the forces due to water filling the joints, the resistant and the sliding forces are then computed and the equilibrium equations are solved in order to determine whether the block is stable or not. If the block is not stable and a sliding movement occurs, the method assumes that it is in an indefinite motion without changes in motion. Static equilibrium analysis, carried out using the Limit Equilibrium Method, only examines the incipience of motion and does not consider the subsequent behaviour of the whole system of blocks. The methods that use static equilibrium equations, whether involving a single tock block or a system of blocks, assume the block fo be stiff and only analyze sliding phenomena (Wittke, 1965; Goodman & Bray, 1976; Chan & Einstein, 1981; Lin & Fairhurst, 1988). ‘The methods that use dynamic equilibrium equations simulate the behaviour of a blocky system by assuming a more realistic hypothesis by referring 10 the examined physical phenomenon. The Distinct Element Method, an efficient procedure for dynamic analysis, is also able to examine the stability conditions of a blocky rock mass (Cundai). 1971, 1988; Cundall & Hart, 1985: Hart et al., 1988) 40 Rock slope stability analysis A system of blocks, analyzed by means of the Distinct Element Method. can exihibit different stable and unstable block configurations, in different computa- tion steps, throughout the whole development of the numerical analysis (see Chapter 9) 2.4 STATIC AND DYNAMIC EQUILIBRIUM EQUATIONS. The analysis of a parallelepiped block resting on an inclined plane (Figure 2.2) has been considered as a first approximation of the rock slope stability conditions in which the dip and the dip direction of rock joints can produce either individual block sliding or toppling. The static and dynamic equilibrium equations of the problem have been developed (Sagaseta, 1986) with the purpose of analyzing the rigid block instability modes on an inclined plane. The results of that analysis are here reported and the application field of methods which considers static and dynamic equations are aiso defined. The data of the problem are the height h. the width b and the weight W of the block, the inclination angle & and the friction angle 6 of the plane on which the block rests. The vnkowns are: The normal (iV) and the tangential components (7) of the base reaction, the position (a) of its application point and for the dynamic equilibrium equations, the components of the linear acceleration (i, £) of the gravity center and the angular acceleration (8) of the rotation. Figure 2.3a plots the results of the problem with the static equilibrium equa- tions in the form of a stability chart, while Figure 2.3b plots the stability chart, obtained by solving the problem using the dynamic equilibrium equations. The stability chants define the zones corresponding to stability. sliding, toppling and toppling with sliding conditions. The static equilibrium equation conditions la) ib) Figure 2.2. Block sliding and toppling analysis: a) Static equilibrium problem variables: b) Dynamic equilibrium problem variables (afler Sagaseta, 1986). Rock slope engineering 41 2 + h \ stable incipience of sliding tans (a) tene tena 4 om | | fane j stable | sliding toppling and sliding tane = 7 i ———— gant ' topple tan = 0,5 tanea . { : 7“ oe 7 4 tance (yy rene Figure 2.3, Sibility chart: a) Static equiliium analysis; b) Dynamic equilibrium analysis are plotted in the b//= ‘an a plane; dynamic equilibrium equation conditions are plotted in the b/(/ tan @) ~ tan ot/tan 6 plane. The conditions which define these four situations have been analyzed by Bray & Goodman (1981) who used a base friction mode! for this purpose and also differentiated the capabilities of limit equilibrium analysis from the capabilities of dynamic analysis. Sagaseta (1986) subsequently gave a complete analytical solution of the problem, by examining the toppling with sliding limit conditions in detail As can be seen in Figure 2.3b the limit between the toppling regions with and Without sliding is a curve whose shape depends on the absolute value of friction angles. It intercepis the horizontal axis ata value of tan a = 4 tang. The solution of the problem obtained by using the static equilibrium equations can be used to define a stable situation or motion incipience for sliding or toppling Situations. Dynamic analysis allows one to determine the motion equation of Unstable blocks. Static analysis can be carried out (o determine the limit equilibrium condition Or the relationship between the existing situation and the correspondent limit equilibrium situation by computing the safety factor. 42 Rock slope stability analysis Unstable situations can de analyzed, using static equilibrium equations, only in order to determine the stabilizing forces which are able to change the unstable conditions of blocks into stable conditions. Dynamic analysis must be used when the problem consists in the computation of the block motion or when the blocks are subjected to cyclic siresses or pulsing loads (e.g. in earthquake conditions). 2.5 SAFETY FACTOR AND LIMIT EQUILIBRIUM METHOD The safety factor concept is imroduced (Hoek & Bray. 1981) in order va quantitat- ively define the stability degree of the single block previously examined using static and dynamic equilibrium equations. The only force acting on the block is due to gravity. hence the block weight force W acts ventically downwards (Figure 2.4). The component of W which tends to cause the sliding of the block is W sino. ‘The component of W perpendicular to the contact surface between the base of the block and the inclined plane is W cos c. The normal siress 6 acting across the contact surface (also called potential sliding surface). is given by 6 = (Weosa)/A Q.1) where A is the area of the block base. Assuming that the shear strength T on the sliding surface is defined by the Coulomb criterion (see Chapter 4) expressed as: T= ¢ +6 tan o, where cand 6 are the cohesion and friction angle and taking Equation 2.1 into account, the follow- ing expression is obtained for the shear strength of the block: tect Weos a/A tan (22) ‘The shear force R (R = tA) which resists to sliding down the inclined plane is therefore: R=cA+Weos aang (2.3) Figure 2.4. Sliding of a block Rock slope engineering 43 The limiting block equilibrium condition corresponds to the perfect equibrium between the forces which tend to cause the block to slide and the forces which tend to oppose the sliding of the block. This condition is given by: W sin a=cA +Wos a tan (2.4) If the cohesion is nil, the limiting equilibrium condition. given in Equation 2.4, simplifies to & = 6, which is the same condition of the incipience of sliding motion oblained in the previous section. In order to quantitatively define the stability conditions of the examined block, or. more generally, of a slope under conditions other than those of limiting equilibrium, the safety factor concept is defined as a stability degree index. The safety factor is defined as the ratio of the maximum mobilized force which resists sliding and the existing force which tends to induce sliding. In terms of stresses, the safety factor is defined as the ratio between the maximum mobilitable shear strength on the examined potential sliding surface and the effectively mobilized shear stress: 1 (maximum mobilitable) t (mobilized) The safety factor can also be interpreted as a number for which, the available shear strength parameters, cohesion and friction angles, must be divided to reach the limit equilibrium condition The principal hypothesis of the limit equilibrium method are as follows: ~ The failure surface can be a simple or composite shear failure surface: = The sliding mass is made up of a single or more intact stiff blocks which can move without significant strain or failure of the block rock matrix The Jinit equilibrium method is defined as an overall analysis method because the solution of the stability problem is given fora system of blocks or for a single block by means of the overall safety factor, which is constant on the whole examined surface. An example is here presented in order to clarify the concept of the overail safety factor. In Figure 2.5 a rock slope. made up of two blocks. is reported, The two blacks are separated by a vertical joint which lies on two inclined discontinuity surfaces. Both blocks have the kinematic possibility of sliding. A stability analysis method can be set up by considering the possibility of Block 1 sliding in such a way as to mobilize the whole available friction on the sliding surface and subsequently to determine the stability condition of Block 2, subjecied to force R3, which represents the force exceeding the mobilitable resistant force. The R; force computed according to this method is: sin (B, ~0)) "cos (6.465 -B,) =W (2.6) 44 Rock slope stability analysis all Figure 2.5. Two blocks sliding on a rock slope. where W/, is the weight of Block 1, B, is the dip of the base of the contact surface of Block 1 and 6,:(i=1, 2,3) are the friction angle values on Planes 1,2 and 3 (the cohesion is assuined 10 be 0). The safety factor of Block 2 (F,) is given as: (WV, - cos B+; sin (0; By )] tan b> Fy 2 W, sin B, +R; cos (,—B,) (2.7) The limiting equilibrium method analysis is however able to define an overall safety factor, by determining the limiting equilibrium condition of the whole system by reducing the friction strength of the three discontinuity planes by the same coefficient (overall safety factor) 2.6 EFFECT OF WATER PRESSURE IN ROCK DISCONTINUITIES Water filling discontinuities involves a lowering of stability conditions for natural or artificial slopes The scheme of Figure 2.6 considers a rock block resting on an inclined plane and separated from the upper part of the slope by a subvertical discontinuity plane. Water flowing down the slope generates, on the subvertical plane and on the base contact plane. the water pressure distribution illustrated in Figure 2.6. This pressure distribution results in a force V due to water filling the subvertical discontinuity and in an uplift force U due to water flowing at the surface between the block and its base. The water pressure increases linearly with depth down to the intersection of the subvertica) plane with the base and linearly decreases from this intersection point to the lower edge of the block in contact with the surface where the water pressure is nil. Force V is resolved in the components Vp and V,, parallel and normal to the sliding plane respectively. Rock slope engineering 45 Figure 2.6. Diagram of water pressures act- ing on a block. In Figure 2.6: W=V v,=0 The normal stress acting at the base of the block has to be considered in terms of effective stress as: 6 =(W cos &- UA The safety factor hence becomes: pa CA t{W cos—U) tan @ - Wesina+V 2.7 PRINCIPAL FACTORS AFFECTING ROCK SLOPE STABILITY ANALYSIS The rock slope stability is conditioned by the presence of weakness or discontinu- ity planes inside the rock mass. The strength and deformation features of the rock mass strongly depend on continuity, spacing, orientation and on the mechanical features of these planes. The first step of a stability analysis is therefore to find a connection between the discontinuity seis and the potential instability kinematisms. The second step is to determine the available shear strength on the discontinu- ity planes on which rock blocks can slide 46 Rock slope stability analysis ‘The third step is to assess the water flow conditions in the discontinuities or in the intesively fractured media in order to determine the water pressures and consequently the water thrusts and the uplifting forces acting on the potential unstable blocks. The stability analysis is then carried out for the potentially unstable blocks in order to determine the slope safety factor or to determine the motion of the blocks detached from the rock slope for rockfall analysis. Finally, the efficiency of stabilizing technique applications (excavation, drain- age, rock bolts) are computed still using the stability analysis for the cases in which the slope stability conditions need to be improved The previously mentioned analysis steps are described and examined in the subsequent chapters as follows: — Survey and quantitative descriptions of discontinuities (Chapter 3); — Determination of shear strength of discontinuities, intact rocks and rock masses (Chapter 4): — Analysis of the water flow in discontinuities and rock masses (Chapter 5): ~ Analysis of the unit block size of the rock mass and of the sliding and toppling kinematisms and geomechanical model set up (Chapter 6): — Analysis of rockfalls, topplings and bucklings (Chapter 7): Analysis of the sliding phenomena (Chapter 8): — Dynamic analysis (Chapter 9); — Stabilization and protection method analysis (Chapter 10). Mathematical models for the analysis of rockfall detached from rock walls are dealt with in Chapter 7. Shear failure of rock blocks on pre-existing discontinuity surfaces are dealt with in Chapter $ under the name of sliding phenomena analysis. Some sliding phenomena can evolve in a rock fall phenomena. From the classification of movement point of view. these rock landslides are named rockfalls or translational slides (see Chapter 1) (Civita, 1982) on the basis of the prevailing mode of instability, of the discontinuity orientation and of the lytolo- gical features of the rock media. Similarly, the incipience conditions of toppling and sliding movemenis are treated in Chapter 7. for when it concerns toppling analysis. These conditions involve static equilibrium and not the subsequent motion for unstable rock blocks which can be sliding. toppling and falling. In this case, the complete instability motion is called with the name of the prevailing movement from the movement classification point of view. CHAPTER 3 Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 3.1 DISCONTINUITY TYPES Discontinuity is, in rock mechanics, the most commonly used term for rock defects. Bedding planes in sedimentary rocks, éleavagés and schistosities in metamorphic rocks are typical examples of fabric defects. Foldyifaults and joints are structural defects. “ 3.1.1 Bedding planes Bedding planes represent interruptions in the course of sedimentary rock grain deposition which are «therefore separated by beds or strata (Plates 3.1-3.2). Different bedding or stratification and separation plane features depend on different modes of deposits. Sedimentary rock depositional features have been classified by Duncan (1969) as: Regular bedding, current bedding, cross bedding, graded bedding, slump bedding, ripple marks (top wave or bottom current) and sun cracks (Figure 3.1). Bedding planeishear features are influenced by the morphology of the beddi plane surfaces, the mineralogy, the. different grain size distribution, the orientation and thesealed degree of grains (Plate 3.3). Laminates and wavy surfaces exhibit a different shear behaviour. Mineralogy determines the frictional behaviour of planarlickenside surfaces. The orientation of grains is infiuenced by the transport medium (traction or suspension) and_by the €fvironmenty(gravity or slump). Differem. grain size distributions can determine intériocking forces between the grains when the bedding planes are subjected to shear forces and therefore to a dilatance effect of the bedding surfaces. A partial sealed state of the bedding plane surfaces can cause some cohesion between the beds. Pre-existing morphological orientation of grains. induced by the depositional process, may give fise\towweakthess planes parallel to the bedding planes. 3.1.2 Cleavage planes Cleavage planes are generated under the influence of tensile stresses which 48 Rock slope stabiliry analysis Plate 3.2. Example of beddings in limestone, Cingue Terre. Liguria, Italy. By L. Sambuelli Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 49 SS ———__ |) (o) ESS . = *) —— SS Eee ~_ (82) 4 (a) Figure 3.1. Depositional features of sedimentary rocks: a) Ri bedding: c) Graded bedding; d) Stump bedding: e,) Top wave current ripple marks: f) Sun cracks (after Duncan, 1969). lar bedding: b) Current ipple marks: 5) Bottom Plate 3.3, Upper advance face of a tunnel at the ‘Potasos Li abregat’ mine. Spain. The mineral a the left top is cumnallite and is surrounded by 4 muhiple layer of sylvite which is itself surrounded by halite. There are several thin ayers of merl:clay intercalated with the individual layer of the salts which provide a highly textured: image. By J.C. Catalina AITEMIN. 50 Rock slope stability analysis determine rock Splitting along definite parallel planes. Cleavage is also associated with changes in rock fabric and large foldings. Cleavage is a secondary structure and is usually accompanied byiat least some recrystallization of the rock. 3.1.3 Schistosities Schistosities are the varieties of foliations that occur in the Coarser-grained metamorphic rocks and js usually the result of the parallel arrangement of platy and ellipsoidal grain within the rock substance. The schistosity surfaces are usually slickenside and.slightly undulated exhibit- ing a‘fegligiblédilatance in direct shear conditions. 3.1.4 Folds Folds are caused by a.bend)in the strata of layered rock. From a rock mechanics point of view, folds can be classified on the basis of the formation mechanism as 1. Flexure folding; 2. Shear folding. A schematization of the folding mechanisms and of the extemal kinematic and tectonic forces which generate folding are reported in Figure 3.2. In flexure folding the mechanism involves adjacent bed sliding. In shear folding, shearing or slipping occurs along closely spaced secondary surfaces not parallel to the original primary bedding surfaces. Folding strain) under the influence of horizontal stresses, can furthes progress by determining buckling\pf the beds with the occurence of cleavage and tensional joims. Figure 3.2. Mechanism of folding: a) Shear or slip\folding: ) Flexure folding (flexural slip) mechanism in- volving shear motion (after Bagdley, 1965), Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 5\ 3.1.5 Faults Faults are fractures or fractured zones along which there has been an appreciable shear displacement. The displacements which occur between the two opposite sides of the faults can vary from a few centimeters up to many kilometers ‘The faultdip and dip direction correspond to the state of stress which existed at the time of the fault formation. The faults can be classified according to the direction of the maximum and minimum stresses which determined the stress field. The rock walls of the faults are frequently slickenside as a consequence of the shear failure and movement Some weak materials, such as fault gouge (clay) and fault breccia (the assemblage of rock fragments), can occur between the walls (Plate 3.4). Some minerals such as graphite or chlorite, which have low frictional strength, can also be found between the rock walls Plate 3.4. Example of fault filled with breccia in alpine prasinitic formations, ltaly. 52. Rock slope stability analysis The faultthickness may vary from metres, as in the case of major regional structures, to millimeters, as in the case of local faults. The ground adjacent to the fault may be weakened by associated structures such as drag folds or secondary faults. Asa result of these factors, faults are zones of Jow shear strength on which slip may readily occur. 3.1.6 Joints Joints are fractures in rocks along which there has been little or no displacement or very slight movement perpendicular to the joint surface. Joints can be systematic or non-systematic. Systematic joints occur in a joint setwhich represents a group of parallel joints. Joint sets intersect to form a joint system. Non-systematic joints do not have any definite patfer® and frequently terminate at systematic joints. t tS Joints are secondary features of rock tectonics and they have a definite relationship with the regional structure and can be called longitudinal. cross or diagonal (Figure 3.3) Longitudinal joints are formed roughly parallel to the fold axes due'to > tensile stress at a high angle to the bedding. v% b 3 Figure 3.3, Geometric orientation of joints relative to fold axis and to principal stress axes: 1) Cross joints; 2) Longitudinal joints; 3) Diagonal joints: 2) Maximum stress; b) Intermediate stress: ¢) Minimum stress. Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities Cross joints are roughly perpendicular to the fold axes and generally terminate AgainsDsystematic joints. Diagonal joints generally occur in pairs and approximately symmetric to the longitudinal and cross joints with a high angle to the bedding and are the result of shear failure, Different stress states, at the time of the joint formation, induce different orientation and different types of stress at failure (tension or shear depending on the principal stress directions). Finally joints are the most common and usually the most significant structvral features in rocks (Piate 3.5). 3.2 ROCK SLOPE DISCONTINUITY CLASSIFICATION In the slope design of jointed rocks the shape'and size of blocks, which are isolated by discontinuities, need to be assessed on the basis of the data gathered from structural. surveysisuch as spacing, extent, dip and dip direction. However, (0 assess the existence of potentially unstable rocks. the size of the blocks should be compared to the dimension of the examined slope face. Features such as spacing. extent and mode of origin have a typical range of 54 Rock slope stability analysis Name Observ. scale Scale Spacing Principal origin Macro and micro fes- 2.5 em Laboratory s < 0.25¢m —_Alieration and ten- sures specimen sile origin fessures Beddings cleavages Rock block ‘in 0.25em60m Shear stress origin TT] chain. fractures Figure 3.4. Discontinuity characterization on the basis of the scale of observation (Duncan & Goodman, 1968). values for each type of rock defect or discontinuity (macro and micro fissures. beddings, cleavages, joints, faults) and the structural survey needs to be carried outlaccording ta the scale of observation. Duncan & Goodman (1968) proposed a discontinuity classification according to scale (Figure 3.4) An observation of the discontinuity surfaces helps to assess the fracture stress type, for example, in a tension fracture the surfaces are usvally clean and well matched, while in a shear fracture the surfaces tend to be filled with weathered material. © 2s . Asa joint system is composed of sets of parallel joints which represent multiple features, nonsysiematic joints represent single features. Single features can be mapped and accounted for one by one; multiple features must be grouped into sets. ol Ant Single features are usually major faults and dikes, while multiple features are ubiquitous joint sets. Rock mass and subsequent component discontinuities can be examined on defined domains, where systematic features such as joints. possess similar values or spacing. Geomechanical characterization of discominuities 55 3.3 ROCK FEATURE DESCRIPTION METHODS Rock feature description can be carried out, at different scales, by different specific methods. Air photogrammetry is an irreplaceable method for the geological reconnai- sence of rock types, major structures, faults, dikes and lythological contacts. Ata preliminary stage of the slope design, air photographs can be used to recognize domains where systematic features such as joints possess similar orientation or spacing The principal methods of describing rock masses and their component discon- invities, from a rock slope engineering point of view. are the survey of rock exposures, thesdrill core’ and drill hole description and the use of terrestrial photogrammetry. The photogranimetric method is convenient only if the orientation of a large number of discontinuities needs to be surveyed and it is the only practical aliemative to rock exposure survey if the relevant rock face is close to magnetic anomalies or if the rock face is unstable and/or inaccessible In the drill core and drill hole method, the axis of each drilling represents a sample line of the rock mass. Structural features such as discontinuity orientation, spacing and the number of sets cannot usually be adquately sampled by one hole without prior knowledge of the orientation and number af sets: In same slope design problems. suchas, forinstancé.quarr¥ slope designs, the drill core method is often considered too expensive if compared with the econom- ical advantage of a larger mineral recovery. from a steeper wall slope. A few drill cores can also be useful for the detenninaton of some rock mass quality indexes and for the assessing of discontinuity parameters such as spacing or frequency, Drill cores can be useful in assessing shear strength rock and discontinuity by means of laboratory tests. Rock exposure survey is the most common method used 10 assess the parame- ters required for the quantitative description of discontinuities Rock exposures are objectively surveyed (randomly) when the sampling is d out by setting fixed lines (scanlines) onto the surface of the rock mass. The surveyer can carefully and systematically work along the scanline by measuring and recording the discontinuity features required for a quantitative description. The ten parameters selected to describe discontinuities and rock masses are (ISRM, 1978): Orientation, spacing, persistence, roughness, wall strength, aper- lure, filling, seepage. number of sets, block size. ca 56 Rock slope stability analysis 3.4 ORIENTATION 3.4.1 Angle definition The measurement of the two angles, dip and dip direction, is sufficient to completely define the orientation of a discontinuity plane (Figure 3.5). Dip is the angle between the steepest declination liné of the discontinuity plane and the horizontal line. Dip direction is the angle between the Northern direction and the horizontal line measured clock-wise from the Norther direction. A third angle, called azimuth or strike, is often used in the discontinuity orientation definition, eventhough it gives additional information. Strike is the angle between the Northem diréction and the trace intersection of the discontinu- ity plane with a horizontal reference plane. The practical advantage of this measurement is that the visible trace of a discontinuity is seen on the horizontal surface of a rock mass. In orientation survey, special care must be taken to distinguish the irue strike of a plane from apparent strikes. The difference between the dip direction angle and the true strike angle is 90° As there are two directions of a trace and the angle bewween the two directions is 180°, the measured direction has to be defined with reference to the wo cardinal points between the chosen direction of the trace. For example, a plane Figure 3.5. Angles defining the plane orientation: oc= dip directions, y= dip. Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 57 which has a dip direction of 210° and a dip of 30° can be defined by means of a strike of N 30°W. The dip direction, which is 30°SW, should also be defined. A compass and a clinometer (ISRM. 1978) are used to obtain the dip direction and dip angle measurements. 3.4.2 Spherical projections A jointed rock’ mass can be considered as a system of blocks separated by discontinuity planes that can be joint systems or singular discontinuities. The blockchape is defined by discontinuity plane orientations while the block size is defined by discontinuity distances (Figure 3.6) Froma theoretical point of view, if only ubiquitous joints are present in the rock mass, the rock blocks will have fixed shapes but can assume any volume. The stability analysis of a rock block sliding on one or more discontinuity planes becomes more complicated than the case of the parallelepiped block sliding on a single plane, as reported in Chapier 2. By therefore excluding the simple case of the parallelepiped block examined by means of the Figure 2.2 stability charts'for which the safety factor is weight independent and values: F = tan O7fn a, the solution of the slope stability problems requires the vectorial analysis of the forces acting on the discontinuity plane. The direction of these forces depends on the orientation of the discontinuity planes which isolate the rock blocks and vector forces must be resolved on the normai and tangential directions to the sliding planes. An alternative method, incorporating spherical projection, can be used as a compiete substitute for the vectorial analysis or as a complement 1 the vector Figure 3.6. Pictorial drawing of a rock mass as a system of blacks 58 Rock slope stability analysis analysis to give clear perception of the geometrical features of the rock blocks involved in the slope stability problem. Spherical projection is a method of representation and analysis of the three- dimensional relations between planes and lines on a two dimensional diagram. In this book, spherical projection methods are applied in order to: 1) Analyse the discontinuity systems, by determining the central value and orientation distribution features with cluster analysis, 2) Visualise the potential instability phenomena of the blocks isolated by discontinuities, 3) Determines by meansjof the Goodman & Shi block theory (1985). block geometrical features ina rock mass and their connection with stability. Two different spherical projection methods have here been chosen: The equal-area projection (Lambert or Schmidt) for the statistical analysis of the spatial distribution discontinuity planes and the equal-angle stereographic or Wuif projection. Both the methods are used to construct the stereoplots of the discontinuity planes and visualise the main types of potential slope instability conditions. Basic principles of the equal-area method are here reported, while basic principles of the stereographic method are reported in Chapter 9, with references to the key block theory. 343: Equal-area projection In spherical methods, the projection sphere (reference:sphere) is free to move in space, but not free to rotate; therefore, every radial line Joining a point on the surface of the reference sphere with the center of the sphere has a fixed direction in space. If this sphere is then moved until its center lies on the plane which is to be projected, the intersection between the plane and sphere is a circle called “great circle’ (Figure 3.7). ‘The required projection of the discontinuity plane will be the projection of the circumference of the great circle onto the representation plane. If one considers the deepest line of the plane (the line OA of Figure 3.8) as the Jine to be projected by means of equal area projection, Figure 3,8 shows the basis for the construction method Line OA intersects the reference sphere at point A The equal-area projection of the OA line on the equatorial plane C-D firstly » a $ Sample mean, x Sample mean Figure 3.22. Frequency distribution of she mean values of the scantine sampled spacings: a) Histogram obtained from survey data: b) Gaussian curve chosen to approximate the histogram: the ratio between the dotted area and the total arew between the curve and the abscissa axis represents (=) (afier Priest & Hudson, 1981). 76 Rock slope stability analysis Table 3.1. Values of 6(:) for the normal distribution. oe) 0.675 0.50 0.842 0.60 1.036 0.70 1.282 0.80 1.645 0.90 1.960 0.95 2.576 0.99 discontinuity spacing is 0.175 m with 6 Vn = 0.140/ 80 = 0.018 m, By selecting a 98% confidence band, (4(z) = 0.95), the value obtained for = is 1.960. ft can be therefore said that there is 95% confidence of the mean value of 0.175 which lies within 0.035 of the population mean. The mean velue of the population therefore lies within the range 0.140-0.210 m with 95% of confidence. regardless of the distribution of the discontinuity spacing As previously mentioned, the discontinuity spacings x often follows the negative exponential probability density distribution f(x) = Ae, where the mean ¥and standard deviation 6 of the population are equal. A useful reduction of the formula occurs. For a sample of a size, the bandwidth of 100 6(:)% confidence is then § (= vn. Alternatively; this band width of 6(=) confidence can be written &€ ¥ where € is the allowable proportionate error. Hence: & Wn or n=(c/eP The last expression can be used to estimate the sample size required to achieve a given error bandwidth by substituting the appropriate values of = and € cor- responding to the required confidence level and the desired error bandwidth For example, if the mean spacing is required within an error bandwidth of £2064 at the 80% confidence level. € = 0.2, := 1.282 and» =41. Conversely this lastexpression can be used to establish the error limits given by acertain size. If the mean spacing is required within £10% at the 90% confidence level, € = 0.1.2= 1.645, sample size n will be: n2(1,648/0.1) 2271 These results show that several hundreds of sample are required to give reason- able estimates. Figure 3.23 reports an experimental spacing distribution in a joint set surveyed Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 77 frequency t \\ 4 0 10% . ——— frequency } — distance 0 10 cm Stat, distance Figure 3.23, Experimental spacing distribution in a join set survey carried au by Geodata in Aita Val Dora (aly):€ = 0.1.0 = 256.2 = 1,645, 0(2) = 0.9. se 809095 99% 100 ! Le toe 0.10 0.20 0.20 Figure 3.24. Estimation diagrams of the required number of spacing values versus the error bund for various confidence levels for negative exponential distributed spacings. The two points corresponding £0 Iwo couples of € and 1 values refer to the examples reported in the text (after Priest & Hudson, 1981) 78 Rock slope stability analysis on a rock wall in the Alta Val Dora, the sample size, confidence level and error bandwidth Figure 3.24 shows, by means of a graph, the required number of spacing values versus the error band for various confidence levels. It can be seen that the required sample size increases very rapidly as the allowable error is reduced 3.6. PERSISTENCE DEFINITIONS, SCOPES AND MEASUREMENTS The concept of a rock mass being a system of blocks separated by discontinuity planes is ideal. Discontinuity surfaces are not indefinitely continuous through the rock mass. The plane which contains a discontinuity crosses intact-rock regions. Joint persistence K is usually defined as the fraction of the area that is actually discontinuous. K can also therefore be expressed as the limit (Figure 3.25): dae, lim, AD AD in which D is aregion of the plane with area Ap and ap, is the area of the ith joint in D. The summation in the above expression refers (o all the joints in D Persistence can be roughly quantified by observing the discontinuity trace Jength on the rock exposure surface. _. In terms of trace length, joint persistence can be expressed as a Jimit length ratio. along a given line on a joint plane (Einstein et al., 1983): where Lg is the length of the straight line segment S and /s, is the length of the ith joint segmentin S. Figure 3.25, Discontinuity persistence given Ap total area Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 79 fa) (b) Figure 3.26. a) Discontinuity persistence given in joint leng segment: b) Idealized example of a stepped sliding surface terms: |) Rock bridge: 2) Joint Finally, with reference to a yock slope, joint length K can be expressed as (Figure 3.26): DIL+ZRBR where SIL represents the total length of the joint segments and SRBR the total length of segments crossing rock bridges. In slope design. stability analysis are often performed in cautious conditions by assuming 100% persistence on the shear planes. Because the available shear strength on rock bridges is one or wo orders of magnitudine greater than the shear strength available on discontinuity planes, it is still safer 10 assume 100% persistence when in doubt (ISRM, 1978). The shear strength of rock bridges and of discontinuities can not be simultaneously mobilized because failure occurs at differem displacements When a set of joints, less than 100% persistent, has been assessed. it is important to investigate the possibility of a stepped failure surface forming, as iMustrated by the 2-D failure situation in Figure 3.26b. Ina discontinuity persistence survey, the length /of the discontinuity traces ona rock wall exposure is systematically measured. in the scanline technique semi- trace lengths are measured. The semitrace is defined as the portion of the trace length between the scanline intersection point and the end of the trace. During the mapping of the discontinuity lengths the type of terminations are recorded according to the following scheme. Discontinuities which extend out- side the exposure (x) are differentiated from those that visibly terminate inside rock exposure (1), and from those that terminate against other discontinuities in the exposure (d). Mean and modal discontinuity len; data presented for each joint set. A degree of persistence can be determined for each joint set. fram the modal hs and len, distributions are the principal 80 Rock slope stability analysis discontinuity length, according to ISRM (1978). The mean value and distribution are used to set up a probabilistic jointed rock model which discretizes a rock mass for slope analysis The estimation of the mean length involves a larger number of problems than the spacing estimation Several scientific papers have been written with the aim of suggesting procedu- res able 10 give an accurate and unbiased estimation of a joint set mean length. Bias and accuracy problems are listed below with the name of some authors who discussed the problem: 1. Bias errors are due to the fact that the angle between the direction of the discontinuity trace length and the scanline direction can be an apparent dip and not the true dip angle of the discontinuity plane (Cruden, 1977; Priest, 1985); 2. Bias in length measurements is caused by the fact that scanline preferen- tially intersects longer trace lengths (Priest & Hudson, 1981); 3. In scanline survey only one part (called the semitrace length) of the trace length is measured (Priest & Hudson, 1981; Cruden, 1977); 4. The lengih of the discontinuities which extends outside the exposure cannot be measured and those discontinuities are censored at a value which depends on the size of the exposure (Priest & Hudson, 1981); 5. Truncation bias occurs when joint lengths below a certain known cutoff length are not recorded (Cruden, 197; Baecher & Lanney, 1978); 6. The accuracy of the estimated confidence bounds should be determined (Zhang & Liao, 1990). In the case in which survey traces make variable angles with the scanline direction and in which these angles do not represent the dip angle of the discontinuity planes, the leng:h ¢ of the maximum measurable trace needs to be corrected according to the scheme of Figure 3.27, with the corrective parameter R upper limit of exposure r jeeoncealed I Lo et { ne factual \semitrace concealed Mover limit of exposure Figure 3.27. Diagrammatic representation of discontinuity traces intersecting a scanline set ‘ona planar face of a limited extent. Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 81 @ is the angle between the scanline direction and the dip direction of the examined discontinuity plane, ot is the dip and a’ is the apparent dip of this plane. The corrective parameter R for which c has to be multiplied, is given as: since _ cos e (tan? cos? 6 + 1)! sinat cos 8 As the scanline has the tendency to preferentially intercept longer traces, the surveyed trace length distribution is a biased distribution g(/) and not the required FU distribution. According to Priest & Hudson (1981) the biased distribution can be expressed as: a= L fd) where / is a generic ‘corrected’ value of the trace length and Tis the ‘corrected’ mean value of the trace lengths It is important to point out that, as the surveyed distribution data can be assumed t0 be log-normal (MacMahon, 1971: Bridges. 1976: C.M. Barton, 1978; Einstein et al.. (980) the unknown required distribution /()) willbe of the n esponential type (Figure 3.28) Using this hypothesis. the unknown value / w ill be: ive 7) 5 where /, is the mean value of the surveyed trace lengths. By calling /,, the mean value of the distribution /i(/) of the surveyed semitraces These above reported expressions show that the bias introduced towards the Regative esponential probability density /£(1) Betval trace lengths) atl) (intersected trace lenoths) trace length Figure 3.28. Probability density distribution of actual lengths f{) and intersected length 2 where (U) is negative exponential (after Priest & Hudson. 1981). 82 Rock slope stability analysis selection of longer lengths by scanline sampiing exactly cancels the bias caused by only measuring the semitrace length The truncation bias due to the impossibility of measuring a trace length longer than ¢ (see Figure 3.27) involves a semitrace distribution expressed as (Priest & Hudson, 1981): = M/A) where H(c) is the probability that a randomly intersected semi-trace length is less than c. Fora larger sample, H(c) can be given as: Heya rin where r is the number of surveyed discontinuities with a trace length lower than ¢ and nis the total number of intersected discontinuities If the surveyed semitraces follow log-normal distribution. H(c) can be ex- pressed as: H(@)=1-e¥ andl by taking the i(/) distribution equation into account, the ‘corrected’ mean value [can be expressed as ~ln [@r= n/n) The correspondent ‘corrected’ probability density distribution of the trace lengths fil) will be negative exponential given as: Ad= Yet with standard deviation 6, =/. The effect of the truncation bias that occurs when the joint lengths below a known cut off length are not recorded can be made negligible by choosing a cut off length which is small compared to the average length (Baecher & Laney, 1978) Zhang & Liao (1990) examined the precision or possible problem error estimation for the trace length of the discontinuities. According to the results obtained by Priest & Hudson for the estimation of the mean discontinuity trace lengths using scanline surveys, Zhang & Liao provided a method for confidence bounds for mean joint trace lengths recorded ona finite size exposure The basic steps of the method are as follows 1. Calculate the sum of all the semi-trace lengths of joint S(L,) as: SL) thst. L+n-nb, where 1 is the total number of surveyed discontinuities, 7 is the number of Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 83 tO) fd 0 x (2r) . a x2 (ar) 1-0/2 a2 Figure 3.29. Density function of 4? distribution; (2r) are the degrees of freedom (after Zhang & Liao, 1990). surveyed discontinuities which end in the rock or against another discontinuity, L, is the maximum measurable value of the trace Jet The value L, (L, = ¢) is given to all the discontinuities which extend outside the Tock exposure. 2. Choose the confidence level (1 - 0), by obtai the y3 302") and Y7_a/2 (2r) from any table of cumulative distribution function squared densities. Density functions of 4° distributions are plotted in Figure 2.29 with the confidence interval. 3. Calculate the mean length L and the confidence bounds L, and L, for the semi-trace length of discontinuities. For negative exponential distribution: L=liu where {1 is the mean trace termination frequency for the population where for a large sample w= 1//. The confidence bound L, and L,, for the mean semitrace discontinuity lengths are: 25tL,) wane) 2SiL,) 1-<2(2”) | 4. Calculate the relative accuracy of the estimated confidence bounds 6, using the following equation (LL, L,-&, x 100% QL Zhang & Liao also presented some practical cases. The results of one case referring to a survey of rock wall exposure in the E-Kon open pit mine are here reported. Figure 3.30a reports a histogram distribution of semi-trace lengths. The sample size is 93. There are 75 discontinuity traces which end in rocks or against other 84 Rock slope stability analysis frequency > 93 15 30 semi-trace length t{m) {m Point estimation (+) 8 ee = 0.01 4 a= 0.1 60 ea = 0.40 40 20 2 . ‘ 0) rn tc) 2 4 6B ck} > & 6 Bem) Figure 3.30. a) Hisiogram of a sample xemi-trace length: b) Variation of confidence bounds at three different confidence levels (1 ~ c1) und mean for trace fength with censoring level c: ¢) Variation of accuracy § at different censoring levels (1 ~ &) with censoring level ¢ for the results in (b) (after Zhang & Liao, 1990). discontinuities (= 75). The measurements are censored at § m lengths (¢ = 8) and wisO.38m" Figure 3.30b gives the variation of estimated confidence bounds at three different confidence levels and the mean for trace lengths with censoring level c. Figure 3.30c gives the relationship between the relative estimated accuracy and the censored level ¢ for three different confidence levels examined for Figure 3.30b. As illustrated in Figure 3.30b, the mean trace length determined from the individual trace length measurement. increases with the censoring level ¢ As reported in Figure 3.30c, the accuracy of the estimated confidence bounds at the same confidence level (1 ~ 0: increases as the censored level c increases (i.e Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 85 the confidence level (1 - c), with the same accuracy, increases as the censored level c increases). 3:7 ROUGHNESS 3.7.1 Definitions and scope ‘The roughness parameter represents an index of the Uneveniess and waviness\of the adjacent discontinuity rock wall, This index refers to the mean discontinuity plane. A waved discontinuity is characterized by large scale undulations, an uneven discontinuity is characterized by small scale roughness. ‘The shear strength of a discontinuity is influenced by the raughness of its walls. especially in the case of undisplaced and unfilled walls. “ Waviness affects the initial direction of shear displacements relative to the mean discontinuity plane: unevenness affects the shear strength that would normally be sampled in laboratory or ‘in situ’ (ISRM. 1978) with direct shear tests at medium scale. The shear component due to the roughness decreases as the aperture or filling _hlicknessior degree of any previous displacement increases. The shear behaviour of rough discontinuities is discussed in Chapter 4. Roughness also influences the water flow conditions along single discontinui- ties and jointed rock masses. The roughess influence on equivalent hydraulic aperture is discussed in Chapter 5 3.7.2. Measurement and presemation of results Joint roughness can be surveyed along a tine or on a surface. In the first case, roughness should be surveyed along the potential sliding direction, in the second. the surface roughness survey can provide indication of the sliding direction. As the influence of roughness on the shear strength is not free of scale. the profile size or surveyed surfaces should be comparable with the size of the joint areas potentially involved in shear failure. - Several methods and procedures are available to measure roughness profiles or surfaces on the rock exposure scale and laboratory scale. The problem consists in the determination of scale factor in order to correlate shear-dilatant roughness behaviour at small scale with the scale of the slope problem. Different discontinuity roughness scales are sampled at different test scales, as Teported in Figure 3.31. Small scale measurement involves a several centimeter sample size, intermediate scale involves several meters. Large scale waviness may be’ superimposed onto the small and intermediate scale roughness. The linear profile, compass and disk-clinometer and photogramimetric methods can be used to survey roughness surfaces at intermediate scales (JSRM, 1978). 86 Rock slope stability analysis N\. S >. NSN Figure 3.31. Ditferent scales of surveyed roughness with reference to different shear strength tests; the angle i characterizes the waviness: 1) Size of laboratory shear test: 2) Size of the block volume in an “in situ’ shear test (alter ISRM. 1978). The roughness profiles can be surveyed along an axis which has the estimated direction of potential sliding. The heights y of the asperities are measured along the axis at various points (approximatively 50 points are suggested) at a constant interval (Figure 3.32). Roughness surfaces can be surveyed by detennining the orientation and the inclination of small scale roughness angles by using compass and clinometer in different surface positions and with different disk diameters. The dip and dip direction of ench roughness measurement are then plotted in terms of equal-area pole projection in order to determine the discontinuity roughness orientation tendenc: Altematively: photogrammetric methads can be applied to obtain the coor- dinate of numerous points on the surface and to determine the cantour map of the surface roughness. Mechanical profilometers can be used to digitize roughness profiles (Weiss- bach, 1978: Swan, 1981) at laboratory scale, or allematively more sophisticated techniques invalving close-range photogrammetry and stereo-digitising can be used (Miller et al., 1989). Joint roughness can be defined qualitatively or quantitatively. In the first case the roughness description is limited to descriptive terms which should be based on small scale or intermediate scale observations. Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 87 Roughness “ “profile Aazimuth=o rent JB" epp SA dip \nused half gf 2m folding straight edge Figure 3.32, Method to survey roughness profiles along the estimated direction of potential According to this concept the roughness profile shape can be defined using the terms reported in Figure 3.33. Figure 3.33 also illustrates, for each qualitative term used, the correspondent typical profile shape. A quantitative description of the discontinuity roughness has the aimi of giving numerical information useful for the discontinuity shear strength prevision. Barton (1973) proposed an empirical criterion for the peak shear stre of natural discontinuities which uses a joint roughness coefficient JRC in order to take dilatant behaviour into account, Barton & Choubey (1977) proposed ten standard roughness profiles (Figure 3.34) characteristic of different JRC ranges. The assessment of the joint roughness coefficient occurs by comparing sur- veyed joint profiles and standard profiles. ‘AS this assessment is subjective, several objective IRC estimation methods involving experimental measurements and analytical formulations based on statistics, geostatistics and the fractal theory have been developed in recent years and are discussed in the next chapter. 88 Rock slope stability analysis —__! Figure 3.33, Discontinuity roughness classification: 1) Rough or irregular. stepped: 2) Smooth, stepped: 3) Slickenside, stepped: 4) Rough or irregular. waviness: $) Smooth, waviness: 6) Slichenside. waviness: 7) Rough or irregular. planar: 8) Smooth. planar: 9) Slickenside. planar. 3.8 WALL STRENGTH Wallsstrength is defined (ISRM, 1978) as the equivalent compressive strength of the adjacent'rock wall of.a discontinuity. Itis a very important component of shear strength and deformability, especially if the walls are in direct rock to rock contact asin the case of unfilled joints. Wall strength may be lower than rock strength due to weathering or alternation of the walls. A qualitative description involves the weathering grade description of the rock Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 89 Figure 2.34. Roughness profiles and corresponding range of JRC values associated 10 each profile (after Barton & Choubey, 1977). mass and the rock material made“tp of the discontinuity walls. The grade of weathering of rock mass as avwholé should be described in general and also in detailed ters. The rock wall"fiaterial alteration grade is classified in fresh, discoloured, decomposed and disintegrated rock. A semi-quantitative and quantitative description of wall strength are obtained by using a geological hammer. strong pen KniveSand the Schmidt hammer. Manual index tests are carried out on the idiscontinuity walls or on material Tepresentative of the walls by using a knife and geological hammer. Rock wall strength is assessed as weak oF strong with intermediate levels (extremely, very or 90 Rock slope stability analysis AVERAGE DISPERSION OF STRENGTH FOR MOST ROCKS (H#Pa) ROCK DENSITY = S56 so TT I 2 : 300 iw 3 250 ns > 200 ne g = 130 I~? e * 00 S90 ¥ 2 oo ‘5 70 i 00 za Ew oe Ew 5 “ 20 30 40 30 60 e SCHMIDT HARDNESS (r) — L-hammer Figure 3.35, Relationship between the Schmidt hammer hardness index (abscissa) and the niaxial rock strength. Different orientations of the hammer during the lest refer to different hardness index sewies. The relationship depends on the rock unit weight (kN/m"). The ined area in the top left hand side of the diagram defines the correspondent dispersion of values around the central value for different uniaxial compressive strength values (sfier Hoek & Bray. 1981). Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 91 medium) on the basis of the possibility of the rock material crumbling with the knife or fracturing with the hammer. A table which shows an approximate range of uniaxial compressive strength values for this quality description and rock knife and hammer tests was given by ISRM (1978). Schmidt hammer tests are performed in order to estimate the joint wall compressive strength(JCS). These tests are carried out by applying the Schmidt hammer in a direction perpendicular to the discontinuity wall. The rock surface should be tested on a clear wall under saturated conditions to give the most conservativé results. In this test, the. rebound resulting from the impulse given to the examined rock walll by the Spring-loaded, projectile of the Schmidt hammer is given in a numerical range from about 10 to 60. The rebound number is correlated to rock density and compressive strength (Deere & Miller. 1966). Figure 3.35 repons a chart of these correlations, which is available for different hammer orientations. “The tests are usually performed in groups of 10 for each discontinuity and the wall compressive strength is determined on the basis of the mean value of the highest 5 rebound numbers. Alternatively, the pointsloadtesis can be used 10 estimate the strength of the intact portions of any potential failure surface 3.9 APERTURE Aperture is defined as the perpendicular distance between'adjacent rockwalls of discomtinuity-in which the intervening space'is-air or waler-fivled (ISRM, 1978). Aperture is thereby distinguished from the.width of a filled discontinuity (Figure 3.36). Aperture influences shear strength and hydraulic conductivity. te) Figure 3.36, Blocks including a discontinuity: a) Clased; b) Open; c) Filled. 92 Rock slope stability analysis In most subsurface rock masses,dpertures are small, probably less than half a millimeter. The aperture of real discontinuities are likely to vary widely over the extent of the discontinuity./This variation is difficult, if not impossible. to measure. Problems which-Gerive from rock wall mismatched surfaces are dis- cussed in Chapter 4.as far asshear discontinuity strength is concerned. Equivalent joint apertures with rough walls can be assessed by water permeability testing. ‘Aperture and roughness effects, on the joint conductivity, can be estimated with empirical correlations. These aspects are discussed in Chapter S. The size of large apertures of different origins is assessed in a rock exposure survey. These origins can result from shear displacement of discontinuities with appreciable roughness and waviness, from tensile opening. from outwash, from solution and, from tension in the vertical discontinuity due to valley erosion or glacial retreating. 340 FILLING Filling is-defined as, the: material that. separates-theadjacent rock‘ wall of a discontinuity-(ISRM, 1978). I is usually weaker than the parent rock. Typical filling materials are sand, silt, clay, breccia, gouge and mylonite. The perpendicular distance between the adjacent rack walls is termed the:width of the filled discontinuity: Mechanical features of filling material strongly influence the discontinuity shear strength. Apart from the situation in which discontinuities are filled with high strength and deformability feature minerals (calcite, quartz, pyrite) (Plate 3.6), filled discontinuities exhibit a lower shear strength than clean walls and closed discontinuities. The following filling features, which can affect the discontinuity physical behaviour, should be recorded in the rock exposure survey 1. Mineralogy of tilling material taking care to identify low friction material such as chlorite; 2. Grading and particle size; Water content and permeability Previous shear displacement; Wall roughness; Width: . 7, Fracturing or crushing of rock wall. A detailed presentation also involves the results of soil mechanics laboratory tests carried out to determine the filling shear strength behaviour. The description should give the following filling features: 1. Geomeiry: Width, wall roughness, field’ Skeiche" 2. Filling type: Mineralogy, particle size, weathering grade. soil index parame- ters; swelling potential . re a Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 93 Plate 3 6. Quanz aplithic vein in a tonalitic rock sheared by 2 joint. Adamello, Lombardy, ltaly. By E. Drigo, ISMES. 3. Filling strength: Manual index of soil and rock stiffness and strength determined by penetrating, crumbling and’ scraping the material with hands, knives or geological hammers, shear strength, over-consolidation ratio for dis- placed or undisplaced walls: 4. Seepage: Water content and permeability estimation by using ‘in situ’ quick tests 3.11 SEEPAGE . The term seepage is related to-water-flow.and freedffieisture: visible inindi vidual discontinuities or in therock:mass as a.whole (ISRM! 1978): Field descriptions of rock masses and hydrogeological large scale surveys need to be carried out at an early stage of the slope design. The discontinuity age and origin is important in order to assess the water trasmissivity. Recent origin discontinuities are water transmissible as they have not yet concreted and clogged\(Boitino & Civita, L988). Dry discontinuous rock masses store @ large part of infiltration water, whilst infiltrated water will immediatly percolate on discontinuity surfaces in an already ‘damp rock mass. Stream and water infiltration are the consequences of meteoric effective 94 Rock slope stability analysis precipitations (depurated by evaporation and transpiration) for a hydrogeologic balance. Groundwater infiltration and streaming should be assessed on the basis of the following principal factors (Celico, 1986): _- . 1. Meteorology: Precipitations, air and earyitémperatures, air humidity state: 2. Morphology: Slope angles, watershiédy fracture evolution; 3. Geology and hydrogeology: Lithology, tectonicity. superficial weathering, water table depth. The approximate description of the local hydrogeology should be supple- mented with detailed observations of seepage from individual discontinuities or particular sets. according to their relative stability importance. ISRM (1978) prepared a seepage description table for unfilled and filled discontinuities. In this table seepage ratings are proposed for both discontinuity types on the basis of the moisture degree or of the water flow visible in the discontinuity 3.12. NUMBER OF SETS The-parameter.called-the number of sets;expresses the:number.of joint sets which makes.up the intersecting joint system. The rock mass may beefuither divided by individual discontinuities. The rock mass appearance is dominated by the number of discontinuity sets that intersect one another. The rock block shape is determined by the discontinuity’ imersections and stability analysis is performed on the basis of the block types formed by discontinuities such as infinite or finite, non-removable or removable, stable or potentially unstable blocks. Infinite blocks cannot be removed from the rock mass without involving failure of the intact rock. A large number of joint sets increases the probability of forming finite. removable and potentially unstable blocks, A large number of joint sets may determine the composite shape of the sliding surface or circular sliding surfaces when the joints are closely spaced The set number is often a function of the size of the mapped area. The cluster analysis of poles is useful to identify trends in joint orientation distribution and to distinguish the number of joint sets existing in the surveyed rock expossure The number of joint sets is usually given for determined design sectors of the excavated area according to the ISRM (1978) scheme: 1, Massive. occasional random joints; 2. One joint set: One joint set plus random: . Two joint sets; Two joint sets plus random; Three joint sets; . Three joint sets plus random: . Four or more joint sets; Crushed earthlike rock. Geomechanical characterization of discomtinuities 95 3.13 BLOCK SIZE The block size parameter is determined by the discontinuity spacing, numberof sets and discontinuity persistence. The number of sets and the orientation determine the shape of the resulting block which can take the form of cubes, rhombohedrous. tethrahedrons or sheets. According to these geometrical forms and to the fact that joints én one set are _seldom consistently parallel. SRM (1978) proposed a rock mass description on ~ the basis of block size and shape. This classification has many similasities with the {rock slope classification proposed by Duncan & Goodman (1968¥ presented in Chapter 2. The rock mass is described (Figure 3.37) with the following adjectives: 1. Massive: Few joints or very wide spacing: 2. Blocky: Approximatively equidimensional: 3. Tabular: One dimension considerably smaller than the other tao; ure 3.37. Sketches of rock masses illustrating: 2) Blocky: b) Irregular; c) Tabular: 4) Columnar block shaped rocks (after ISRM, 1978). 96 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 3.7. Example of a columnar rock mass in a prophirie formation in Trentino. lisly. By PF. Micheli. ISMES. 4. Columnar: One dimension considerably larger than the other wo (Plate 3.7): 5. lnegular: Wide variations of block size and shape: 6. Crushed: Heavily jointed (o “sugar cube’. ‘The combined properties of block size-and interblock shear strength determine the mechanical behaviour of (lié rock mass. A small block size may determine shear band or Kink Band formations under given stress conditions. Very small block sizes may cause a potential mode of failure such as rotational movement Block size can be described either by means of the average dimension of typical blocks (block size index /,,) or by the total number of joints intersecting in the rock mass unit volume (volumetric joint count J, ) The joint system analysis, developed in order to set up mosaic block (essella- tion models according to the surveyed block geometry is discussed in Chapter 6. The shear strength of closely jointed masses is discussed in Chapter 4. The description of block geometry and stability using vector methods or " stereo-graphical projections are discussed in Chapter 8. 3.14 DISCONTINUITY DESCRIPTION USING DRILE CORE AND'DRILL HOLE ANALYSIS Carefully planned and executed core drilling followed by detailed core analysis Geomechanical characterization of discontinuities 97 ROD 2 4 8 10 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 Figure 3.38. Relationship benveen RQD (ordinate) and discontinuity frequence (abscissa) (number of discontinuity per meter). 1) Linear approximation: RQD =~ 3.68A + 110.4 for 6 << 16: 2) Theoretical cure: ROD = 100e*" (OIA 4 1): 3) Points obtained by experimental data (after Priest & Hudson, 1976). tests and hole inspection can improve the quiatitative description of discontinui- ties carried out using a rock exposure sur The true orientation of discontinuities can be obtained from a single drill core if orientation devicéare employed during the drilling process. Drill holé inspection using special television cameras and periscopes can provide a measurement of orientation discontincities. In this case the hole size has to be large enough to permit the camera to enter. The discontinuity spacing has been correlated with the Rock Quality Des tion (RQD) values which are determined by the drill core (Priest & Hudson. 1976). RQD (Deere. 1968) is determined by the drill core and is given by: RQD=100 >) x/L where .v, are the lengths of individual core pieces in a drill run having lengths of 0.1 m or greater and L is the total length of the drill run. The empirical correlation which allows one to estimate RQD from discontinu- ity spacing measurements (or mean frequency A = n / X, where ¥ is the mean spacing and » the sample size) is reported in Figure 3.38 3.15 GEOPHYSICAL SURVEYS A common non-destructive rock slope site investigation method is the measure- ment of physical anomalies within the near surface rock mass using a range of 98 Rock slope stability analysis geophysical techniques. These techniques consist of seismic and sonic surveys which measure the velocity of shock or sound waves through the rocks. resistivity which measures the electrical resistance within the sub-surface profile. magnetic and gravity surveys which determine anomalous levels of iron rich materials and materials with low or high density, Other geophysical methods include EM which uses electromagnetic fields such as the georadar which has a very high resolution capability. Application of a geophysical survey to the rock mass description is usually devoted 10 whole blocky systems and not to single features. Seismic refraction has been used to indicate the high velocity material level which may define the surface of probable sliding. Rock structures can be singularly examined by energizing some points in a rock wall and by recording the time of the first arrival and attenuation of seismic waves with geophones placed in different points on a second wail. Tomographic techniques can be used to assess weaker zones inside the rock mass. Resistivity can idemify levels of water concentrations which may be associated with a failure plane. CHAPTER 4 Shear strength 1 BASIC CONCEPTS 4.1.1 Imact rock strength envelope If a series of identical intact rock isotropic material specimens are sheared in a direct shearing device and their maximum strengths S are plotted versus their normal loads N. a maximum shear strength envelope. similar to that shown in Figure 4.1, is obtained. The inclination of this envelope, is commonly called internal shearing resistance angle 4, (Deere et al., 1967). The value of 6, is usually between 35° and 65° (Patton, 1966), decreasing with normal load increment, ‘Sinc®the shear failure surface is pre-determined in a direct shearing device, triaxial tests can be used to determine a maximum strength envelope and correspondent shear strength features. If the displacements are continued on the same sheared specimens by th¢ direct shearing device, the shearing resistance will drop until it finally reached)an asimptotic minimum value corresponding 10 a residual shear stress (Figure 4.2) Figure 4.3 shows two drawn envelopes and the maximum and minimum values of shear strength obtained from each specimen. The vertical distance between the two envelopes indicates the shear strength lost with continued displacements. 4.1.2 Types of strength criterion In general terms, peak strength criterion expresses a relationship between the stress components so that the peak strength developed under various stress combinations can be predicted. Residual strength criterion is defined using a relationship able to predict residual strength under various stress conditions (Brady & Brown, 1985). Since effective stresses control strength behaviour, a strengih criterion is best written in effective stress terms, However, as the pore pressures are usually low (if not 0), total and effective pressures are almost the same. General forms of peak strength criterion express maximum principal stress as a 100 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 4.1. Typical maximum shear resistance enve- 4g lope for anintact rock. peak residual Figure 4.2. Typical shear stress-shear displacement diagram. Figure 4.3. Maximum (a) and residual (b) shear resistance diagrams. function of minimum and intermediate principal stresses, or when referring to a particular plane, the shear strength as a function of the normal siress acting on the plane, Because the available data (Brady & Brown, 1985) indicates that the interme- diate principal stress G, has less influence on the peak strength than the minimum principal stress G3, all the criteria used in pratice are reduced to the form: 0, =f(03) Shear strength 101 41:3 Coulomb shear-strengtucriterion Coulomb determined (1776) that the soil and rock shear strengths are the sum of two components, one due to a constant cohesion, the other due to a friction strength dependent on the normal stress acting on the plane on which the shear strength is mobilized. Coulomb expresses his ‘strength criterion’ in terms of forces. This criterion, with reference to a plane, can instead be expressed in terms of stresses as: t=c+o, tang where.c is the cohesion-atidsi¢ithe:angle of internabifrietion. By applying the Siress transformation equations to the case of Figure 4.4 one obtains: 6, ='A(G, + 53) + A(G, — 03)cos 2B and 1 ='A(6, - 95) sin 2B By substituting the above expressions obtained for 6, and t in the criterion equation the stress limit conditions can be obtained on any plane defined by the angle Bas: 2c + o4{sin 2B + tan 6 (1 -cos 28)] sin 2B ~tan 6 (1 + cos 2B) The plane on which all the available shear strength is firstly reached, for increments of o}, is called ‘critical plane’. The orientation of this critical plane can be obtained by constructing the Mohr circle (Figure 4.5a) and by obtaining the analytical expression for the angle B: poz4! Figure 4.4. Shear failure on the AB plane 102 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 4.5. Coulomb criterion in the t - 6, plane (a) and in the 6, ~G plane (b). The criterion can be expressed in terms of principal stresses 6, and 6, by considering sin 2B = cos 4: _ 2c cos +0(1+ sing) 1-sing i Oo; Figure 4.Sb reports this linear relationship between o, and the peak value of 6}. The angle y of Figure 4.5b can be related to 6 by the equation: L+sind =sing and a theoretical value for the uniaxial compressive strength can be obtained as a function of the cand 6 shear strength characteristics: tany 2ccos 1-sing By extrapolating, the shear strength Coulomb envelope, for 0, =0 (Figure 4.5 b), an apparent value Gy of the uniaxial tensile strength can be obtained as: 2c cos Te a l+sing However, the Coulomb criterion is not Suitable Yor prediction of the shear strength conditions when a tension stress is applied perpendicular to a shear failure plane. Experimental results, both on indirect and direct tensile tests, show that as the strength behaviour in a tensile field is different from the extrapolated Coulomb envelope, the uniaxial lensile strength values are usually lower. Although widely used, the Coulomb criterion is not a particularly satisfactory peak stréngth criterion for rock material. The reasons for this are (Brady & Brown, 1985): 1. It implies that a major shear fracture exists at peak strength. Observations such as those made by Wawersik & Fairhurst (1970) show that this is not always the case. Shear strength 103 2. It implies a direction of shear failure which does not always agree with experimental observations, 3, Experimental peak strength envelopes are generally non-linear. They can be considered only over a limited range of 6, or 03, For these reasons. other peak shear strength criteria are preferred for intact rock, Zeven thougin in a slope stability problem, the values of 6, ase generally low enough to justify a Jinear strength envelope assumption. The Coulomb criterion may instead be applied to shear strength behaviour in residual conditions and particularly for rock discontinuity residual conditions. 4,2. ROCK DISCONTINUITY SHEAR STRENGTH 4.2.1: Planar discontinuity surfaces The surface shape of natural rock discontinuities can be ayditatively described (Chapter 3) as planar. undulated or stepped. Ata lower scalé every surface can still be described as rough. smooth or slickenslide. Planaripolishedsurfaces of mineral specimens give a variety of surface frictions depending on the degree off$mi ness and the surface moisture conditions (Horn & Deere, 1962). In nature, however. rock surfaces are rarely monominerallic or highly polished and sliken- side surfaces areceldom encountered. Patton (1966) suggested that, with large displacements, initially polished rock surfaces becomecratchi ind gougedand the angle of frictional sliding resistence 6, increases from initial low values 102 value ,. which is similar to what one obtains if the prepared surface is sawn planar but not polished. On the other hand, if the original surface is quite rough, it becomes progress- ively smoother with increasing displacements and the angle of frictional sliding resistance progressively decreases, from an initial high value. by reaching an asymplotic value: The residual value 6, (Deere at al., 1967) The friction angle of a discontinuity can be defined using the following terms which refer to the displacements obtained during shear movements (Krahn & Morgenstem, 1979: Barton, 1980, Krahn & Morgenstem, 1980): 1. Peak-friction-angle, is evaluated on natural discontinuities, in corespon- dence to the maximum shear strength determined by roughness failure or overstep: 2 Batic-srietion-angle'd, is evaluated on an artificially planar slickensided surface and is characteristic of the tock mineralogy; 3. Residual friction angle, is evaluated when.the shear strength is stabilized ona minimum value. It is obtained on altered and smooth surfaces, by represent- ing the shear strength of thethiialteration discontinuity surface level, This isthe lowest value. Sometimes, with reference to direct laboratory shear tests carried out on a shear box, the discontinuity friction angle is called ultimate (@,) (first residual), second 104 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 4.6. Typical shear strength envelope ob- © tained on flat discontinuity surfaces. residual and so on down to the residual value (6,) in relationship to the number of, shear cycles. For every shear cycle, in the Hoek box for example, the maximum surface displacement is | cm. In this sense the two angles (@, and ¢,,) are of similar magnitude (Deere et al., 1967). Barton & Choubey (1977) found that the residual friction angle , of a joint (the theoretical minimum, with all roughness{worR, away) is a function of the relative strengths of the joint wall material (see Chapter 3) and the stronger unweathered material in the interior of each block: 6, = (b, — 20°) + 20° GAR) where R is the Schmidt hammer rebound on the sawn surfaces (unweathered) and ris the Schmidt hammer rebound on the wet joint surfaces (weathered) When the wall material is unweathered 4, = 4, : Figure 4.6 shows a typical shear strength envelope obtained froft direct shear tests carried out on a series of rock specimens with a relativeh iycfiae surface, for a stress range of normal stresses of 0-1.5 MPa. The value of the. e residual friction angle 6, for most rocks is usually between 25° and 35° The following range of ultimate friction angles were obtained for rocks in the Department of ‘Georisorse e Territorio’ of the ‘Politecnico di Torino’ laboratory using the Hoek shear box (Plate 4.1): Rock Degrees (°) Basalt 40-42 Calcite 40-42 Compact sandstone 34-36 Dolomit limestone 30-38 Filladic schist 26-36 Graphitous schist 21-23 Gypsum 34-35 Micaceous quartzite 38-40 Micaschist 28-30 Minute gneiss 39-41 Shale 28:39 Taleschist 20-30 Shear strength 105 es ed Plate 4.1, Hoek shear machine al the laboratory of the ‘Georisorse & Territorio” Deparment of the Technical University of Turin, 4.2.2 Inclined discontinuitysurfaces If the shearing surfaces are inclined at an angle to the direction of the shearing stress, then the shearing resistance for displacements along the inclined surface is given by t=6 tan (6, +1). Figure 4.7 illustrates the shear strength envelopes for two inclined surfaces, one inclined at the i angle, the other at ~ i angle and the correspondent two laboratory specimen figures and stress directions. The inclination is called positive when the upper half of the specimen rises from the lower one as a consequence of the shear displacement and shear resistance increases. The inclination is called negative when the upper half slides down and shear resistance decreases. lt can be noticedsthat the maximum valve of the inclination of a surface for which there is still a possibility of the upper half sliding under the action of a shear force, gives the following equilibrium equation (Figure 4.7): Scosi-Ssinitang, from which one obtains: tan i-tang,= 1 and 6 += 90° For this reason, when rough surfaces have asperities inclined so that, +12 90°, 106 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 4.7. Shear strength envelope for inclined discontinuity surfaces: a) Negative inclina- tion; b) Positive inclination. the failure movements of the surfaces will occur together with the failure of the asperities and not with the sliding along the surfaces. When the inclination is negative, the upper half will slide when || = 4), 4.2.3, Multiple inclined discomtimity surfaces The theoretical situation of multiple inclined surfaces has been examined by Patton (1966) and Deere et al. (1967). This case was taken to closely study the influence of the asperities and the phenomenon of Gnterlockitig on the strength envelopes. A horizontal surface containing a number Of regular ‘teeth’ was considered in order to reduce the number of variables. The size and the shape of the teeth were identical, each having a surface inclined at an angle i to the direction of application of the shearing force. In addition, the teeth had a constant internal strength identical to the rock mass itself. Figure 4.8 iJlustrates specimens with different j values. Patton (1966), tested kaoline and rough filaster’surface mixed with different ‘teeth’ inclination angles (i= 25°, 35°, 45°) and a different number of asperities. He found that the strength envelope of the specimens with j = 25° can be represented by a straight line (A) (Figure 4.8). However, for specimens with i = 35° and i = 45°, each envelope has to be represented by «wo straight lines (B and. C). Line (D) represents the residual strength of all the three series and its valué is £1° of the sliding friction of the flat surfaces , depending on the plastér-kaoline mixture. The inclinations of the upper parts of Jines B and C are. very close to 6, (6, = 6,) and the lower parts are within one degree of 6, + 7. The abrupiichanges in the slope of lines B and C are related to the mode of failure chat Below this change point, the maximum shear strengths are related to the frictional resistence due to the teeth inclination. In the case of envelope C, the transition occurs at a lower load and in envelope A it does not occur because the value of the normal load used. is not high enough to reach transition in the failure mode. Shear strength 107 aS (bs) 500 400 2 : D 300, a a 200

Nv (Ibs) bo) 360 A } $ (ads) " 400 | 300 7 4 TL. restauet 200 a 100 3 kaolinitesplaster (1:1) tp a o 190 700 300 Figure 4.8. Shear strength envelopes for specimens with different teeth inclination (a); and for different numbers of teeth (b) (after Patton, 1986). =~ Wh Obs) (o) 108 Rock slope stability analysis The Patton results, obtained by increasing the number of asperities, are shown in Figure 4.8b, by means of shear strength envelopes for specimens with different teeth numbers. The initial envelope curves sti)] have the same inclination of the (6, + angle. Doubling the number of asperities from two to four and maintaining the specimen size constant, results in an abrupt change of the strength envelope slope up to a higher normal load. The upper part of the strength envelope/almost’ doubles. oes The Patton (1966) bi-linear relationship which describes the strength envelopes shown in Figure 4.8a-b was related to two different modes of failure. A first linear tract of the envelope is obtained at low normal loads where the maximum shearing strength is related to the frictional resistance along the inclined surface. The frictional resistance along the inclined surface is equal to the internal shearing resistance of the teeth at failure point. Shearing strengths related to the first tract are accompanied by displacements perpendicular to the shearing force direction (dilatant behaviour). A second linear tract is obtained at high normal loads, where the maximum shearing strength is unrelated to sliding along, the.inclined surfaces. The horizontal displacements occurred when the teeth were sheared at their base. Displacements perpendicular to the shearing force are very small in comparison to those occurring for tests in the first tract range It can be seen that ifougly there is no cohesion interception, there is a real contribution of the interwaI“cohesive’ strength of the teeth to all normal loads other than zero. This contribution of the internal ‘cohesive’ teeth strength reaches a maximum value when the teeth are sheared off at their base and remain constant for higher normal loads. For the first tract, the mobilized cohesion is directly proportional to the normal load, for the second tract it is independent. The second envelope line can be represented by the equation: S=K+Nian oy where K. previously called ‘cohesive strength’, is constant and equal to the ordinate of the intersection with the shear force axis of the straight line of the second part of the envelope. However (Patton, 1966) such a bi-linear relationship is not obtained in natural joint shear tests because there are different teeth superimposition types anda more complicated nature of asperity failure. 4.2.4 Ladanyi & Archambault criterion Two failure modes occur simultaneosly during shearing along an irregular surface: Shearing and sliding. In Figure 4.9 the two specimen halves which include an irregular discontinuity surface are schematized as triangles in a vertical section. A, (A, = LA A,) is the rough surface projected area portion where the asperities are sheared off; A-A, is the remaining portion of the projected area where the sliding occurs, Shear strength 109 s = a Figure 4.9. Definition of the dilation rate v and the shear area ratio: as V = dy/dx, as S=AASA The shear force mobilized for sliding may be divided into three components (Rowe et al., 1964) SS, and Sy S, is the shear force component due to external work carried out in order to dilate against the external normal force N; Sy is the shear force component due to the additional friction dilatancy intemal work: Sy is the shear force component due to the work of intemal friction, if the specimen does not change in volume during shearing. The three component expressions can be obtained (Figure 4.9) as: dy S\=N jtan i= MV, dv V being the rate of dilation at failure dy /dx; S. tan /tan 6, = SV tan 6, Vian 6, The sum of these three shear components gives: S$, #5, +S,=N tani + Stan itand, +N tan 6, =S or S/N =tani+S/N tani tan, + tan 6, =tan (9, +4) which is the same as the result obtained by Patton (1966). ‘The shear force $, which occurs as a result of the teeth shearing may be determined by assuming thas the portion A, of the teeth are sheared off at the base, thereby obtaining: Sy= 3K +Mtan 6, 110. Rock slope stability analysis where K and 6, are the Coulomb parameters related to the strength of the rock substance. The following expression can be obtained for shear strength by adding all the four components: S_6,(1-a,)V + tan $,) +(G, tan, + K)a, A 1-(-a,)Vtand, when V = 0 (flat surfaces and persistence lower than 100%): 156,(1-a,) tang, +.,(6, tang, + K) To overcome the difficulty of determining the value of K and 9, and taking into account that the Mohr envelope is an initially curved shape as a result of different multiples of asperity heights and inclinations which are sheared off at different stages, Ladanyi & Archaumbault (1969) used the parabolic law proposed by Fairhurst (1964) to describe the shear resistance of the material ‘adjacent’ to the discontinuity surfaces 1: o =} [i ey tS n G, 7 Where ois the uniaxial compressive strength of the rock material ‘adjacent’ to the discontinuity which may be lower than that of the uniaxial compressive strength of intact rock because of weathering or alteration of the discontinuity surface; nis the ratio between uniaxial compressive 6, and uniaxial tensile 6, strength of the intact rock. Hoek (1968) suggested that, for most hard rocks, 1 is approximate equal to 10. The two extreme situations of the strength envelopes are: = Extremely low normal stress and no shearing of the asperities; — Normal stress high enough to completely shear off the asperities In the fist situation: s 470 A,30 Votani while in the second: A, 1 and V— 0. Approximate values of a, and V can be obtained from the following relation within the extreme situations 0< 6, <6, o,\° 1-[1-=] ani 6 i a, and \K 1 s| tani \ 6) where, for rough surfaces, the empirical values found by Ladanyi & Archam- bault, on the basis of a large number of shear tests, are: K=4,L = 1.5, Shear strength 41 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 12 Pe Figure 4.10. Shear strength envelopes for the cases where 6 = 30° and i= 10°: a) Fairhurst equation for the rock material failure; b) Ladanyi & Archambault criterion equation; €) Pation equation: &) Residual strength for stickenslide and planar surface equation. The ratio between the effective normal stress acting on the discontinuity and the unisxial compressive strength af the material forming such a surface is reported in the abscissa; the ratio berveen the shear resistance and the uniaxial compressive swengih is yeporied in ordinate (afier Hock & Bray. 1981). Figure 4.10 reports (Hoek & Bray, 1981) different shear strength envelopes obtained by using: The Fairhurst equation for rock material failure, the Ladanyi & Archambault criterion equation, the Patton cquation for dilation of rou and residual strength of slickenside and planar surface equation ‘As can be seen from Figure 4.10. the assumption of a bilinear envelope for discontinuity shear strength may be described for the firsi (dilatant) line using the Patton equation and for the second using the Fairhurst equation for rock material failure. The Ladanyi & Archambault equation represents a criterion more adhe- rent to the reality of the physical phenomenon which involves a transition zone due to progressive shearing of the asperities and superimposition of the teeth of the upper wall discontinuity surface. h surfaces 4.2.5 Rough discontinuity surfaces In nature, the discontinuity surface shape is not as regular as that which is described in Sections 4.2.1, 4.2.2 and 4.2.3 but is almost random (Plate 4.2) 112 Rock slope stability analysis BETAS, Plate 4.2. Above: Mechanical messurement of roughnesses un discontinuity surfaces. By A.M, Ferrero, Below: Roughness contour diagram. The standard discontinuity profiles proposed by Banton & Choubey (see Chapter 3) are typical examples of randomly distributed asperities and undula~ tions along a surface profile. Natural discontinuity shear strengih can be described as a function of sev parameters (Cunha, 1990): Shear strength 13 — Applied normal stress or staie of stress in general terms; ~ Wall roughness characteristics; ~. Strength and deformability of'the asperities and of the walls in general; ~ ‘Thicknessaype and physical properties of any filling material: Contact area (fatchedsor mismatched joints) and distribution of apertures and contacts between the walls; — Orientation of the shearing piane and direction of shearing forces: ~ Discontinuity dimension with respect to the shear direction and the cross direction. Itis difficult both to evaluate these parameters and to analytically formulate a strength criterion equation which takes all these parameters into account. Empirical approaches relate shear behaviour observations to a limited number of parameters which mainly govem the phenomenon. 4.2.6. Barton criterion The Barton criterion (1971, 1973, 1976. 1980, 1982, 1988 and 1990) is empirical and able-to:predict'and:describe the peak.shear strength of roekediscontinuities. One of the advantages of using this criterion is the relative facility of determining the parameters which govern the criterion equation. The analytical expression is: t=6, tan (IRC log,,JCS/o,) +6,] where JRC is the joint roughness coefficient representing a scale roughness factor and which varies approximatively within the range 0 and 20 increasing with wall surface roughness; JCS is the joint compressive strength already defined in Chapter 3 (the JCS estimation, using the Schmidt hammer, is also reported in Chapter 3); 6, is the residual friction angle which represents the theoretical minimum strength value of a planar and slickenside surface obtained when the roughness is completely worn away, ‘The basic friction value obtained on ar- tificially cut discontinuities is sometimes used for practical:purposes due to the difficulties of the last residual value, even though the two angle values are not always equal Barton considered the shear strength of natural discontinuities as being made up of three components: 1. A basic frictional component given by 6,5 2. A geometrical component controlled by surface roughness JRC); 3. An asperity failure component controlled by the ratio (JCS/o,). The shear strength envelopes using the Barton equation, for different joint roughness coefficients, are illustrated in Figure 4.11 Shear strength envelopes for rough-undulated surfaces (class (a) of Figure 4.11) are steeper for low values of normal effective stress. However. by taking the safety factors required for roc structure engineering into account. Barion suggested not considering artan t/G,, values greater than 70° 114 Rock slope stability analysis Shear strength 115 or every possible intercept cohesion. Consequently, the envelopes in the left part of Figure 4.11 are characterized by a lower linear part (when JCS/o,, > 100) and by a second upper non-linear tract The uniaxial compressive strength of the joint wall JCS strongly infuences the shear sirength of rough joints (Figure 4.1L) where the normal stress levels are as low as in the largest part of the rock slope stability problems. The wide shear strength envelope variation obtained for the class A JRC value is analogous to those experimentally determined (Figure 4.12). The peak shear strength is less influenced by the JCS values with smoother wall surfaces. as the asperity failure is of an importance which decreases with the JRC value. The joint shear strength mainly depends on the rock mineralogy for sniooth and slickenside planar surfaces. © paragneiss O clay shale + micaschist © phyllite © jimestone % granite © calch schist orthogneiss B schist graphitous = dolomit. limestone 4f shale sandstone & serpentine 3 o [MPa] a Figure 4.12. Peak shear resistance envelopes for natural discontinuities. (experimental data obtained from direct shear tests carried out at the laboratories of ISMES and the ‘Georisorse ¢ Territorio’ Department, Technical University of Torin), 116 Rock slope stability analysis Because the geometrical component of shear strength controlled by the JRC value and the asperity failure component controlled by the ratio JCS/o, are not independent of the scale effect, it is important to determine shear strength parameter measurements free of scale effect and scale correction factors for the scale-dependent parameters. 4.2.7 Scale effects Bandis et al. (1981) examined the scale effects of the shear behaviour of discontinuities by means of experimental studies. The examined scale effects are as follows: ~ Scale effect on peak displacement; — Scale effect on dilatancy value; Scale effect on JRC value; Scale effect on asperity failure; — Scale effect on size and distribution’of the contact area; — Scale effect on limit size of Specimens; on ultimate shear resistance and on strongly jointed rock mass, for different values of normal stress. Figure 4.13 shows the scale dependence of the laboratory specimen size on the three components of the shear strength of natural discontinuities. Figure 4.13, in particular, illustrates how, by increasing the size of a specimen with a discontinuity, one obtains: ~ A gradual increase of the peak displacement; Figure 4.13. Dependence of the specimen size on the three components of the shear strength natural discontinvities. A: Component due 10 asperity failure; B: Dilatance component; C: Residual frictional component; D (D = A + B) represents the contribution to the shear resistance given by the wall discontinuity roughness; E (E=A + B + C) represents the peak resistance angle: = 6, + (afier Bandis etal. 1981), Shear strength 117 = An apparent transition zone from a “brittle® to “plastic” mode of shear failure; — Adecreasing of the peak friction angle as a consequence both of the decrease of the peak dilotation angle d, and of the component 5, due to the asperity failure: : — A decrease of the ultimate shear strength (the term ultimate is used with reference-fo the friction angle definition reported in Section 4.2.1). Adfurthehscale effect has been examinated (Bandis et al., 1981) bY comparing the behaviour of the joints: 1) By shearing a block on a singlejoint, and 2) by shearing multiple blocks on a joint with the same roughness-f€atures. A heavily jointed rock mass exhibits a reduced gtiffnes® by increasing the degree of freedom of the individual joint blocks which are able to rotate and mobilize all the roughness resistences at different scales. Consequently, as demonstrated by joimed model experiments (Bandis et al.. 1981), small blocks in a densely jointed mass may mobilize higher JRC values than larger blocks in a mass with wider-spaced joints. The scale effect on peak shear strength implies that there should be a minimum size concerning the lest specimen considered as technically acceptable. Barton & Choubey (1977) suggested considering, as a first approximation, the natural block size of the rock mass or more specifically, the spacing of cross-joints. 4.2.8 Joint Roughness Coefficient measurementsfrom large scale index tests Tilt, pull and push (ests represent (Bandis et al., 1981) a very Cheap:method of assessing a JRC value such as a large scale index test. The drawing of the tilt and pull tests are reported in Figures 4.14 and 4.16. In a tilt test, the JRC value may be obtained (Figure 4.15) by using the following equation: where 0: isthe tilt angle for which the upper half slides on the lower half: G,, is the normal stress which occurs when sliding takes place. Ina pulitest. the JRC values may be obtained by pulling the block from the rock wall with an external force directed parallel to the deepest line of the block base plane, The pull tests are prefentially carried out for block contact joints with high [RC values The JRC value may be obtained (Figure 4.16) by using the following equa- tion: M8 Rock slope stability analysis Shear strength 19 Figure 4.16. "In sits’ pull test (after Bandis et a al., 1981) two adjacent blocks opened with a drilled tine: Vis the normal component of the block weight (I and: Ay is the joint area. “The Schmidt hammer may be used for JCS estimation. The roughness surface “Slope angle dependence on joint length L is shown in the tilt test by means of a modification of the Patton (1966) law: T=6, tan (0, + i(L)) where, by referring to the Barton criterion: i{L) = JRC log, (ICS/o,) Consequently, the reduced tilt angle & may be attributed to an effective reduction in fand therefore to a joint roughness reduction with an increase in length. The size of this scale effect for a tilt test can be calculated using the empirical formulas given by Barton & Bandis (1982) and Banton & Bakhtar (1983) and based ona large number of ‘in situ’ and laboratory experiments (Plates 4.3-4.4): IRC = IRCA IL, /Lgh OR 44) cs . JCS = 1, IL, Lg} 209RCH 320 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 4.3, Different sizes of rock specimens used to assess discontinuity shear strength scale effect by means of tilt tests. By L, Reinavdo. Plate 4.4. Laboratory tiltiest. By L.Reinaudo, Shear strength 121 where L, and Ly are the lengths referring to ‘in situ* scale and to the laboratory scale respectively. By taking the Patton law into account: IRC g(L/L py ROflog.g(ICSp /6,) + log(L/L gy Ro] and when L = Ly i ig = IRCy log g(ICSo/6,) Ina tlt test the normal siress acting on the joint when sliding accurs may be given approximately by: WV cos «/A, where Wis the weight of the upper block, @ is the till angle and A is the sliding area. In the hypothesis of a block which slides at a 66° tilt angle with a unit weight of 25 kN/m* and a height of 0.1 m one obtains: Weose _yhA cos & AA Therefore tor a JCS value of 100 MPa, the value of 5 is obtained for log, ICS,/6, and therefore. ig = SIRCp. Jig = (L/L gy 0860 [5 + logyp(L/ Ley O¥R 0} /5 h cos &= 0.001 MPa Referring to Figure 4.15, the tilt angle «is given by the expression: a=o.47 andathen L=Lo, Op = 0, + ig from which one obtains Gl Gy = O,10%9(1 = Hig) + HHiy The above equation stows that the surface slope or angle i decreases with an increase of L. as 6, is not considered scale dependent. Atthis point it is important to note (Swan & Zongai, 1985) that f has been assumed that 1. The value of /, for a given normal load. is a single value; 2. The reference line MM defining the shear plane (Fi remains parallel to the measured surface A-A. Prediction of tilt angle is therefore based on a triangular roughness representa- tion and the scale effect is evaluated by assuming a roughness median line. constant in inclination (always horizontal), for each joint length, Before continuing with the objective and the free of scale methods for JRC assessment, it ig important to determine the influence of JRC on the slope stability, If one considers the equilibrium of the block resting on a 30° inclined joint plane (Figure 4.17), the parameters of the Barton criterion have been obtained by ure 4.15) always 122 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 4.17, Equilibrium of a block analyzed using the Bunion criterion equation. means of tilt test measurements with: Ly = 10. em, JCSp = 50 MPa. Oy = 612, 6, = (0, — 20°) + 20°r/R) = 25°, where g, = 30° and r/R =075.6,, = 0.00126 MPa o, IRCy= = 78 ICS, 5, lozyy The scale effect on the length of the joint may be examined by means of Equation 4.1 and the JRC value for the examined block stability is: IRC = IRCy(L/Lpy ORO = 4.88 the correspondent ICS value is: ICS = ICSy(L/Lyy007RC0 = 24.80 MPa where L = 2m. The safety factor for the block sliding is: Fe Wcos ct [tan URC log) ICS/6, + $,)] - W sin o =1.36 where 6, = 0.052 MPa A safety factor calculated without taking into account the scale factor and by using JRC =7.8 and JCS = 50 MPa should give F = 1.94, with a difference of 42% with respects to the scale corrected safety factor. The JRC parameter, determined on a potentially sliding surface, greatly influences the safety factor estimation. An objective estimation and a correct evaluation of the scale effect on the JRC length is consequently fundamental in order (o obtain reliable resulis, Tilt tests carried out at larger scale than the laboratory ones involve a slight Shear strength 123 difference between the determined JRC value and the real scale JRC value and therefore a limited error of the mere application of Equation 4.1 empirical relationships on the scale effect. Equation 4.1 refers (0 JRC and JRCy in exponential forms. As the joint profiles are rougher, the scale effect increases. IF one considers, for example, a L/Lg ratio of 20 and a JRC = 20, and using Equation 4.1, JRC becomes: IRC = 20-204 =6 which is more than three times lower than 20. 4.2.9 Statistical methods for JRC determination and shear behaviour prediction Statistical representations of joint roughness (Wu & Ali, 1978; Tse & Cruden, 1979: Reeves. 1985) are carried out in order to reach a JRC objective estimation and 10 predict shear discontinuity behaviour. The main purposes of the statistical parameter introduction, to describe discontinuity roughness profiles, are: — Toavoid the subjectivity of the estimation based on the comparison between the examined profiles and the Barton & Choubey siandard profiles; — To include the effects of different asperity sizes and profile undulations on shear behaviour in a statistical mode! of roughness profile Statistical parameters (Swan & Zongqi, 1985), determined on roughness profiles were applied in order to individuate periodic roughness components which occur because of the incrementing of the surveyed profile and to determine the statistical arigin of the scale effects. Tse & Cruden (1979) proposed mathematical formulations to characterize numerically the roughness of discontinuity surfaces and to determine an objective estimation of the joint roughness coefficient (JRC). Two statistical parameters Z, and SF (respectively the root mean square and the mean square of the first derivative of the profile) were found in particular to be closely correlated with values of the joint roughness coefficient The equations: IRC = 32.20 + 32.42 log Z, IRC = 37.28 + 16.58 log SF have been proposed for the JRC estimation The parameter Z) may be numerically determined on a roughness profile (Figure 4.18a) by using the following expression: pug yr [wor where © is the number of amplitude discrete measurements; y is the amplitude of the roughness about the center line and Dx is a constant distance lag. 124 Rock slope stability analysis y B en) Re URC c) Figure 4.18. 2) Asperity height mea- surement; b) Relationship between JRC and Z,: c) SF parameters for the 10 Barton & Choubey standard rock discontinuity profiles (after Tse & Cruden, 1979). 6 where Lis the let atthe dictance y jane length L. h of the profile and f(x) is the amplitude of the asperity height Shear strength 125 Figure 4,18b illustrates the relationship between the JRC and log (Z;) parame- ters for the Barton & Choubey standard roughness protiles whilst Figure 4.18¢ illustrates the relationship between JRC and log SF. Swan & Zongqi (1985) set up a tribological model based upon the roughness statistics and mechanical properties of real joints to predict shear joint behaviour. They considered three parameters for the scale effect analysis and a numerical characterization of roughness profiles: The mean roughness profile slope j, the standard deviation i_,, and all the ordinate standard G, deviations ‘The mean roughness profile slope is defined by the least square line fitted to the ordinate data profile (Figure 4.192) THC fue Value, called the roughness envelope angle, may be calculated with the Rengers (1971) method which provides information approximately equivalent 10 the perfonning of a shear test with nominal normal load (i.e. with negiigible asperity damage). i mean ay a NS ime 1) (a) > 5 i) 0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 io. shear displacement, (mm) alculated using gitized profile (2) Figure 4,19, a) Roughness profife and reference line: b) Dilatancy enveloy ihe Rengers method (1) and with a numerical simulation of sliding on 2 (after Swan & Zongqi, 1985). 126 Rack slope stability analysis An altemative method of computing ipa, values is to use a numerical model developed for simulating sliding obtained from given digitized profilometric data (Swan, 1983). In either case, the simulation is a good representation of the tilt test (Figure 4.19b). The three parameters means ing, APG G, are Measured on roughness profiles with a length Lo: subsequently, in order to determine scale effects, scaled lengths L of the base length Ly are obtained by successive divisions. such as Lo/2. Lg/4 etc. Scale effects were investigated on experimental joint profiles for two line definition reference cases: — A least square line obtained for the profile length Ly was taken to be common toll scaled lengths of L. L <0 (Case §): - A least square line was Hitted consistently to each scaled length L (Case 2) Swan & Zonggi determined average tilt angles o& for forward and reverse ideal shear conditions by assuming a near interlocked state of wall joint surfaces. In the hypothesis of simulating tilt tests upon rock blocks with discontinuities and examining profile different lengths L (L< Ly) one obtains: @ 0,43 Where = £ fgg + Kling! «and 6, is considered independent of the length and K=1 The determined variations of Gye, and of G, with the dimensionless joint length ratio L/L, allowed Swan & Zongqi to arrive at the following conclusions on the JRC joint length scale dependency’ — The abserved mean profile slope is not constant with the length inclination and the assumption that 7 = fjy,- With fyeaq = 0. for every length of the same profile may lead to the underestimation of the tilt angle variation: = The assumption of a simple triangular profile model to predict the tilt angle does not produce conclusive evidence of a scale effect: = For the roughness defined using a consistent reference line (Case 2). scale effects are primarily of statistical origin, i.e. the larger the asperity sample. the greater the probability of finding asperities with extreme heights. Thus. an increased roughness with scale was obtained and this increase depends on the random or periodic character of roughness with scale. The Swan & Zonggi statistical joint protile analysis showed that roughness amplitude exhibits an increase of magnitude with scale in contrast to the Barton- Bondis model. Swan & Zongqi. in particular, pointed out thal the reference line of a discontinuity wall surface which determines the shear plane is not a constant slope with increasing joint surface and conscquently, there are larger scale roughnessess which should be considered in wider scale discontinuity shear behaviour, The author is not able to give a conclusive answer on the reliability of the different examining formulations to predict joint roughness surface scale effect but only to offer some observations. Shear strength 127 The geologic: origin of a discontinuity can help to assess if a reference line maintains a constant slope over determined joint lengths such as those assumed in the Barton-Bandis model This may represent a biased condition from some statistical model points of view: but may occur. ie. in laminated structures, schistosities. or in tension joints, where roughness symmetry characteristics exist and only some scales of rough- ness are present in joint surfaces. The application of the Barton empirical equation for peak shear strength to slope stability analysis leads to the determining of safety factors which decrease for triangular slopes with the increase of the sliding surface area. Consider the example of Figure 4.20 and the following gcometrical and physical characteristics of the slope stability problem: IRC = & (assumed to be constant with length), ¢, = 25°, JCS = 50 MPa (assumed to be constant with Jength), @=45°. sliding surface L, = 141 m, sliding surface Ly = 14.14 m. weight force W, = 1.31, weight force Wy = 1301 f, =Wicosatan GRC ogi9(ICS/5,.)*6) _ 4g W, since where W, S o= 154. 0,065 MPa 4 IV, cos oetan URC logyg ICS/S,2) +9.) _ | 4 W, sina \here 6,, = 0.065 MPa. The safety factor decreases, being constant JRC and JCS values, with normal stress increasing. according to the non linearity of the shear strength envelope. 10 m Figure 4.20. Triangular slope with parallel sliding surfaces. 128 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 4.21. Siability of rock stabs with differ- ent lengths: 9) L= 0.1 m:b) L = 2m Two different slope stability analysis schemes may be examined in the hypo- thesis of maintaining constant normal stress and varying JRC and JCS with the length (Figure 4.21). Firstly consider the case of Figure 4.21a in which a cubic block set rests on an inclined plane. The physical and geometrical characteristics of the slope stability problem are: IRCy=8. JCSy = 50 MPa. 6, = 25° cos = 0.00184 MPa 1 where &=45°.L,=0.1 m=Ly. WV, =0.1841 The safety factor of a cubic block is given by: p_RURC Ios UCSIOI+8_ | 166 tan a Using the Barton-Bandis model for the scale length effect for the stability problem of Figure 4.21b, the JRC and JCS values become for a joint length of 2m: IRC = IRC (L/L) PPR = 4.95 ICS = ICS (L/L g)0 9/80 = 24.36 MPa and the correspondent safety factor F = 1.01. The Barton-Bandis model assumption, in order to take JRC scale effect on joint lengths into account, leads to the determining of the safety factor as being lower on a surface on which a monolith rests than on a surface on which an adjacent and contacting blocky system rests. A realistic hypothesis, to justify the experimental Shear strength 129 (a) (bo) 2) Monolith resting on a rough surface: b) System of blocks resting on 3 rough Figure 4. surface. evidence on which the Barton-Bandis model is based, is that of considering that the joint surface match decreases with joint length and consequently the inter- locked state between the joint surfaces also decreases (see Figure 4.22). The applicability of the Swan & Zongqi tribological model is limited te fresh and clean joints analysis. 4.2.10 Fractal characierization of joint surface roughness for estimating shear strength Several works have been carried out (Turk et al., 1987; Carr & Warriner, 1987; MacWilliam et al., 1990; etc.) to estimate joint shear strength by means of a fractal characterization of joint roughness profiles. The fractal method was firstly applied to coastal length determination (Man- delbrot, 1967) and an example of the use of the coastal Jength fractal calculation is here described. Figure 4.23 shows the outline of an imaginary island. A ruler could be used to measure the length of the coast and could be placed end to end around the coast The Jength L of the coast will then be: L=Nvy where y is the ruler length and N the number of rulers. If the process of measuring the length of the coastis repeated, but with a shorter ruler, itis found that length L, measured with the shorter ruler is greater than that measured with the longer ruler, since shorter rulers allow one to better follow the most indented coast lines. The relationship between the total coast Jength and the ruler length can be expressed as L=N-y? where D is the fractal dimension (Mandelbrot. 1982). The equation can be rewritten (Carr & Warriner. 1987) as: Ly-PsN and, by nonwalizi 1 L = I, one obtains: 130 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 4.23. Coastal length computed using differ- ent length rulers: 1) Natural profile; 2) Length ruler = yy 3) Length moles and taking the base logy, =D logy() Fractal dimensions of rock joint surfaces may also be described using the ruler technique. Thus. the joint roughness coefficient or the roughness angle of the joint profile is related to the fractal dimension of the rough surface, Different correlations between JRC and fractal dimensions have been pro- posed. Carr & Warriner (1987) proposed wo linear correlations determined on the basis of experimental rock joint profile analysis: JRC =-1022.55 + 1023.92D JRC = 1000(D - 1) Turk et al. (1987) devcloped a procedure tor the estimation of the roughness angle of a rock surface from the fractal dimension. This procedure was applied to the Barton & Choubey standard profiles and to the Silurian sandstone joint profile analysis, This procedure refers to the profile length of the fractal dimension and the unit step length (ruler) yz logy L = logy) K+ (1 ~D)logiyy Where K is a constant, The Barton & Choubey standard joint profiles were analyzed using the unit sizes of 2, 6. 20 and 60 mm. The log-plot of the measuring steps and {otal joint profile length for different profiles are shown in Figure 4.24. From a study of Figure 4.24 it was decided to estimate the fractal dimensions of the joint profiles from the slope of the line corresponding to a6 mm measuring step length. The estimation of the roughness angle / of the rock surface was determined as: i=cos Ii? where 1, is the considered direct length of the joint profile or, for the general case: sexp se? where x is a constant. Shear strengih 131 standard Leg t JRC profile profile number 2 4 6 9 1 pee L —_ ~ 2 8 LO, 1 18 Log & Figure 4.24, Log-plot of step size (E) versus measured lengih (L) for JRC standard profiles (after Turk et al.. 1987), Table 4.1. The roughness angles and fractal dimension of the Barton & Choubey standard joint roughness coefficients (after Turk etal., 1987) JRC i=cos4/1,(°) Fractal dimension 0-2 0 1.0 24 4a 1.0019 46 41 1.0027 68 16 1.0049 8-10 66 1.0054 10-12 46 1.0045 1214 42 1.0077 14-16 9.2 1.0070 16-18, V2 1.0104 18-20 120 1.0170 +1 is the joint trace lengih. This equation (Turk et al., 1987) is the fundamental equation for estimating the joint roughness angle from the fractal dimension Table 4.1 gives the estimated roughness angles and fractal dimensions of the Barton & Choubey standard profiles. 132 Rock slope stability analysis The following comments can be made on the fractal method application to the Joint shear strength estimation: ~ Two correlation methods between joint surface roughness and fractal dimen- sion of roughness profiles have been proposed. The first (Carr & Wariner, 1987) correlates the fractal dimension to the JRC value: the second, the fractal dimen sion to the average roughness angle of the joint surface. = The first correlation was empirically determined. ~ The roughness angle determined by the second correlation takes not only the primary but also the secondary asperities into account and gives the upperbound valves. — The joint roughness is expected to be constant, irrespective of the joint size. Moreover (Turk et al., 1987) this makes it possible to determine the roughness of large rock joints from the fractal dimension of small joint profiles. = The fractal method was applied to the estimation of the IRC of the Barton & Choubey standard profiles. Empirical data given by Barton & Choubey and fractal method application results are not always in agreement. Because of the difficulty in finding a better correlation between the joint roughness coefficients and the fractal dimensions of joint profiles, some research ers in this field (MacWilliams, 1990) are not convinced that the 2-D work profile is able to solve the 3-D problems of rock joint shear strength estimation. 4.2.11. Geostatistical operators applied 10 the rock joint shear strength prediction Practical geostatistic applications to rock slope engineering problems have mainly deen carried out recently for spatial variability analysis and modelling of the characteristics of rock joints. Geostatistical operators such as the variogram or covariance and geostatistical methods such as different types of kriging have then been applied to rock mechanics regionalized variables. The geostatistical application to rock joint modelling and to the estimation of regional average joint orientation input parameters for stability analysis are discussed in Chapter 6 together with some outlines of the basic principles of linear geostatistics. Methods based on the analysis of the variogram function for joint roughness profile characterization are here discussed. Variogram analysis has been carried out (Ferrero & Giani, 1990; Giani & Ferrero, 1990) in order to relate the particular structure of the geostatistic operator to the shear strength resistance components given by the roughness and waviness of the joint profiles. The regionalized variable of the problem is the asperity height at every point of the examined profile, while the reference axis for height measurements is assumed to be horizontal. If this axis, which represents the mean height line is not horizontal and the discontinuity profile is therefore inclined, the application of the Shear strength 133 geostatistical method foresees a preliminary rotation of the discontinuity profile Lill the horizontal position is reached. The slope angle jnean 18 Positive when it corresponds to a shear resistante increase. On the other hand, it is negative where it decreases. It is therefore possible to construct the experimental variogram by knowing the regionalized variable and assuming it is quasi-stationary. ‘The variogram is a linear operator which is, in this case, defined along the profile length for all the h vectors which lie on the length. It is expressed as the variance of the increment Y(x + ht) ~¥(x): 2y(h) = E{ [Yea + h)- YQ)? } Vx where .v is the abscissa value along the length f: ¥(1) the valve of the asperity height in x and El-] represents the expected value of the quantity inside the brackets. The characteristic variogram of the ten standard Barton & Choubey profiles is then determined (Figure 4.25a) and the expression which relates the variogram function to the roughness angle. for different roughness widths is: y= Subsequently. Fersero & Giani determined. by means of an analytical formula- tion. that the profile roughness angle i may be related to the JCS/o, value. It was determined that. for each h(lag) value, the JCS/G,, value may be evaluated as: JCS/o, =1/2h a (o Figure 4.25. a) results: 2) Geosti cam of u roughness profile: b) Shear strength envelope: 1) Experimental I model use. 134 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 4.5. Artificial rough discontinuity in a specimen composed of mortar mixed with sand By S. Givglardo where / is the length of the asperity area in contact and consequently. for each fh valve. a JRC/G,, ratio and a correspondent i(h) value may be determined A laboratory set of tests was carried out (Giani. 1991) in order to confirm the shear resistance prediction expressions determined by working with asperity height variograms Morar and sand mixed specimens with rough discontinuities were constructed in the laboratory for this purpose (Plate 4.5). The shape of the artificial disconti- nuities reproduced the Barton & Choubey standard profiles. Each specimen valve was ten centimeters long and four centimeters wide The , and JCS values of the discontinuity material were determined by means of direct shear and uniaxial compressive tests carried out on the mortar and sand mixed specimens. The comparison between the shear resistance envelopes ob- tained by direct shear tests on the artificial rough discontinuity and by geostat- istical model application were found to be in good agreement (Figure 4.25) 4.2.42 Influence of the wall discontinuity interlock level on the shear resistance The contact mode between interface asperities during shearing movements of wall discontinuities was analyzed by Roko & Daemen (1988). Two analytical methods were used to characterize the joint interface roughness profile: The variogram function and the gamma density distribution. The joint Shear strength \35 interface smoothness, which occurs with successive joint shearing at increasing normal loads, was correlated to the decrease in the sil! of the variogram function which describes the roughness height distribution of joint profiles. The contact mode between the partially indented interface asperities during shear movements have also been examined by Giani (1991) (Figure 4.26). The cross variagram function was examined in order to predict the shear behaviour of partially indented rough discontinuities. Cross-variogram analysis is used when geostatistics is applied to mineral reserve estimation to determine the correlation between the grades of two minerals present in the same orebody. The cross variogram is positive when an increasing grade of the first mineral corresponds to an increasing grade of the second mineral. Cross variogram is negative in the opposite case. In rough surface analysis, the asperity heights refer to the surface median line (see Figure 4.27). A discontinuity with a perfect interface indentment is characterized by the same values of the interface asperity height along all the examined discontinuity profiles, The cross variogram is defined for all the h lags as: 2y() = Et Lz) srt [FOI - 2064+) where =(0) and =/(x) are the heights of the upper and lower interfaces. The cross-variogram coincides with the variogram when the joint interfaces are perfectly indented _l Figure 4.26. Different indentment levels of a wall discontinuity surface. Figure 4,27. Asperity height measu- rement 136 Rock slope stability analysi s=0 0.5 -0.8{f - [ae ee (a) cm 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 s 2-33 cm 0.5 cm () 12 3 45 67 8 9 10 8 =.175 em 0.5 - 0.5. a rn Os 12 3 4 5 67 8 3 10 Figure 4.28, Standard JRC 18-20 profile: a) Perfect indeniment: b) After a horizontal movement of 6.33 cm and a vertical movement of 0.5 mm: c) Afier a horizontal movement of 0.175 cm snd a vertical movement of 0.25 mm. The length of the profiles is 10 em, Figure 4.28 shows three different discontinuity indentment interface degrees. The roughness profile of the interface is the (JRC 18-20) Barton & Choubey standard profile. Cross variograms of the three discontinuities with a different interface indent- ee are reported in Figure 4.293, -variograms are positive and exhibit analogous trends. The cross-variogram functions decrease with the increase of the relative joint interface displacements. The same procedure for determining a correlation between the variogram function and joint roughness angle has been extended to the case in which the cross-variogram has been correlated to the roughness angle of partially indented discontinuity interfaces The relationship i (roughness angle) and / (iength of asperity areas in contact) may be determined (Figure 4.29c) by using the equation: Vych) h ith) = tan” Shear strength 137 1 2 3 4 5 9 9.2 0.4 2.6 (ec) experimental (g) + thecretical Figure 4.29. a) Cross variogram of the three discontinuities reported in Figure 4,28; b) i-ICS/o, diagrams: c) Correspondent i-! diagrams: d) Shear strength envelopes obtained by the geostatistical method and by shear test data (after Giani, 1991). and the relationship i - JCS/o, may also be determined for each /i(lag) value by using the equation: Jcs_! 3, oh 138 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 4.6. Sheared speci- men composed of mor- iar mixed with sand. The shear resistance of each pantially indented discontinuity interface may be predicted from the relationship i - JCS /o,, (Figure 4.29b) and from the value of 6, and JCS. Direct shear tests (Plate 4.6) were carried out on rough discontinuities with partially indented interfaces (Giani, 1991); results of shear strength laboratory tests and of data obtained with the geostatistical mode! application are reported in Figure 4.20d 4.2.13 Filled discontinuities Principat tvpes of filling discomtinuity materials. geometrical and physical filling and rack discontinuity characteristics are reported in Section 3.10 with reference Shear strength 139 to a rock slope exposure survey. Filling materials influence shear discontinuity resistance by generally causing a decrease in strength and stiffness. The presence of low friction materials, such as chlorite or graphyte, decreases the discontinuity frictional component. whilst mineralized filled veins, such as quanizile, may increase rock discontinuity shear resistance. The mechanical behaviour of a major filled discontinvity is defined by the mechanical properties of the filling material. When the mechanical behaviour of these materials is similar to clay or silt behaviour. the shear resistance of discontinuities is defined by the Mohr-Coulomb criterion expressed in terms of effective stresses. Ladanyi & Archaumbault (1977) reached the following conclusions on the basis of laboratory tesis carried out on filled discontinuities: 1. The peak shear resistance envelope is. for a large number of filled disconti- auities. within the filling material and the clean discontinuity wall behaviour; . The shear resistance and stiffness of a filled discontinuity decrease with the increase of the filling width, while always remaining greater than that of the filling material: 3. The filled discontinuity shear stress-horizontal displacement diagrams are often characterized by two different trends; one reproduces the filling material behaviour before the rock to rock contact occurs, the second reflects the rock asperity failure and the deformation of the discontinuity walls in comact; 4. The shear resistance of a filled discontinuity is not always dependent on the filling width. If the discontinuity walls are plane and slikenside the shear sliding surface is found at the contact line between the filling and one of the rock walls; 5. The shear resistance of a swelling clay filling discontinuity decreases with the swelling increase: if swelling is obstructed, very high swelling pressures can occur. A further factor which has to be considered in filled discontinuity analysis is the influence of the filling material on rock mass penneability. Clay filling permeabil- ity can be much lower than that of the jointed rock mass and can be the cause of instability phenomena in rock slopes. Seepage or flow in rock masses can cause high neutral pressure values in filled discontinuities which isolate rock blocks or potentially unstable rock mass by lowering stope safety factors. 4.2.14 Discontinuity shear behaviour under dynamic conditions The purpose of rock slope stability analysis in earthquake loading conditions is usually to assess if the shear stress accumulation, due to cyclic loading, may cause instability along discontinuities. In this case, a constitutive model of joint behav- iour should be set up by determining the joint strength mobilized at each forward and reverse loading cycle (Figure 4.30) and the shear stress-displacement law. In dynamic loading conditions joints exhibit a different shear behaviour with respects to the statical conditions. 140 Rock slope stability analysis ro forward reverse Figure 4.30. Idealized jointing in a rack slope. Z Ad = A The rough joint shear behaviour is influenced by the dynamic load according to the joint physical conditions: ~ The phase previous to the peak shear strength mobilization: ~ The post peak phase (Forlati & Zaninetti, 1988). Dynamic joint shear behaviour is influenced, in the pre-peak phase, by the normal and tangential loading frequency and by the number of loading cycles. In post-peak conditions, shear behaviour is only influenced by the joint wall sliding rate. General feature constitutive models for cycle loaded joints which relate the variation of the statical shear resistance parameters to the loading cycle intensity and shear displacement velocity are not yet available for carrying out rock slope stability analysis in dynamic conditions. A few of the following observations, with reference to various scientific papers in this field, may be useful in order to assess the joint shear resistance in the dynamic field. These observations refer to the inluence of a dynamic load on shear displacement velocity and on joint shear behaviour. a) Shear displacement velocity: = Shear resistance greatly decreases with the number of forward and reverse loading cycles because of the fatigue phenomenon which arise (Atewell, 1973; Haimson. 1978). — Loading application velocity increasing leads to remarkable increments of peak shear resistance with respects to the static peak resistance (Ishihara & Nogao. 1981). = Peak shear resistance increases for smooth surfaces with loading application frequency (Mencher, 1981). Shear strength 141 ~ In post-peak conditions, shear resistance is independent of the dynamic loading feature and is lower than the static shear resistance (Hencher. 1981). b) Joim shear behaviour; — The true contact area between joint interfaces increases with the contact time logarithm because of the asperity interlocking phenomena; as the shear velocities are higher, the contact times are shorter and the shear resistance decreases. However, ploughing phenomenon, typical of joint surface hardness heterogene- ity. can modify the nature of the foreseen phenomena (Dieterich. 1978). ~ Heat generated between the discontinuity walls in contact during shear action is dissipated on the whole joint surface. Dissipation time decreases with shear displacement velocity by determining the contact melting zone and conse- quently the shear resistance decrease (Forlati & Zaninetti. 1988). — The joint interface asperities in contact are subjected to reciprocal impacts which are more substantial as the surfaces are rougher and the shear displacement velocities are higher. This effect determines a shear resistance increment in the dynamic ficld Joint wall hardness plays a determining role in dynamic shear behaviour assessment. The friction angle of weak rocks increases, for low normal loads. up toa critical velocity value, Beyond this value. the friction angle remains almost constant. with normal load increments, up to a second critical velocity value. beyond which, shear resistance decreases (Crawford & Curran, 1981). The dynamic shear resistance of very hard rocks maintains the same value of the statical value for low velocilies up to a critical velocity value. Beyond this limit, shear resistance decreases with the velocity logarithm (Crawford & Curran, 1981; Curran & Leong. 1983). In hard rocks, the shear displacement velocity is independent of the normal stress level and roughness coefficient (Curran & Leong, 1983). 4.2.15 Conchiding remarks on joint shear resistance Stability conditions of potentially unstable rock masses may be analyzed in peak shear strength conditions when the discontinuities on which rock masses may slide are closed and unfilled. The principal parameters required for the natural unfilled discontinuity shear strength according (o the methodology of Barton and his colleagues are reported in Table 4.2. 4.3 SHEAR STRENGTH OF ROCK MASS Discontinuities play a fundamental role in slope stability analysis since they can isolate potentially unstable solid rock and can be sliding planes themselves. The discontinuity shear strength definition is then necessary in order to study 142 Rock slope stability analysis Table 4.2, Principal parameters for natural discontinuity shear strength determination. Quantity Description Notes 6, Basic friction angle obtained in the laboratory on anifcially cut ,>6, discontinuities %, Residual friction angle, the minimum value of friction resistance $, obtained in the laboratory after several forward and reverse shear cycles. 6, is correlated 10 6, and the JCS of the examined (r) and correspondent sound (R) wall as: 0, = (0,—20)+207/R ICSy Joint compressive strength obtained with the Schmidt hammer tests JCS, > ICS in the laboratory scale (Ly) JRC) Joint roughness coefficient obtained in the laboratory scale (Ly) by: IRC, >JRC ~ Comparison with standard profiles: = Tiltlests IRC IRC free of scate obtained by: ~ Statistical. geostatistical and fractal application procedures: = Correlation to JRC, and referring 10a length L, as: IRC =IRCy (L/L gy RO Ics ICS free of seale correlated 10 JCSy and IRC, as: ICS = ICS L/L gl AON The interlocking degree which can decrease with rock mass relaxa- tion in slope excavation. erosion, etc. should be considered in the design phase by cautiously decreasing the JRC and JCS values the equilibrium condition of the rock which can be subjected to slide along discontinuity planes present in a rock slope. Shear and deformation features of a rock mass as a whole system of disconti- nuities and intact rocks are required for the problems involving stress depends on the ratio between the spacings and problem scale. Shear strength chacteristics of these types of masses have been studied in rock mechanics (Bandis et al., 1981: Barton, 1971, 1983: Barton & Choubey. 1977: Shear strength 143 Ladanyi & Archambault, 1972: Hoek & Brown, 1980; Jaeger. 1971). Bandis et al, carried out tilt tests on block system models in laboratory and real scale. Barton & Choubey examined natural discontinuity behaviour, whilst Ladanyi & Archambault set up and examined models formed by cement blocks (1800 blocks of 1,25 « 1.25 x 6.30 cm* size). The failure mechanism determined by Ladanyi & Archambault did not involve only the single plane orientation, but involved different phenomena, such as that of a failure surface contouring and crossing joints, that of a ‘narrow band’ of sliding and rotating blocks or that which involved formation of a band of block columns rotated and separated by the blocky system: ‘A composite kink band’ passing through the blocks (Hoek & Bray, 1981). A failure surface in a heavily jointed rock slope, can therefore involve sliding, failure and reciprocal move- ments of blocks. A shear strength criterion available for closely jointed rock slope analysis should take the rock mass quality into account. lock & Brown}1980) proposed an empirical rock mass strength criterion also available Tor Closely jointed rock masses. ©), = 03 + (Nd,03 + 502 )°4 where 6}, isthe maximum stress at peak failure; Gis the minimum stress: mand s are adimensiona) constants which depend on the shape and the interlocking degree of the single rock blocks in the mass: 6, is the uniaxial compressive strength of the intact rock which forms the blocks. The criterion can be extended to intact rock mass (s = 1) and to a granular material (= 0). The uniaxial compressive strength of the rock mass is given as 6,Nsand isO whens =0. The criterion can be expressed in shear and normal stress terms as: t=A-9,(0,/0,-T)* where A and B are constants which define the strength envelope shape in the Mohr plane and T=1/2m Nn? + 4s) The criterion can be defined in effective stress terms in the case of non zero neutral pressures. Therefore: 0, =(0,-") 04 =(53-u) Go=(0-0) Hoek & Brown determined the empirical parameter values m. s. A.B. T, using Banton or Bieniawski rock mass classifications. Table 4.3 reporss. for different rock types and RMR or Q values (CSIR = Bieniawski RMR classification, NGI Barton Q classification), the empirical parameter values which should be used in the absence of specific experimental data ‘Table 43. Approximate teationship beeen rock mass uty a empirient constants ae Rock mass quality Carbonate rocks swith well devel- ape ryt cleavage (6o- lomite limestone ‘snd snarl) fovaet rook samples Laboratogy size specimens free fromm joints, CSIR cating 100. NGI rating 500 Very good quality rock mass Tighily interlocking uncistured tock with unvweathered joints. 3. CSIR rating 85. NGI ating 100 Good quality rock mass m=07 Sreshtoslightly weathered rock, x= 040d Sighly distorted with joints at V0.3 /A-=0-309 CSIR rating6S, NGI eating 10 820.669 726,006 Faie quality rock mass meds Several ses of moderately weathered ¥=0.0001 Joints spaced (0.3 19 Ln, CSIR eating A =0 198 44, NGI eating 1.0 0662 7=-0.0007 Poor quality cook mass ms0.04 [Nomerous weathered joints at 3010 500.5 =0:00001 rm with some gouge-lean waste rock, A= 0.118 CSUR rang 23, NGI ating n= nets 00002 ‘Very poor quality rock mass n= 0.007 Nuinerous heavily weathered joins =O Axo. spaced < SO with gougs-waste with fines, CSIR eating 3. NGtrating 00) B=0.534 r= ‘Arencsous racks with steony eoptateand poorty developed cesta eeawage ‘ingstone ad Liitcu api coms rocks Aenudstone silstone, shale ‘and sate (oor weleawaged) m='100 S210 A=091 20677 r=-0.099 B=a.02 7 =-0.020 mato $= 0.004 A047 a= 0693 T=. nens7s 7 =~0,G008 420.688 7=-0.0003 120129 0655, 7 =-0.cp02 20.010 so A=0.050 B=0539 Pa=0 Hock & Brow “ine stuitted poly. Caurse grained poly- avineali igneous minerallicjgneous and metamorphic ery line rocks (amphibo- ie, gabbro gaciss, (andesite, dole Fie, disbase ed shyolite) 820.896 72-0059 2030 =0.0001 ¥=0.0001 A=0.295 A= 036 B=05501 n=0.700 T0003 T= -0.0002 =009 $= 0400001 =O. 42 067% T= -0.000 0.017 uss oun Kagiqors adojs yoy pyr w8uaus 1004s Ht CHAPTER 3 Groundwater flow in rock masses 5.1 INTRODUCTION Groundwater flow usually causes aworseningof the slope stability condition. The principal reasons for the water flow influence on rock slope stability are: The variation of the pressure acting on the joints and the destruction. transport or change in the consistence degree of rock fabric and of geomaterials which can fill the rock discontinuities. Methods of determining water pressure distribution in jointed rocks are avail- able and studies into the hydrology of jointed rocks are in continuous progress. Methods of simulating the mechanical and chemical phenomena which alterate the rock fabric or destroy the joint filling materials are not sufficiently developed to be consideredeliable and consolidated techniques. Water pressure reduces the available shear resistance on discontinuities and determines active forces which tend to induce rocks to slide when acting behind subvertical discontinuity planes, —¢Frostand waterthaw-cycles can give rise to rock fatigue phenomena, disconti- nvity aperture increment and rock mass weathering due to volume variation. A slope t0e erosion can be determined by a sircam. Soil filting discontinuity transportation occurs for high water flow in filled discontinuities The moisture Variations of some rocks, such as schistose or nufa, decreases the Strength and deformation features of the iniact rock. The groundwater flow in porous, heavy-fractured and jointed rocks are dealt with in this chapter as far as the influence on slope stability analysis is concerned. The Mow problem solution involves the determination of spatial distribution of potentials and flows in order to allow one to assess the water pressures acting on the potential unstables rocks. 5.2. BASIC CONCEPTS The equilibrium conditions of rock blocks on a slope face also depend on the ae Groundwater flow in rock masses 147 water pressure distribution along the joint planes which isolate blocks. The water pressure gradient along a joint depends on the flow rate and on the joint conductivity. Water pressure in some cases can be “in situ’ measured. An interesting example of a groundwater monitoring program ‘is given by Richards & Cowland (1986). The authors examined the correlations between rainfalls and groundwater response. Joint water pressure values were measured in order to evaluate the stability of rock slopes in Hong Kong. Groundilow analysis needs to be carried out in the other cases. For these cases. the parameters required to model groundwater flow through a rock mass can be. preliminarly assessed by rock discontinuity quantitative Geseription data. However, because of the uncenainties in the discontinuity “seepage; ‘parameter survey. experimental joint conductivity or rock mass permeability’ measurements are essential in order to improve the flow model reliability. , Some typical simplified schemes for the water pressure distribution along joints are reported in Figure 5.1 in order to clarify the unstabilizing water effect on the slope stability. ‘The rock slope mass characteristics of the reponed schemes, are as follow: I. Rock mass is so heavily fractured that the water flow can be considered to occur through the rock mass: This occurs when a free surface, which can be surveyed by piezometric measurements, exists; Figure 5.1, Simplilied schemes of water pressure distribution for slope stability analysis (after Lembo Fazio & Ribacchi, 1988) 148 Rock slope stability analysis "2, Rock mass is heavily fractured, as in the above@uoted) situation, but a subyertical fully water filled tension crack is also present on the slopecresty~"" “3. Rock mass is usvally drained and water only flows through discontinuities when it rains heavily: 4, Rock mass is drained as in the previous case but the water flow is the toe in exceptional cases such as the presence of ice. The different water pressure distributions. of the above described cases, determine a large variation of slope stability conditions. Groundwater flow analysis hence becomes essential to assess slope stability conditions. 5.3 FLOW IN DISCONTINUOUS MEDIA The analysis of the groundwater behaviour in a jointed rock is of primary interest for both underground or superficial rock structure stability. Problems to be solved by determining flow behaviour in jointed rocks involves not only the stability of rock excavations, but also other types of geoengineering [fields such as that of evironment>geothermal energy or of petroleoum reservoir ‘E@ploiatiane Rock mechanics researches, carried out in order to understand the hydrology of fractured rocks. can be dealt with for the analysis of contaminant migration in * geoenvironmental engineering'or for rack hydraulic fracturing with injection of" cold water in geothermal systems or for peiroleoum reservoir exploitation Groundwater flow} paitern in rock slopes are different from deep underground _ rock structures because of the difference in effective stresses and water pressures inthe joints. ” The classical hypotheses in rock slope groundwater flow analyses are as follows ly o€curs through fissures (discontinuities) and rock matrix permea- bility is negligible as far as fissure conductivity is concemed (Plate 5.1). 2. Flow fidtion is laminar. Turbulent flow conditions only occur for disconti- nuity aperture values outside the usual range of slope stability problems and for hydraulic gradients higher than typical slope problems. However. for particular problems of groundwater flow in rock slopes these two restrictive hypothesis can be removed by taking the results of recent scientific works in deep rock structure groundwater flow analysis into account The flow through microcracks in the rock matrix and the turbulent flow in fissures with rough surfaces are two phenomena which can also occur in rock slope problems and which aredealy with inthis chapter. ~ Groundwater flow analysis can only be carried out.orice a joint network | pattem has becn set up dnd the joint conductivity has been assessed: Rock joint network models ‘which are dealt with in Chapter 6 have also been developed for groundwater flow in rock mass analysis. Groundwater flow in rock masses 149 Plate 5.1. Examples of water flowing through discontinuities in old Lusemna gneiss @uarries: 180 Rock slope stability analysis Stability analysis of a rock slope can be carried out by taking the:strain-flow coupled behaviour of rock joints into account, Water flow determines joint channelling effects with a variation of joint aperture; external and body forces acting on joints determine joint deformation which includes dilation, closure and shearing. The joint conductivity varies according to the aperture-closure deformation Coupled models solve simultaneously mechanical and flow problems by taking the variable aperture nature of the rock joints into account. 5.4°FLOW IN POROUS MEDIA. The problem of water flow through a rock mass can be analyzed as a seepage through a porous media problem in some particular conditions of homogeneous rock media or of equivalent homogeneous media. In this case, the seepage problem can be of a confined or unconfined type, (Figure 5.2). The flow through the medium can be assumed to be an irrotational flow if one does not consider rotations or distortions of the fluid particles during movement. The formulation of seepage flow is based on the Darcy law which states that the flow velocity is proportional to the hydraulic gradient in the flow direction. The constant of proportionality is termed as the permeability cocfficient. Thus, the Darcy law can be expressed. with reference to a 3-D problem in which x, v and 2 are the principal axis of permeability as: , free surface Figure §.2. Unconfined flow through porous medis: Groundwater flow in rock masses 15} where 1. "and w are the components of the seepage velocity; k,. k, and k, are the coefficients of permeability in the x, y and = direction respectively and @ is the hydraulic potential or the piezometric head. The hydraulic potential can be expressed as: Gux.y where p is the pressure, y,, the unit weight of the water and = the elevation head. The Darcy equation is valid for a creeping flow with very small Reynold number values and consequently when a linear flow behaviour occurs Stability analysis can be carried out by coupling the mechanical and the flow problem evenin the porous medivm case. Numerical models are used to compute the Variation with time of displacements, pore pressures, effective stresses and flow velocities in the discretized domain. 5.3 ROCK MASS FLOW MODELS. The choice of the flow model is of fundamental importance as far as the problem of water flowing through a rock mass is concemed. Louis (1976) divided the rock masses according to their defects and fabric into the groups (Figure 5.3) which are here reported with specific reference to slope stability problems: (a) (ce) pv *2 Ud) Figure 5.3. Types of media occuring in rock masses: a) Porous medium; b) Porous jointed medium: c) Porous medivm with impervious bartiers (1. Rock bridge), d) Porous medium containing channels (2. Channels); e) Karstic medium (after Louis, 1976). 152 Rock slope stability ana! re. 1. Porous media. mainly homogeneous, containing only small pores (Fi 5.3a). «2, Porous jointed media in which the fissures determine the hydraulic behav- iour of the rock mass (Figure 5.3b). 3. Porous media containing impermeable, barriers in which discontinuities are. filled with an impermeable particle composite material and where only rock bridges provide hydraulic connections (Figure 5.3c). 4. Porous media with small channels in which large discontinuities filled with an impenneable material ‘contain channels through which water can flow (Figure 5.34). 5, Karstic media containing wide passages and cavems of various geometrical forms, created by the solution and removal of the rock by lowing underground water. This is the case, for_insiance, of compact soluble carbonate rocks and soluble rock such as gypsum or salt (Figure 5.3e). The rock masses are divided into these groups according to common types of « flow Passases. However, the choice of modelling a rock mass as a continuous or discontinuous | medium still depends on the relative séale of the slope problem and on. 1 discontinuity set features such as spacing 3 and persistence. Examples of the importance of the relative scale problem on the choice of the flow’ behavi6ur are reported in Figure 5.4 where a typical case of a groundwater” flow problem i8 shown for folir diffetent types of rock masses. a \ NX 2 = (3) cn) re SA. Continvous and discontinuous media for flow problems, In Cases | and 2 the medium can be considered as continuous, in Cases 3 and 4 the medium can be considered as discontinuous. Fi Groundwater flow in rock masses 153 A jointed medium is correctly (Louis, 1969) schematized as being a continuous equivalent medium when unit block sizes are negligible with reference to the examined phenomenon scale (Case 2 of Figure 5.4). In this case. low in porous mediuntanalysis methods can be adopted for the hydraulic problem solution. In the cases of an appreciable unit block size, with reference to the relative slope scale and of unfilled discontinuities, water flow through discontinuities analysis methods should be used. The hydraulic properties of a jointed (disconti- nuous) rock mass depend on the hydraulic conductivity of the individual joint sets or of a single joint. 5.6 ‘HYDRAUEIC:CONDUCTIVITY OF A SINGLE DISCONTINUITY The law of flow ina single discontinuity is expressed as: forthe laminar flow and as: y=k,J? forthe turbulent flow, where ris the mean velocity: £yis the hydraulic conductivity of the discontinuity in the laminar flow condition; ty is the. hydraulic conductivity in the turbulent low condition: J, is the perpendicular projection of the hydraulic gradient on the discontinuity plane and ois the degree of non linearity of the Row behaviour, In the case of completely rough turbulent flow a= 0.5. ‘The transition [rom laminar to turbulent flow takes place, for the flow through discontinuity case. at very low values of the Reynolds number (< 100). decreasing as the relative roughness of the discontinuity surface increases. The Reynolds number represents the ratio between inertia and viscosity forces in a flow problem and is detined for the examined problem as: Qve Re=—— v where v'is the velocity: ¢ is the mean discontinuity aperture and v is the kinematic viscosity of the fluid The discontinuity hydraulic conductivity is dependent on the aperture and the wall discontinuity roughness. Therefore an adimensional parameter given by £/2¢ (relative roughness) is introduced. The critical Reynolds number, given to each examined wall discontinuity roughness. defines the transition between laminar and turbulent flow, Empirical results for & and o constant values are reported in Table 5.1 (Elsworth & Goodman, 1986). The hydraulic flow region, correspondent to the reported hydraulic conductivity values, are shown in Figure 5.5 as functions of relative roughness adimensional parameters and the Reynold number variations 154 Rock slope stability analysis Table 5.1. Equivalent hydraulic conductivities (after Elsworth & Goodman, 1986). Hydraulic zone Hydraulic conductivity (L/T) Exponent (ct) 1 10 ‘“ 4 2 2 (2) e an 2 [0.079 \v} y 31 3 4g log 05 en ah 4 —___, 1.0 12v (1 + 8.8(26)%) \ 19] y 5 Ag’ t % 0s ees lak x Ze 0.5 0.1 0.01 0.001 Re Figure 5.5. Hydraulic flow regions (after 1,000 10.000 100.000 Louis, 1969). 5:7 HYDRAULIC. CONDUCTIVITY OF A’DISCONTINUITY:SET: The determination of the hydraulic conductivity of a parallel discontinuity, set is required in order to charactérizé'the hydraulic properties of a rock mass con: dered to be made up of intact blocks separed by. several discontinuity parallel”, plane sets. The hydraulic conductivity of a, discontinuity set can be expressed, as in the above quoted, case of flow through a single discontinuity. by means of aii Groundwater flow in rock masses 155 expression which relates the ow velocity to the active hydraulic gradient. The. fiow velocity. given by the How raté in the direction of the discontinuities, divided by the total cross section of the mass, is hencé defined as: vskf (laminar flow) and v=kJ® (turbulent flow) The scale of the examined phenomenon is of great importance. Ina given volume, individual discontinuities may, within the plane on whictrthe discontinuity lies, be continuous or discontinuous; these two cases must be studied separately (Louis, 1974a). In the case of completely persistent discontinuities at the scale of the problem, the discontinuity hydraulic conductivity set is defined. in the discontinuity flow’ direction, for the laminar or turbulent flow as: Reel ky ek, where / (Figure 5.6) is the mean distance between the discontinuity set planes (spacing): 4; is the single discontinuity hydraulic conductivity and &,, is the rock matrix pemeability. In practice, as reported in Section 5.2. k,, is often negligible if compared with the cb kyterm In the case of non-perfect persistence of discontinuities, at the scale of the examined problem. the conductivity values are much lower than in the previous situation. Discontinuities have often a limited extent and do not communicate with other discontinuities,giving riseto water circulation through the rock matrix and hence through the rock porosities or microcracks (Katsube & Walsh. 1987). In this case. low discontinuity set conductivity values are described. Figure 5.6. Hydraulic parameters of a rock mass: b= mean distance between the discontinuity set planes (spacing); &, = single discontinuity hydraulic con- ductivity, k= rock matrix permeability. 156 Rock slope stability analysis 5.8 HYDRAULIG CHARACFERIZATION OF DISCONTINUOUS ROCK MASSES. In discontinuous rock masses, flow behaviour is anisotropic and is governed by joint features sich as spacing, Orientation, aperture. the number of set and ToUghiess. Itis practically impossible to assess flow behaviotr by only estimating single discontinuity features arid then by constructing a jointed Tock flow model able to give an overall answer to the flow problemé CBiased and inaccurary in single discontinuity characterizations are cumulated i in the overall flow model. The! help of“in situ: tests, able to allow one to determine the whole joint set behaviour, is required, both for overall behaviour assessmént’and for single discontinuity feature calibration... The aperture is. in particular, the discontinuity parameter which mostly affects the single discontinuity hydraulic conductivity assessment and which is, like, persistence, very difficult to.estimate both from the rock exposure survey or from borehole television images. Discontinuity aperture is not invariant with rock excavation but depends on the rock massdestres§ induced by excavation “Hydrauilié techniques to measure “in situ” the specific conductivity of a set of joints, can also. be, used, with the purpose of calibrating apenure discontinuity valves, ~~ ‘A pumping test from a borehole drilled perpendicularly to a discontinuity plane set is a Measurement technique available for this-purpose. The theory on which the interpretation of this test is based, is here reported. with reference to the Louis test description (1974a). A borehole. which intersects only one joint set has to be drilled before carrying out'the pumping test. The intersected joint traces, can be identified by observi ihe core of boreholes. The area between adjacent joints to which the test réfers and the obtained feature values cain ihe be choosen (Figure 5.7), If, in the examined rock mass. only this joint set is present, the result of the test wil) be. representative Of the whole jointed rock mass, but when several joint sets intersect, there will be, during ihe (est, a reciprocal influence. of one sét.on the others, Tests in several boreholes perpendicular fo each existing set should be carried out in order to have, a rioré reliable iiterpreiation. . ‘This test is carried out by pumping in water from the drilled borehole and by hence creating a Now which can_be expressed by the superimposition of the induced radial flow and of the uniform flow under gravity (in the plane xoy of the Figure 5.8) Inthe point M(x, 8) of Figure $.8: +(sin ce) x Groundwater flow in rock masses (S17 Figure 5.7.a) Hole directions (per- pendicular to the joint sets) in a pumping test; b) Physical and geo- metrical parameters required for a pumping test interpretation (after Louis, 1974) ab, = 6~ (sine Ven (sin &) y where qs the flow rate and 1, is the radius of the borehole. The term q/b defines the littear flow rate which is greater than 0 in the ‘pumping in’ test and lower than Oin the ‘pumping out’ test, The flow in the single discontinuity is hypothized to be laminar and conse- 158 Rock slope stability analysis discontinuity conductivity, the mean veloci Durins aflow will be replaced in the Row equations by Q/L: Q being the total flow rate in the test section. Groundwater flow in rock masses 159 Ty. pumping iests are appli ato So ‘ag 3 face bility cozitid 160 Rock slope stability analysis td @ Flow per m O/L °, pressure p Cow gern OF “hom parm Of. | 4 @ hp 1 pressure ap 2 pressure ap 3 flow (0 /a} : sandstone part (2) sibvert seal etn) (1) sutb-horizontat (aget me sandetone, drilling (marth [7 pumping tos [pumping test Le, Witaice betaeen times minutes times minutes aoe P ONPa) ® (Pay poten sain ES Lines minutes tines minotes Figure 5.10. Pumping tests in borehole results. a) Fissures perpendicular to the drillings; b) Ideal flow pressure behaviour: 1) Laminar motion; 2) Turbolent motion; 3) Turbulence compensated by fissure opening: 4) Opening of fissure and possible fracture: p, = critical pressure; c) Non reversible behaviour: 1) Hydrofracturation; 2) Joint wall particle transporta- tion; 3) Clogging?'d) Flow pressure behaviour measured in the test cavity for the cases in which the two packers isolated only one fissure. Groundwater flow in rock masses 161 The tests were carried“Out in December 1985 i in the. derivation tunnel of the Ridracoli damon behalf of the ENEL CRIS of Bergamo. The tests involved iéilling two boreholes perpendicular to the main discontimu- ity set present in the rqck mass-and isolating.a single ora few discontinuities with, The rock mass is made up of marl, sandstone and siltstone layers. Th Aayers are averagely 10° dipping and 50° dip directed. The discontinuity Survey For deter: mining the features of the fissures to be isolated was carried Out by means of observations with a TV borehole camera. Figure 5.10a reports, for the two drillings, the location of the surveyed fissures afd the positions, where the borehole packers were installed. for the pumping tests, _ The permeability of the discontinuities perpendicular to the boreholes and isolated by the packers were calculated as follows: . glo, (RI) 2nL(H -H,) where g is the pumping rate required to maintain a constant pressure in the test cavity: L is the length of the test cavity: ris the borehole radius; H is the total head in the test cavity: H,, is the jotal head measured at a distance R from the borehole. Four different phases are identified (Figure 5.10b) in an ideal How-pressure_, behaviour and for sufficiently high pressure in the test cavity: 1. Laminar motion determined by low-pressure linear dia, 2) Turbulent motion: ”°3. Compensation of the turbulent motion due to joint aperture because of the waler pressure: 4. Prevailing of the joint opening effect with the possibility of rock fracture. The. concavity change point of the flow-pressure curve corresponds to the so called ‘critical pressure’ which approximately represents the average effective stress in the drilling axis direction. , When the rock exhibits, during phases 3 and 4, an elastic type behaviour, the fissures will open and then close thereby denoting a reversible behaviour. When a non-reversible behaviour is determined, hydrofracturation, joint wall particle trasportation or clogging phenomena may occur (Figure 5.10c). Typical low-pressure diagrams and flow-time-pressure diagrams are shown in Figure 5.10d for the increasing and decreasing flow and pressure phases of tests | and 7. The coefficients of permeability measured in the direction of the examined discontinuities are reported in Table 5.2. In.the hypothesis that flow occurs only through planar and parallel fissures, the fissure aperture can be evaluated as: c= Viavgi@ H-F) For the cases in which more than one fissure is isolated in the test cavity the 162 Rock slope stability analysis Table 5.2. Coefficients of permeability and fissure apertures determined by the pumping tests at Ridracoli. hypoihesTeI@ads a a fissure has an aperture.of 0.065} ZATION O (AEEN Punctual permeabi mass is $0 heavily. and unifory medium from the flow motion Permeability me water condition in| re-establish the ori Field. measurements can be cd efficient at the surf ed. while inthe seed sts Inblyomeser tests er table. ‘When ihe, tes Groundwater flow in rock masses 163 Experimental case results are reported in several texts and papers (Hoek & Bray, 1981: Hvorslex, 1951: GCO, 1984; BS 5930, 1981). 5.10 MATHEMATICAL MODELS, The choice of the modelling method of fluid flow behaviour in the rock mass is firstly a problem of defining the fracture (discontinuity) features at the examined problem scate. In slope stability analysis, a single block equilibrium problem can be distin- ished from blocky system equilibrium problems. In the first case. flow behav- jour should be examined at the single fracture scale and models for a few fracture system How patterns should be examined at the single fracture scale, In the second case, flow behaviour should be analyzed at the fracture network scale and the flow calculation model choice depends on the anisotropy of the joint network, Flow behaviour also depends. whatever the scale of the problem, on the fracture deformation induced by mechanical stresses (gravitational, unloading stresses due 10 slope excavation, etc.). Numerical models should consider the interaction between deformation and flow. Models, based on a mathematical formulation able to simultaneously consider flow and deformation goveming equations, are called coupled models. The solution of the problem obtained by separately examined flows and deformations is called ‘uncoupled solution Finally. numerical models should be able to examine different flow regimens and boundary conditions in order to simulate the different rock mass flow behaviours: the flow regimen can be turbolent or laminar in a transient or steady state field and confined or uncontined. 5.10.1. Single fracture models A fracture has been defined (Witherspoon & Long, 1987) as an irregular 3-D channel with irregularly spaced sized obstacles. Witherspoon & Long distinguished four possible Now regimens in such channels {. Ifthe tracture is sufficiently open. the flow behaviour may essentially be the same as the flow between parallel plates. 2. As the fracture closes, the distribution of the contact arcas determines the Flow characteristics. [Fthe contact area is not well distributed, but occurs in sparse clunips, the flow may be non-linear even at low Reynolds numbers 2. Lfthe contact area is finely distributed, the flow will be very much like that of the porous media. Flux will be linearly related to gradient and the potential theary can be used to describe head distributions 4. Ifthe fracture is sufficiently closed, the flow will occur in tortuous channels. In this case, flow in the fracture plane becomes essentially a 2-D nework of 1-D conductors. 164 Rock slope stability analysis (9) fa) Figure 5.11. a) Pipe element; b) Piping network: D, soughness coefficient. = pipe diameter: L, = length of pipe: C= The numerical modelling of a network of pipes can be carried out by relating the head loss between the two nodes of a pipe element to the element discharg flow (Figure 5.11). The hydraulic conductivity of a circular pipe with a diameter d and a length L can be obtained from the Poiscuille !aw'as: red" 18vL By using a finite clement scheme, for the element ¢ shown in Figure 5.1 1a, the flows entering at node & and going out at node i can be expressed as: Q) =k (H.-H) Qj=-k'H,-H) or, using a matrix notation as 0%, | L-t | \ A, | 1a [ yap lay where H, and H, are the total heads in the nodal points k and j respectively. For the study’ of the cornplete network of Figure 5.1 1b, the interaction between the different elements should be taken into account This implies that there must be equilibrium at any given node of the network between the flow discharges cf the clements connected to the node. including any eventual entering (input) or outgoing (output) flows. Groundwater flow in rock masses 165 Gare the flows in every node and are positive when the fluid is input and negative as fluid output occurs. Equilibrium at any node means that the sum of the discharging flows of the elements equals the resulting flow. Thus for every node j: Zeng The total equation system to be solved for the Figure 5.11b pipe network analysis is: Bak Wk! -« 0 0 0 Hq, q RRS ak “0 Hy GQ -kS BBS AS 0 Hy Gy “Ht So ee Hy) = |G ~Ks ~hT wk 0 | | As Cs 0 0 49 o - Wy Cs where 4’ indicates the conductivity of element /. A model. for ihe analysis of the fluid flow between the rough surfaces of a fracture subjected to normal stress, was proposed by Yang ct al. (1988). The model simulates the void space between two surfaces using a stratified percola tion model based on a fractal distribution of apertures. Local apertures were treated as tubes with an elliptical cross section in order to determine the hydraulic resistance to be used in a network model. This resulted in a nctwork of highly unhomogeneous resistances A search technique based on the graph theory was used to remove dead-ends and dead loops. The Hardy-Cross method (Cross, 1936) was used to solve the fiow problem. The results, obtained by the model application to fluid flow between the rough surfaces of a fracture subjected to nonnal stresses, were supported by exper- imental observations and gave rise to the important conclusions which are summarised as follows: ~ Fractures under effective stress should be considered as a cluster of tubes intersecting cach other; — These flow tubes have a variable aperture; — As the apertures are diminuished by increasing stress, the flow tube disap- pears or becomes a dead end, so that flow is decreased not only by the aperture reduction by also by the reduction in the number of parallel tubes or the width of the flow path: — The linear plot of the logarithm of the apparent fracture aperture against the flow logarithm has a slope n > 3. 3.10.2 Joint nenvork models A numerical analysis of flow through a discontinuous media involves the preli- minary investigation of fracture networks. 166 Rock slope stability analysis bag Ge ees Pe Plate 5.2. Shear zone in a Lusema gneiss quarry. The principal techniques which are used to set up a fracture network are (Witherspoon & Long, 1987): 1. Stastistical analysis of observed field data: 2. Geophysical techniques able to sce into the rock: 3. Prediction of lracture patterns through the application of rock mechanics. The statistical joint network models are discussed in Chapter 6, whilst geophy- sical measurements are briefly discussed in Chapter |. Fracture network medels should include the possibiliry of generat the rock fracture geometry but also the structural rock del § zones, for example. dominate the hydrogcology of the site since such highly fractured zones conduct most of the water (Plate 5.2). CHAPTER 6 Geomechanical model 6.1 INTRODUCTION A slope geomechanical model involves the rock mass schematization required for slope excavation design and for natural slope stability analysis and consolidation projects (Plate 6.1). [n order to set up a geomechanical model it is necessary to: 1. Define the way in which rock slope mass is sub-divided into volumes; 2. Determine the potential instability kinematisms of the blocks which form the rock slope mass; 3. Divide the rock slope mass into ‘design sectors’ inside which procedures 1 and 2 can be applied. The principal parameters which govern these three aspects of the geonrecha- nical modelling set up are: The orientation, spacing and persistence of disconti- nuities. Some of the principal procedures of rock joint system modelling are described in the following paragraphs for the first problem. This description mainly refers to the Dershowitz & Einstein (1988) and Young (1990) general work in this field. The mathematical tool applied in order to identify the potential instability kinematisms is the discontinuity cluster analysis on hemispherical equal-area projections. The third problem pertains to the spatial variability of the discontinuity parameters, 6.2 ROCK JOINT SYSTEM MODELS 6.2.1 Orthogonal model This model consists of two or three mutually orthogonal sets of parallel joints (Snow, 1965) (Figure 6.1). Joint planes are unbounded or large enough to be assumed as unbounded within a modelling scale with a constant spacing. It is a single deterministic joint model and may be applied in order to study the fluid 168 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 6.1, Dolomitic limestone quarry. The excavated slope incorporates 7 benches which are about 15 m high with a maximum actual lateral extension of about 200 m. By C. Gagliardi. ITEA. Figure 6.1, Onhogonal model: a) 3-D; b) 2-D flow through fissures in geohydrology. The sides of the parallelpiped rock solids are defined by the spacings 5), 5 and S, between the joints of each set, measured ona normal to the mean set orientation. This model can be modified to be more realistic by introducing a Poisson process for joint locations, In this case, with intensity parameter A, the spacing S, Geomechanical model 169 is exponentially distributed and the probability density distribution of spacing values is given as: AS) = hes and the mean and variance are: m[S] = 1% v(S}= 12 The orthogonal joint system model assumes that the joints are planar; this requirement represents a significant limitation of the model as far as the practical application of rock mass mechanical behaviour simulation is concemed. 6.2.2 Unhounded random plane model Priest & Hudson (1976) recognized the similarity between the geometry of rock joint systems and planes and lines in the classical stochastic geometry situation Joints were simulated as Poisson Jines with a uniform distribution orientation. Ina 2-D trace plane, the model produces a system of joints represented by the Poisson lines (Figure 6.2) which corresponds well to the observed rock joint systems ina number of real geometrical situations. Priest & Hudson used their model for the evaluation of the rock block size distribution (Hudson & Priest, 1979) in 2-D field (area distributions) and in a 3-D field (volume distributions). (a) (b) Figure 6.2. Unbounded random plane mode): a) 3-D: b) 2-D. 110. Rock slope stability analysis f (a) 1.8 0.6 0.2 0.2 0.6 1.0 1.4 1.8 Figure 6.3. Probability density distributions of the areas for two ortogonal regularly and randomly oriented joints sets (after Hudson & Priest, 1976). The analogy between orthogonal and random model area distribution (Figure 6.3) was also determined. If, for instance, two ortogonal or randomly orthogonal joint sets have the same spacing distributions (negative exponential in the case of Figure 6.3), the similarity of the area distributions shows that the area distribution is independent of the joint orientation. ‘A Monte Carlo simulation (see Chapter 9) may be carried out in order to determine the block size distribution of the examined rock mass. For this reason, histograms of joint set spacings are constructed first. The typical case is that in which the mean planes of the three joint sets characterizing the model are mutually orthogonal The analogy found by Hudson & Priest (1979) between the volume distribution inarock mass and particle size distribution in soils is also usefu) to understand the kind of phenomenon which causes rock mass fracturation and consequently the choice of the appropriate mode! to study the rock slope stability problem. Some typical cumulative rock volumes and soil grain size distributions are reported in Figure 6.4. The block volume distribution curves show that poorly distributed rock blocks correspond to normal spacing distributions. This reflects the block tendency for jointed masses, with normally distributed edges, to have similar volumes. On the other hand, blocks with large edge length differences also have greater volume differences and volume size distributions are well represented by negat- ive distributions. However, rock block volume distributions are very poorly distributed if compared with soil particle size distributions. The block volume Geomechanical model 171 100 om 0.1 o_o mn 80 60 40 20} Ae dm 10? 10°80" 10 415 3H yo"! 159 10! 102 203 104 Figure 64, Soil particle distributions: 1) Uniform distribution: 2) Non vniform distribution; rock block edge distribution; 3) Nosmal distribution: 4) Uniform distribution: 5) Negative exponential distribution. values vary in a range between 107 and 10°? m? with a A parameter of the negative exponential spacing distribution: AeA) = A= 2y= 10/m In this context, the difference between soils and rocks is that the degradation and sorting effect of transposed particles can cause a relatively large proportion of the volume of a well graded soil deposit to be composed of particles of microscopic dimensions mixed with sand, gravel and pebbles. In the case of rock masses, the block size distribution is generated by the fracturing of an intact rock without subsequent mixing of small fractions. The absence of this process prevents very small rock blocks from forming a significant proportion of the rock mass in a statistically homogeneous domain (Hudson & Priest, 1979). However, this type of Poisson process of joint system modelling is based on the assumption of the infinite extent of joint planes that creates overly systematic block networks and excessively connected bounded joint networks. It is therefore not suitable for joint systems where bounded joint models are required. These disadvantages have been corrected in the co-planar polygonal model. 6.2.3 Co-planar polygonal model Two models were developed for the adaptation of the Poisson plane joints to the bounded joint concept: the Veneziano model and the Dershowitz model (1984). Figure 6.5 illustrates the generation of a Veneziano rock joint system model The 2-D Poisson line process (Figure 6.5a), the making of polygonal joints (Figure 6.5b) and the 3-D Poisson plane process (Figure 6.5c). The model 172. Rock slope stability an \ | fochastic srocesse: Geomechanical model 173 In the case of non-persistent bounded joints, the Veneziano model can, but usually does not, produce blocks. This may happen because joints are defined by Poisson lines on previously defined Poisson planes, therefore, intersections between joints on different joint planes do not often match joint edges. In the Dershowitz model, instead, joint intersections and joint edges coincide. For the Dershowitz model, polygons are generated by the intersection of the Poisson planes rather than an independent second Poisson line process as in the Veneziano model. Therefore, joint edges are defined by joint plane intersections and as a result, all joint intersections occur at joint edges. The generation phases of the Dershowitz joint system model are reported in Figure 6.6. The polygon size is controlled by the intensity of intersecting joint plane processes. The model defines distinct rock blocks and is flexible in specification of orientation distributions so that a variety of polygonal joint shapes and polyhedral block shapes can be modelled Figure 6.6, Generation of Dershowitz joint system model: a) Poisson plane generation; by) Polygon generations; ¢) 3-D joint network model (after Young. 1990) 174 Rock slope stability analysis 6.2.4 Mosaic block tessellation models Mosaic tessellation is defined in a 2-D fieldas a process of random subdivision of the plane into non-overlapping convex polygons. This definition can be applied to a 3-D field like any stochastic process of subdivision of space into non-overlapping convex regions (i.¢. polyhedra). In the mosaic tessellation model, the faces of these polyhedra define joints and the polyhedra are blocks bounded by joints. Therefore, onhogonal and co-planar polygonal models can be considered as special cases of mosaic tessellation in which space is divided by a process of joint planes. Mosaic block tessellation is the form of tessellation in which the space is divided into regions by regular or stochastic grids of interlocking polyhedra where the polyhedra faces do not have to be on joint planes. The mosaic block tessellation is based on the definition of joints which ‘incidently’ divide space into blocks (Dershowitz & Einstein, 1988). Two classical mosaic block tessellations are used in joint models (Young, 1990): Voronoi tessellation and Delaunay tessellation (Figure 6.7). The Voronoi model is obtained from a Poisson process of joint centers that develop at a constant rate up to the formation of the polyhedra. The most likely polyogons to be formed in this process are hexagons (Santalo, 1976). The Delaunay model is also defined by a Poisson process joint but with the points representing block vertices rather than block centers. Therefore, alf block faces are connecting adjacent point triangles. The geometric properties of these block tesselJation models are well known ina stochastic geometrical situation (Santalo, 1976). The geometry of jointing systems in these models corresponds directly to the geometry of the block forming process. A wide variety of joint system geometries can be modelled. These models usually produce joint networks with a uniformly distributed onentation, but they can be relaxed for the desired specific orientation distribu- tion. These types of joint networks are appropriate to model a rock mass when joint systems are the result of a process of block formation in a rock mass, such as, for example, the jointing in columnar basalts (Dershowitz & Einstein, 1988). The primary limitation of the application of the mosaic block tessellation model is the requirement of joint and block shapes. The joints are the faces of the polyhedral blocks and as a result mustalways be polygonal. For the case in which polyhedral blocks and polygonal joints are not displayed in the rock mass exposure, a mosaic block tessellation model may not be appropriate. 6.2.5 Poisson disk model In the Poisson disk model (Baecher et al., 1977) (Figure 6.8), joints are assumed to be circular or elliptical disks and each joint disk is specified by disk center Jocation, diameter and orientation. A Poisson process locates disk centers in a Geomechanical model 175 Jetermministic, b) Voronoi tess 176 Rock slope stability analysis space with a uniform distribution and joint diameters and orientations are selected randomly from their given distributions. These parameters (center, diameters and orientation) can be deducted from the structural survey of a rock exposure. Blocks are only formed when joint density is sufficiently high and disk size is sufficiently large enough to allow a three disk joint intersection. This occurs when rock mass is formed by a distinct rock block system and consequently a distinct element method can be perfectly adapted to model rock slopes. Joints are not co-planar in this disk model. The random Poisson disk model may be suitable for a joint system in the field when joints are planar, bounded and terminated without respects (0 joint intersections, even though elliptical joint shapes may not be measurable ‘in situ’. 6.2.6 Other joint modelling approaches Other techniques have been introduced for joint network modelling. The types of these approaches and respective references are here reported for those with a more specific interest in this field. A fractal modelling of joint network has been examined by Chiles (1988). Further development of this approach is required (Young, 1990) before fractal methodology can be applied to practical field applications. Geostatistics, instead, has recently been incorporated with two different types of joint system modelling; joint network simulations (Chiles, 1988) and discrete block models of the equivalent continuum media (Young, 1986; Young & Hoerger, 1987). In the joint network simulation, joint planes are considered to be disks and a geostatistical simulation process is applied for the joint modelling, In discrete block models, the joint system network is replaced with a discrete cell-block. This approach is developed in Section 6.4.2. 6.2.7 Concluding remarks on the joint system modelling techniques Joint system modelling techniques involve the spatial division of the rock mass according to joint geometrical features such as spacing, orientation and per- sistence. Stochastic methods involve random division, deterministic methods involve estimated mean geometric parameter use. The Poisson process application for stochastic methods involve negative exponential distribution of modelled joint systems. The scanline survey is the most common tool used to measure joint features and to assess the distribution of these features. Joint measurements carried out on scalines should confirm the stochastic hypothesis assumed for the rock mass domain ie. either stochastic homogeneity or Poisson distributions, before joint systems models are set up. Geomechanical model 177 The bias and accuracy of sampling in a joint survey has been discussed in Chapter 3; however, sampling errors can also occurr if all the independent sampling directions ase not conveniently explored on the rock mass domain and ‘blind zones’ (Yow, 1987) exist for some joint set orientations. From a theoretical point of view, joint survey scanlines should be orientated in directions perpendicular to the discontinuity system mean orientation and there should be at least as many as the number of the existing systems. From a practical point of view, it is difficult to ‘a priori’ determine both the mean orientation of the joint systems or the scanline orientation on the rock mass exposure. According to Hudson & Priest (1979), scanline orientation can be established by using one of the following two methods: 1. Orthogonal pairs of scanlines are chosen without reference to the disconti- auity orientation; 2. Pairs of scanlines are establisted, where possible, parallel to two main discontinuity sets. Neither of these two methods allows one to directly measure spacing and generally NV scanlines should be oriented. For a complete N discontinuity system analysis, however, Hudson & Priest (1979) evaluated the total scanline length as at least 50 times the mean discontinuity spacing. 6.3 POTENTIAL INSTABILITY PHENOMENA IDENTIFICATION Rock slope instability phenomena have been classified according to the following categories (Heuzé & Goodman, 1971): 1, Sliding along existing discontinuity planes with neglectable inner strain of, the sliding rock blocks; 2. Block rotation or block toppling; 3. Sliding of rock masses with substantial deformation of the sliding mass; 4. Sliding along surfaces passing through homogeneous materials, where mobilized shear strength is equal to the available shear strength. The first three phenomenon categories depend on the mechanical and geome- trical features of single discontinuities, whilst the fourth can be identified in the case of closely jointed rock masses. In these cases, rock mass can be considered to be a statistically homogeneous medium. The limiting equilibrium method can be applied to stability analysis problems of the first category (see Chapter 8). Rock block toppling, rotation and toppling with sliding problems pertaining to the second category are analyzed with statical or dynamic equilibrium equation methods (see Chapters 7 and 9). Limiting equilibrium methods are applied for the slope stability analysis of the problems pertaining to the fourth category of the phenomena. However, in the fourth case, since rock masses are strongly fracturated and weathered, typical soil slope stability analysis methods such as those of Bishop, 178 Rock slope stability analysis {b) te) (a) Figure 6.9. Principal types of instability phenomena and spherical representation of the structural conditions which can determine these slope instability events, The dotted lines of the great circles represent the mean plane of the joint system exposed on the rock face; the great circles with a continuous line represent the slope face plane. a) Rotational sliding on a circular shear failure surface; b) Siding along a plane: c) Sliding along the two discontinuity plane intersection; d) Toppling of rock columns or rock slabs (after Hoek & Bray, 1981). Geomechanical model 179 Janbu and so on are better used than rock slope stability analysis methods (see Chapter 8). Finally, sliding phenomena analysis pertaining to the third category can be analysed by means of numerical methods, such as the distinct element method, which determine block motion equations and consider discontinuity stiffness and block deformation. Numerical methods which are able to solve dynamic block equilibrium equa- tions, such as the distinct element method can successfully be applied to the movement evolution of all the above quoted instability problem categories. The identification of potential unstable mass kinematisms, according to the discontinuity set orientation, can be carried out by using the equal-area or stereographical projection of surveyed discontinuity pole clusters. Figure 6.9 reports, on equal-area projections, the data of 4 typical discontinuity surveys in the form of poles (Hoek & Bray. 1981). In addition, the mean plane of each pole cluster and mean plane of the slope face are reported in the same equal-area projection in the form of great circles. The correspondent possible instability movement is given on the left side of Figure 6.9, for each examined discontinuity spherical projection. ‘The 4 potential rock instabilities shown by the comparison between the joint cluster orientations and rock slope face orientation are as follows: 1. Rotational sliding on a circular shear failure surface which occurs when a rock slope mass is strongly fracturated and it is not possible to individuate the preferential directions of the discontinuity sets. 2. Sliding along a plane which occurs when the mean dip direction of a discontinuity cluster is almost parallel to the slope face dip direction. This phenomenon is typical in schistose rock masses. 3. Sliding along the two-discontinuity plane intersections, which occurs when the intersection joint of the two great circles, representing the central values of two existing pole clusters, falls inside the zone limited by the slope face mean plane and the same side of the arc of the circle of a horizontal plane. This phenomenon is typical in blocky or buttressed rock masses. 4, Toppling instability of rock columns or slabs which may occurr when the rock mass is subdivided by subvertical planes. This phenomenon is typical in tabular rock masses. 6.4 DESIGN SECTORS As reported in Chapter 3, the cluster analysis of discontinuity groups represents a result of a joint survey interpretation. Cluster analysis is used to examine joint orientation features and to determine, for each cluster, a mean value and a joint orientation dispersion around this mean value which can be expressed in the statistic form. General statistical functions, able to well describe experimental 180 Rock slope stability analysis es Geamechanical model 181 joint set orientation distributions, have not yet been determined. This section does not deal with these particular problems. The first problem of a geomechanical model is to define the design sectors inside the rock mass slope domain in such a way as to consider the mean orientation of the joint set as constant inside each design sector. As the discontinuity set orientation can usually be considered as a regionalized variable (i.e. a correlation between the distance of two joints of the same set and their orientation variation occurs) it is possible to improve the geomechanical model by applying geostatistic techniques. In this case, more cells inside a design sector can be identified and a deterministic value of every joint set orientation can be assessed for each cell. The design sector definition is bascd on cluster analysis carried out using stochastic or geostatistic methods on different zones pertaining to the rock slope mass domain. The mathematical model and numerical simulation application must not be used as a substitute for the geologist or engincer’s judgement, but as a support and confirmation 6.4.1 Statistical models Several stochastic methods have been proposed in order to subdivide the rock mass domain into design sectors. Mahtab & Yegulalp (1982) proposed a methodology which allows one to dircetly define the geometrical boundaries of the design sectors. This method permits one to group surveyed discontinuities into families on the basis of the similarity test carried out on joint orientation surveyed in adjacent scantines. An application example of this methodology is reported in Figure 6.10. Figure 6.10a shows the joint survey zone indications, the alteration zones and principal faults in an open pit site. Figure 6./0b reports the mean discontinuity set orientation for each design sector defined for the examined mine site. The application of the geostatistical technique to the setting up of the gco- mechanical model is discussed in the following section (Young & Hoerger, 1986, 1987; Carosso et al., 1987). 6.4.2 Geostatistical models Geostatistics has been defined by Matheron (1 962-1963) as ‘the application of the formalisms of random functions to the reconnaissance and estimation of natural phenomena’. A natural phenomenon is quantitatively described in geostatistics by the spatial distribution of one or more variables called ‘regionalized variables’. A mineral grade referring to a rock volume weight, topographic surface altitude points and the orientation of a discontinuity set are variables which can assume the character of regionalized variables. 182 Rock slope stability analysis A regionalized variable which is used for a mathematical description of a physica! phenomenon may assume a double aspect (Guarascio, 1971): 1, A random aspect, due to the fact that numerical values of the examined variable can also vary greatly and randomly in points of space in which the physical pehnomenon occurs. Consequently, variable value variations cannot be described as a spatial known function. 2. A structural aspect occurs when the numerical values of the variable are not totally independent of their spatial position, but their correlation depends on their distance. AS such a structure is recognizable in mathematical terms, variables are called regionalized variables. The two aspects can be defined in mathematical terms, the random aspect is defined. with reference to every point lying in the examined space, by the mean value of the random variable, and the structural aspect is defined by the dependen- cy of two random function realizations on these distance points and not on an absolute geometrical position The geostatistical too! for the structural variable analysis is the variogram. A variogram can be estimated by several realizations of a random variable pair. A variogram estimator 2¥(h) is the arithmetic mean of the square differences between (wo experimental measurements (2(x,), 20; + 4) at any two points separated by the vector /t and can be expressed as No => Nh) where N(h) is the experimental pair number [=(x,). 20x, + 1) of data separated by the vector hz =(v;) represents the numerical value obtained trom the realization of the random variable at point x, on the examined spatial domain. ‘The variogram function estimation can then be constructed for lag h increasing values, In practice, the structural function i is only used for limited h distances which lie in the space where the quasi-intrinsic hypothesis can be assumed, The quasi-intrinsic hypothesis represents a compromise between rigorous mathematical aspects (intrinsic hypothesis) and the amount of available data and hence engineering judgement, ‘The intrinsic hypothesis involves a random function = intrinsic when (Journel & Huijbregis. 1978): 3. The expected value exists and does not depend on the support point x. E(Zay}am Vx x) which is said to be 4, Forall A vectors, the increment [Z(x + h) — Z(x)] has a finite variance which does not depend on x. Var (Z(x + h)~Zer)} = El Ziv +h) - Zi hy Geomechanical model \83 The kriging technique, can be applied to the local estimation of the mean value of a regionalized variable in the regionalized area when the validity of the hypothesis mentioned in 1, 2, 3 and 4, exist. Kriging is a local estimation technique which provides the best linear unbiased estimator of the unknown studied character- istics. The kriging technique application requires the regionalized variable struc- ture knowledge and therefore the variogram function estimation. Geostatisties has been applied, with good results, in order to analyze the spatial variability of the geometrical features of joint sets and {o construct a geomecha- nical model. The examined rock joint features were orientation, length and spacing sur- veyed on scanlines positioned on the whole examined rock slope mass. The joint orientation spatial variability was analyzed by constructing a vec torial variogram (Young & Hoerger, \986) and by applying the kriging technique (ordinary kriging) in order to assess the mean orientation of each joint set in the different cells in which the rock slope mass has been subdivided. A structural discontinuity model was thus obtained Rock slope mass division in cell-blocks may be carried out by using the intrinsic hypothesis assumption as a division criterion. The maximum cell-block size can be established as the zone in which the expected value of the joint orientation of each set is independent of the joint spatial position, The scalar quantities, such as length or spacing, may be treated as mineral rates in an orebody and classical mining geostatistic techniques can be directly applied. Joint orientation should be considered as a vectorial variable and the indepen dence between the dip and the dip direction of joints should not be assumed. The vectorial variogram of the vectorial variable orientation needs to be assumed for a geostatistical analysis of the joint orientation variation in the rock slope mass regionalized area (Young & Hoerger, 1988) The vectorial variogram of joint orientation is defined as the mathematical expectation of the square difference of pairs of vectors separated by the vectorial distance h: 2y (x, A) = E( (20) - 200 + ]"} where E+} represents the mathematical expectation, and 2(x) the joint orientation at the point with the x coordinate. The joint feature average values, such as orientation spacing and length, may be obtained by using the ordinary kriging technique in each cell-block The results of a geostatistical model construction example application are reported in Figure 6.11. The example refers (0 an open pit copper mine where a joint survey was carried out on 15 x 15 m? square areas alligned along scanlines placed on exploitation benches (Figure 6.112) (Young & Hoerger, 1986). Joint set variogram refer to the parallel and perpendicular line to mean joint set orienta- tion, The joint set orientation variograms show geostatistal anisotropy of the 184 Rock slope stability analysis 190 200 300 400 Figure 6.11. Geostatistic application to the geamechsinical model consteuction in in open pit mine: a) Map of the onine benches with the surveyed zones: h) Variogram of the jaint origatation in the parallel (continuous line) and perpendicular (dotted line} to the mean strike ofa joint set (ulter Young & Hoerger. 1986) h(m) (bd) regionalized variable. Figure 6.11b also reports the analytical curves (spherical models) used 10 approximate the experimental variograms. Figure 6.12 shows an ordinary kriging application example result used to estimate the average discontinuity set arientation in open pit design sectors. Geomechanical model \85 I T T T TY Ty el 1 "i aly fg lye Procky Feo TFer | Sart al Saute Mt) | ‘ | 1 | I I [p17 82.9 [342 p77 MI |My 275 | foot lyga bea baze bog b 2 1 ay p87 62) 36 72 \ !oal 38.910. t361 18 | 22a l7al 200 | tol I tt 1 1 4] 12209 | 25 185] 20 | 74] 44s | bool | laae | | | | I $ 41 - 1 oy 338) 82 | 241 | 82 | | Io | lod I l60 1 16s | 1 i @) (o) Figure 6.12. Geostatistie application to open pit face stability analysis: a) Map of the mine with the kriging block contours: b) Safety factors (peak and residual condition values), orientation angles of the rack wedges for each kriged black (after Carosso et al., 1987), The example refers to a feldspat mine, exploited with benches, over different excavation wall directions. The estimated average orientation data obtained by using the kriging technique in every design sector is the input parameters for slope stability analysis. Figure 6.12 also gives the results, in terms of safety factors, of the stability analysis carried out using the limit equilibrium method (see Chapter 8) for cach potentially unstable situation 6.5 APPLICATION EXAMPLE The principal geomechanical features of a rock mass exploited in a [5 km? quarry area in an Italian mountain site, are here presented. ‘A geomechanical model helps the quarry planning operations in designing the development of the excavation activity. The exploited rock, called Luserna stone, is a grey-greenish local azure gneiss. The rock is mainly tabular and is widely employed in the building industry for ormamenta] purposes. The quarry basin is located on the Ttalian side of the Western Alps in the Bagnolo Piemonte, Luserna San Giovanni and Ror& towns. More than 300 quarries are still in operation in more than 600 rock walls. The exploited orebody outcrops over an area of about 35 km? and is a thick and extensive intercalation between micaschists, fine grained gneisses and Augen gneiss. ‘The regional sub-horizontal dip of the rock schistosity is interrupted by a system of E-W directed folds. The thickness of this system, which is as much as 186 Rock slope stability analysis 700 m, is partly due to repeated folds. The area is also marked by the presence of approximate N 20°E and E-W fault systems with fillings ranging from metres to decimetres. The general picture of the deposit is that of a thick pile of thin banks, with a subhorizontal or stighily sloping (5-22) dip, The bank heads occasionally outcrop, even though they are usually covered by debris or waste rock dumped from earlier workings. The exploited horizons arc usvally 10 m thick and formed by uniform 0.1 to | metre thick banks, overlain with more fractured layers. ‘The horizons usually extend laterally as much as t km, but their continuity is interrupted by faults. The quarrying activity follows the exploitable horizons and has led to a characteristic distribution of the works At the quarry face level, the deposit appears to be a series of regular banks consisting of one or, very occasionally, wo exploitable layers, covered by banks of mostly useless stones and debris (Plate 6.2) “The main splittability plane is usually very easy to work and coincides with the foliation. Joint systems, in addition to these discontinuities. produce different shaped and sized rock volumes on the excavation faces. Further information on the geological features of the Lusema stone and of the interdisciplinary studies of the quarry exploitations are available (Sandrone et al., 1982). Plate 6.2. Rock wall ata Luseraa Geomechanical model 187 The planning of the work extension of the single quarry units is influenced by the local morphology and by the schistosity. cleavage plane and joint set orienta- tion in the excavated area. The prospecting and the design of the quarry activity of new productive horizons are influenced by the characteristics of the geological regionalized variables of the problem: The extent and the thickness of the exploited bank, the thickness of the covering rock and debris and the rock mass fracturation degree. The geomechanical data presented in this example refers to a quarry area of km? (Figure 6.13). In this area two Luserna stone horizons with different thicknesses are exploited at different elevations: The first is between 1100 and 1200 mazs.|. with the principal excavation faces N 15°W dip directed; the second is between 1220 a.s.l. and 1240 a.s.J. and the principal excavation face plunges in the N 75°E direction The first Lusema stone horizon is exploited over a lateral extension of about | km and quarry activity is in progress in 24 different claims. Inthe second horizon the quarry activity was interrupted because of a landslide which occurred in this area in 1978 following heavy rainfall. A new quarry design has been prepared for the quarry activity continuation in a zone adjacent to the previous landslide area. The new principal quarry excavation face will be 160m Jong. The principal excavation faces of the quarries exploiting the two Lusema stone layers are almost perpendicular and the distance between the new quarry and the already active quarries of the first horizon is about I km. The excavated slopes incorporate benches and the planning of the quarry operations concems the determination of the geometrical characteristics of the excavated slopes taking the bench and overall slope stability problems into account The stability analysis of the rock slope faces involved the following surveys. tests and calculations: 1. Rock exposure survey and quantitative description of the discontinuities; 2. Shear laboratory tests and till tests on natural discontinuities, 3. Analysis of the water flow through rock discontinuities on the basis of a designed rainfall and the quarry basin hydrogeological features; 4. Geomechanical model set up by determining the design sectors of rock unit volumes and potential instability phenomenon types on every design sector: 5. Stability analysis for every possible previously identified instability mode; 6. Modification of the slope geometry for the potential unstable situation to detennine stable quarry face configurations. Some results of the operations described in points 1-4 are here presented. The results of a back-analysis of the landslide which occurred in 1978 and of the stability analysis carried out for the quarry planning are presented in Chapter 8. The discontinuity sets surveyed in the quarries exploiting the first Luserna stone horizon are the schistosity (s), two conjugate principal joint sets &, and ky and a secondary sheeted joint set k;. The quarry faces are perpendicularly crossed 188. Rock slope stability analysis Geomechanical model 189 by cleavage planes which may be more than twenty metres spaced. Schistosity planes, completely persistent, are 2-5 m spaced and divide the rock walls into banks. The schistosity is sub-horizontal and plunges in a Western direction. The principal joint sets are subvertical; k, plunges towards the WSW direction, ky plunges towards the NNW direction. The joints are almost 100% persistent and terminate against the schistosity without crossing it in nearly all the surveyed scanlines. The joints of the ky set are the splitting planes in the quarry operations, even though, for the local orientation variation of the joint set, potentially unstable thin tock wedges, are determined on the subventical slope face after every exploitation cut. These wedge’ are bounded by the planes of the k; and k, joint sets and by the excavation face and the berm of each bench. The third joint set, ,, is subvertical dipping towards NE. The wall surfaces of the k; joint system orientation spatial variability is the most scattered and is the cause of various shaped and volume rock wedges. This second type of wedge is bounded by Ay and k, and/or k, joints and by the free face of the excavation. The ky joint spacings vary in an average range of one to several metres. The ky joints cannot be considered ubiquitous at the scale of the slope stability problem The discontinuity walls of the k,, ky and ky sets are usually closed and occasionally very closed. The joint wall aperture increases in the higher part of the. quarry face and continues to increase with the deepening of the excavations. The cleavage wails are-filled with frictional material, The thickness of the filling varies from ten centimeters up to metres. These shear zones are important for the stability problems as far as the water flow and the rock wedge liberation are concerned. The structural. discontinuity and schistosity features were also surveyed in the second Lusema stone layer. The number and the orientation characteristics of the discontinuity sets are those surveyed in the first Luserna stone layer. ‘The geostatistical structure of the spatial variability of the joint set orientation over the whole examined area was analysed. The surveyed data of the discontinuity set orientations are reported in the form of pole clusters in spherical equal-area projection for the two Lusema stone horizons and for the defined design sectors in Figure 6.13 The observations of the lengths of the joint traces on the rock wall exposures showed that, unlike the case of the first Lusema stone horizon, a certain number of joints do not terminate against the schistosity, but cross the foliation planes causing large potential unstable rock wedge formations. The difference in length between the joint traces surveyed on the two rock horizon exposures can be determined by the fact that the natural slope, on which the second Luserna stone layer is exploited, is steeper than the slope on which the first layer is located and is subjected to erosive action due to water flowing at the slope foot. 190 Rock slope stability analysis Two pictorial drawings of the quarry faces of the two exploited horizons are also reported in Figure 6.13. As the principal stability problems of the quarry faces involve the possibility of siiding phenomena on the joint set planes, a shear strength envelope was deter- mined for this type of discomtinuity system The following quamtities were estimated for the joint planes: ~ Basic and residual friction angle; — Roughness and indentation degree of the wall surface in contact; ~ Scale effect, taking the ratio between the length on which JRC, and JCS were assessed and the length of the most probable sliding portions of joint planes, into account Figure 6.13 also shows the shear sirength envelope used for the stability analysis. CHAPTER 7 Rockfalls, topples and buckles 7.1 ROCKFALL Rock slope overall stability analysis models study the principal rock movement mode or failure phenomenon: Sliding, toppling, flexural buckling or others. The purpose of the rock slope engineer is to prevent rock mass movements The problem of rockfall protection work designing is instead to determine the paths and the trajectories of the unstable blocks which detach from the rock slope. The variables which mainly affect the choice and the positioning of the protection works are: The maximum path length, the height, the velocity and the energy assumed by the blocks during the fall A block detached from a rock face may have the following types of movement during flight: — Free falling; — Bouncing; = Rolling: ~ Sliding, A mathematical model set up in order to completely foliow the travelling of the block should be able to describe these four movement types. The problem becomes more complex if the mathematical modelling does not consider instantaneous passages from one movement to another or take into account, that in reality, movement combinations such as rolling and sliding or rolling and bouncing, may occur. Analytical procedures for the mathematical schematization of the cockfall phenomenon, able to consider both the geometrical and mechanical problem characteristics have been set up by several researchers, above all. in the last twenty years. 7.1.1 Analytical formulations of rockfalt Hungr & Evans (1988) divided the existing analytical formulations into wo categories: Rigorous methods, and lumped mass methods. 19) 192. Rock slope stability analysis TALL Rigorous methods The Distinct Element Method (Cundall, 1971) and the analytical procedure proposed by Descocudres & Zimmermann (1987) are rigorous rockfall analysis methods. The Distinct Element Method considers the rock mass as being a blocky system and solves the block dynamic equilibrum equations. The method is discussed in Chapter 9. “The method set up by Descoeudres & Zimmermann is peculiar in that it studies the spatial movement of blocks striking a 3-D topography. In the rigorous method analysis, the size and shape of the blocks are assumed to be known ‘a priori” and all the block movements, including those involving the block rotation. are considered. The block flies in the air with a ballistic trajectory. ‘The translational and rotational moments are transferred by the block impact at the slope surface contact. The impact impulse changes both the moments, according 10 a very complex condition set which depends on the corner block shape at the surface contact, on the rotation angle at the impact point, on the roughness of the slope surface, and on the frictional deformations. Since it is difficult to schematize all these conditions, the rigorous methods are distin- guished on the basis of the simplified hypothesis assumed in order to describe the block impact phenomenon. 7.4.1.2. Limped mass methods In the lumped mass method. the single block is considered to be a simple point with the mass m and velocity v. The point flies in the air with a ballistic trajectory and the air resistance is usually neglected. As the block contacts with the slope surface, the normal component of the velocity is changed in sign and reduced by a coefficient K,, (normal coetficient of restitution) and the tangential component of the velocity is also changed in sign and reduced by a coefficient K, (tangential coefficient of restituion). Lumped mass methods do not take the rotational moments into account. The two restitution coefficients are assumed as overall values which take all the impact characteristics. including the deformation work, the contact sliding and the transfer from rotational to translational moment and vice versa, into account. Numerical models based on these hypotheses were set up by Piteau (1976), Azimi etal. (1982), Spang (1987) and Hungr & Evans (1988) Falcetta (1985) developed an analytical formulation, based on the lumped mass method hypotheses which can also consider the influence of the block shape on the block falling path. Two mathematical models for rockfall analysis were proposed by Bozzolo et al. ((988). These models can be distinguished from the other lumped mass type models because they consider the size and the shape of the failing block. the real 3-D block motion and the block rotation. both in the air or during impact with the slope surface. Rockfalis, topples and buckles 193 7.1.2 Rockfall movement analysis 7.1.2.0 Block detaching and throwing condition The start of a rockfall movement involves an initial block condition which causes the block to move out from the slope in a parabolic trajectory. This condition is induced by a rock slope failure. The initial block velocity, at the start of the free falling movement, depends on the initial instability mode and on the block displacement which occurs before the block is thrown into the air. The principal rock slope instability mode may be induced by: — Water pressure in joints: = Earthquake shaking or blast vibrations; ~ Pressures due to ice formation in joints: = Slope excavation or slope surcharghing. ‘The principal slope instability modes are sliding and toppling, Sliding and toppling may occur simultaneously and when the unstable block shape is sufficiently rounded, a ralling movement may be induced. The block rolling or sliding velocity vafier a length I, is given as (Figure 7.1): 1) where g is the gravity acceleration and 8 is the sliding /rolling friction angle Figure 7.2 shows the velocity-length diagrams for the pure sliding/rolling movement and for different o& values in Equation 7.1 Figure 7.1, Initial condition of a block before falling from a rock slope 194 Rock slope stability analysis 2 3 4 5 I[my Figure 7.2. Velocity-length diagram for different slope inclination a and for a constant @ valve (@ = 30), In the lumped mass model use. only traslational velocity is considered, In a rigorous model use, where the block size and shape is assigned, an initial angular block velocity must also be given. One should consider that, due to the geometrical irregularity of the slope surface and of the block, the pure sliding or rolling movement mode can be transformed into a bouncing mode. Figure 7.3a shows the computerized digitizing of an ‘in situ’ block falling experiment. The analyzed block is made up of an organic-origin limestone rock with a rounded shape. The experiment was carried out by the ‘Istituto di Geologia Applicata. Geofisica & Giacimenti Minerari’ of the Cagliari University in an abandoned limestone quarry. The here reported interpretation of the experiment was carried out at [SMES of Bergamo (Figure 7.3b) TA.2.2 Free falling The free falling movement of a block is conveniently analytically described by a parabola equation if the air friction effect is neglected. The surface impact point of a falling block can be determined in a 2-D field, by the intersection between the parabola which describes the block motion and the polygonal which describes the slope profile. The analytical procedure for rockfall path determination involves the definition of the vertical slope section on which the movement occurs. Since the complete block trajectory might not lic only on the chosen vertical section of the slope, the slope topography may be approximated with a sequence of segments lying on vertical planes which can be rotated with reference to the examined section (Figure 7.4a) Rockfalls, topples and buckles 195 (by) OC a 2 ¢ Figure 7.3. a) Video digizing of a combined rolling-sliding-bouncing movement of a block; +) Diagram of the resulting velocity during movemem The block motion equations can be defined in a coordinate system, as follows: (accelerations) pang X= Yq, Jabra yp, (tocities) (7.2) 196 Rock slope stability analysis parabolic traject of the block schemat ized “topography _rotated block trajectory slope profile \ polygonat fa) “Le true trajectory (b) Figure 7.4, a) Topographic surface of the slope and polygonal representing the segments lying in the vertical planes containing the block trajectory; b) Intersection between the parabola described by the block and the line passing through the segment AB. X= Vg #9 displacements: y= (displacements) Vege? + vot + Agr + vol + ¥y ‘The impact point is determined by the intersection of the above quoted parabola equation with the slope profile polygonal (Figure 7.4b). The impact point is found on the segment AB. The coordinates x and y of the impact point P are determined by solving the following system of equations: K=Xo Fr Yq where vg, and vp, are the components of the initial velocity on the point A in the x and y directions; «vy and yy are the coordinates of point A; x5 and y4 are the cordinates of point B: xp and yp are the coordinates of the free falling black parabola starting from point FR. 7.1.2.3 Bouncing Bouncing isa movement that occurs when the falling block impacts with the slope surface, The block bouncing behaviour is govemed by a coefficient of restitution which expresses the amount of energy dissipation during the impact. The energy dissipations are due to the elasto-plastic behaviour of the ground on which the block impacts, to the elastic wave generation. to the block and/or ground grain destruction ané to the rolling and sliding resistance. Rockfalls, topples and buckles 197 Block falling ‘in situ’ and/or laboratory tests are carried out to determine a restitution coefficient which includes all the energy dissipation phenomena. Tests carried out by varying the impact characteristics can allow one to determine the single energy dissipation phenomenon influence on the coefficient of restitution A number of researchers have used a single coefficient of restitution K 10 predict bouncing and blockfall behaviour. The coefficient of restitution varies in a range between 0 and L and can be defined by different formulas: J. According to the Newton theory of particle collision (Spang & Rautens- trauch, 1988) the coefficient K is defined as: where v, represents the initial particle velocity and v¥ the final velocity after the collision of two particles { and 2. In the case of a block falling to the ground, the coefficient K can be simplified as: K=vly (7.3) where vand « are the block velocities before and after the impact respectively. 2. For free falling tests, Equation 7.3 becomes: K=Nh'lh where fr and ii’ represent the original falling height and the rebound height after the impact respectively. Back analyses. carried out by means of mathematical models in order to reproduce the same behaviour of the block fall experiments, show that a better definition of bouncing rocks is obtained when separate parameters K,, and K, are used for the coefficient of restitution normal and tangential to the slope surface. Richards (1988) provides a useful summary of restitution coefficients exper- imentally obtained by several researchers. The single coefficient of restitution K and the normal K,, and tangential K, coefficients are differentiated on the basis of the characteristics of the ground on which the blocks impact. Tests carried out by ISMES of Bergamo (Italy) in cooperation with the author for research work financially supported by the ENEL CRIS of Milano (Italy) permitted the examination of different features of the bouncing movement (Plate 7.1) 1. Block shape. Bouncing of rounded, prismatic and tabular blocks were com- pared. The three block set shapes were made up of organogenetic limestone. orthogneiss and paragneiss respectively. In the experiments carried out on the limestone blocks, a progressive block trend of becoming more rounded with travel was assessed (Figure 7.5). Rounding may occur in soft rock blocks and is due to block sharp corners breaking off and to 198 Rock slope stability analysis ts Plate 7.1. Rockfall tests are carried out in sites where the danger of falling blocks can involve civil structures and urban settlements, rough block surface smoothing during travelling along the slope. The phenome- non changes the bouncing to a rolling movement with a consequent velocity gradient during travelling (Figure 7.3). Chan et al. (1986) also showed the rounding of boulders travelling down a slope. “Tests carried out on prismatic blocks (almost cubic and parallelepiped shapes) showed that the size and the shape of the block surface in contact with the slope determines the bounce mode and the subsequent block movement When the impact occurs on a block face, the slope ground absorbes the largest part of the impact energy and sliding becomes the principal subsquent move- ment Sliding movement prevails in the block until the movement stops or until a slope surface irregularity induces toppling movements and consequent rolling and bouncing movements (Figure 7.6a). When the impact between a corner block and the ground surface occurs the impact produces the transfer of the translational moment to a rotational moment and bouncing movement prevails over the sliding movement (Figure 7.6b). The assessment of the coefficient of restitution, which takes the cubic or parallelepiped block size into account, leads to large scattered values Rockfails, topples and buckles 199 (al Figure 7.5. Change in Black shape with distance travelled. The initial block shape (3) is changed by comers breaking off (b) and by becoming rounded (c). _free falling vee falling “impact impact sliding bouncing toppling bouncing fa) ib) Figure 7.6, Type of parallelepiped block motion: a) Impaci on a hlock face; b) Impact on a block corner. 200 Rock slope stability anolysis ff Z Y [I SS Figure 7.7. Rolling of a tabular shaped block Tests carried out by inducing the free falling of cubic and parallelepiped rock blocks from a granite face and an horthogneiss quarry face showed that the path lengths of the blocks were largely scattered depending on the block impact modes. In this case the statistical distribution of the coefficients of restitution can be determined and a probabilistic analysis (see Chapter 8) can be carried out by using a lumped mass method and determining the block travel distribution. Observations made on tabular shaped blocks showed that the block trend rises with the maximum area section lying on the vertical section on which the movement occurs (Figure 7.7). In this case the block movement is similar to that of a rolling wheel on a regular slope surface and a bouncing and rolling wheel on an irregular slope surface. When the shape of a tabular block is rounded or becomes rounded because of pact collisions. the restitution coefficients are surprisingly high and the rolling friction angles are also surprisingly low, provoking unexpected lengths in the travelling of the blocks, even for gentle slope inclinations. 2. Block size. The influence of the block size on the bouncing of the block was assessed in the above cited research carried out by ISMES in cooperation with the author by examining different debris slopes. Different sizes of regular blocks were thrown from a rockwall towards differ- ent particle sized debris shapes. Rock to rock impacts and bounces were the prevailing block motion type when the falling block size was lower than the debris average particle size of the slope (Figure 7.82). The block can be stopped when a rebound height is not sufficiently high to allow the block to pass over the local roughness of the slope. Block rolling is the prevailing movement when the falling block size is greater than the average debris panicle size (Figure 7.8). 3. Block strength. Tests carried out in a schistose rock slope showed that an impact height of 8-10 m is sufficient to provoke a block failure along a schistosity plane, Tabular fragments with a rounded shape may be generated following this Rockfalls. topples and buckles 201 ay wy Figure 7.8. Travelling of a block along a debris slope: a) The size of the particles forming the debris is gremer than the size of the black: b) The size of the travelling block i size of the particles forming the debris. realer than the block failure and can attain long travelling distances because of the rolling movement Block breakage has been analysed in the rock fall mode! proposed by Fornara et al. (1990). The energy required to break a block was compared with the energy required to crush the block with a hammer crusher. When the kinetic energy available after the impact reaches the energy produced by the hammer crusher, the block is randomly divided into several fragments and the impact energy is distributed betw'éen the fragments in proportion to the fragment volumes. The point of block breakage on the slope becomes the initial travelling point for the different fragments. The initial direction of the velocity of each fragment is thus randomly orientated selected. 7.1.24 Rolling and sliding The velocity of a block rolling or sliding on a inclined plane can be determined by using Equation 7.1 The principal problem in a rockfall analysis is to determine the conditions for which the rolling or sliding movement occurs following a block impact or a block bounce. When a falling block impacts with the ground, the initial velocities Ven. and Vizey Of the rebound can be computed and the resulting vp9q, Velocity can also be determined in modulus and direction by using the coefficients of restitutions K, and K, (Figure 7.9). Ifa rockfall model considers the volume of the falling block and the center of gravity of the block does not coincide with the block impact point, the impact 202 Rock slope stability analysis waemes’ Figure 7.9, Preand postimpact velocity, Figure 7.10. Schematization of the black impact and of the motion after the impact according to the models of Bozzolo & Pamini (1982) and of Azzoni et al. (1991), process can be examined as governed by the balance laws of linear and angular momentum (Bozzolo & Pamini, 1982; Bozzolo et al., 1988) (Figure 7.10). The matematical formulation set up by Bozzolo & Pamini (1982) for the description of the block impact phencmenon is based on the following assump- tions: — The block behaves as a rigid body with an ellissoidic shape; — The contact between the block and the slope occurs at point P:; — A rotational motion around the contact point P starts immediately after the impact. Point P becomes the rotation center. The impulsive forces prevail over the other existing forces and pass through Rockfalts, topples und buckles 203 point P. Therefore the moment of the active and reactive forces around P is nil. The moment of the motion quantity around P can be conserved in the impact phase. The principle of conservation of the moment of the motion quantity applied in a instantaneous time interval immediately before and after the impact allows one to formulate the following relation: Joy, + ¥,.d.-V,.d,=/0 + V.d,-Vid. Yo + Vad — Vin by Y yx where / is the inertia moment of the ellipse shown in Figure 7.10 around the center of the mass; ®, is the angular velocity before the impact; a) is the angular velocity after the impact; V,. is the x component of the translational velocity before the im- pact: V) is the x component of the translational velocity after the impact; Voy is the y component of the translational velocity before the impact; V, is the y component of the translational velocity after the impact; d, = Xg - Xpid, = Yg— ¥p. In the hypothesis that, after the impact, a rotation movement around P is established, the component of the translational velocity can be obtained as follows: Vi=0d, V,=-0d, Therefore. the expressions for the velocity components can be substituted in the conservation principle relation and the angular velocity can be obtained as: Vind Tede+d2 1a, + V4 The components of the velocity after the impact can be determined by substituting the value obtained for @ in the above reported expressions for the velocity components The total kinetic energy for the mass unit after the impact can therefore be computed from the following expression in which all the other quantities are known +92) The application of this method automatically determines the total kinetic energy toss which can be expressed by means of a coefficient of restitution 1) given by: nee saree’ 2 2K, ° where K and K, represent the total kinetic energy of the mass unit after and before the impact respectively. In Jumped mass models, some assumptions have to be made to determine when achange in a movement mode occurs In the Piteaa & Clayton model (Scavia et al., 1988) the following assumptions far the mavement chanae mode are made (Fiore 7.9): 204 Rock slope stability analysis 30 [ws velocity orot velocity profile ition Figure 7.1), Block path diagram and corresponding energy line and tran- sition between bouncing and rolling mode according to Hungr & Evans (1988). 0 7% 40 60 30 19 «10 1. When vpog, is near to 0, the stopping of the block is assumed at the impact point; 2. When Bis low enough or near 0, the block impact determines the transition condition between the bouncing and rolling movement. Hungr & Evans (1988) suggested the following procedure in order to deter- mine the transition condition between the bouncing and rolling mode. Doring the flight. the block has a constant energy ‘head’ (Figure 7.11) equal to: + V2/2g 7.4) where zis the block elevation and Vis the modulus of the resultant block velocity. After the impact, the resulting incremental loss of energy is determined as: v 2g (75) where Bis the angle of incidence prior to the impact. An ‘energy line’ can be determined by plotting the relationship of Equation 7.4 for the block bouncing phase (Figure 7.1 1). The resultant diagram appears as a series of steps separated by horizontal lines, the length of which equals the trajectory length between two rebounds, Al. When the ratio AE/AI is Jess than the tangent of the slope angle, the black accelerates continuously, when SE/Al becomes greater than G, the block dece- lerates and the distance between two successive rebounds becomes shorter, In the Hungr & Evans mocel, the transition into ralling mode is determined when the ratio AE/AI becomes greater than the rolling friction coefficient, i.e. the Rockfalls, topples and buckles 205 rolling movement mode becomes more efficient than the bouncing mode. The distinction between the rolling and sliding movement mode is difficult even when observing a block travelling, since a combination of the two move- ments can occur. Sliding is significant when a block starts to move or comes to rest, but also occurs after impact. When energetically possible, stiding changes into rolling. The transition from sliding to rolling has been defined in the Bozzolo, Pamini & Hutter model as: Egg > mg dh (7.6) which expresses the condition for which the block kinetic energy is greater than the energy required to lift the center of gravity of the block. The introduction of this condition into the rockfall model requires the block volume to be taken into account. Alternatively, in a lumped mass model use, rolling and sliding friction angles can be assigned and the most efficient movement mode can be assumed. 7.1.2.5 Rockfall modelling parameters Numerical or analytical rockfall modelling requires the determination of the geometrical and physical characteristics of the falling block and of the slope ‘The principal geometrical features refer to the slope topography, the block size and the shape. These characteristics are easily gathered ‘The principal physical characteristics are the initial free falling block velocity. the coefficients of restitution of the slope surface and the sliding and rolling friction coefficients. The initial free falling block velocity can be determined (Section 7.1.2.1) if the instability movement determining the block detachment and the biock movement prior to falling are known. In this situation, the initial free falling velocity can be computed by using the dynamic equilibrium Equation 7.1. It should be pointed out that the most common initial velocity data. obtained from scientific literature, varies in the { m/s to 3 m/s range. The most reliable way of determining the coefficients of restitution is through experimental observations (Plate 7.2). The input data of the used rockfail mode} can be calibrated by means of back-analysis of the in situ observations. Different coefficients of restitution experimentally obtained on different types of bedding rock, debris and soil slopes have been gathered. Table 7.1 shows some orientating values of coefficients of restitutions (Barbieri et a}., 1988) gathered for different materials. Figure 7.]2 shows the diagrams of block velocity prior to the impact versus the block velocity after impact for different movement modes and for different slope and block mechanical and geometrical features. The characteristic slope coeffi- cients of restitution and rolling friction coefficients can be obtained from these experimental diagrams. 206 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 7.2, Above: Rockiall tests on an abandoned quarry face. Below: A re-planied excavated slope. Rockfalls, topples and buckles 207 Outeropping material Normal coefficient Tangential coefficient of restitution of restitution Bedrock 0s 0.95 Bedrock covered by large blocks 0.35 0.85 Debris formed by uniform distribuied 0.30 0.70 elements Soil covered by vegetation 0.25 0.55 eunetng 7 | roi: et oot Figure 7,12. Pre and post impact block velocity: a) Tangential velocities. 208 Rock slope stability analysis (m/s) bounc ing v npre yy + LY / rolling Figure 7.12 (continued). b) Nor mal velocities for different obser- y vations of rockfalls and different post (m/s) sites. 7.2 TOPPLING 7.2.1 Toppling mechanisms Goodman & Bray (1976) have described the different toppling instability mecha- nisms which are here reported. 7.21.1 Fexural toppling An example of Rexural toppling is shown in Figure 7.13. A discontinuity system, subvertically orientated and plunging towards the slope, determines semi- continuous rock columns. These columns, when loaded in the upper part by forward thrusts or when the weight force falls outside the base tend to bend forward and to break in flexure. Failure mechanism can be induced by toe erosion, sliding or undermining. The phenomenon is regressive and occurs with a tension crack deepening. The lower part of the slope is covered with disorientated and disordered blocks which make the reconnaisance of the instability phenomenon cause difficult The outward movement of each cantilever column can occur with interlayer sliding thereby changing the original upper part of the slope (Figure 7.14) 7.2.1.2 Block toppling Block toppling failure mechanism is shown in Figure 7.15, Failure occurs when single rock columns are divided by widely spaced cross joints. Rockfalls, topples and buckles 209 Figure 7.13. Flexvral toppling example Merete (after Goodman & Bray, 1976). Figure 7.14, Flexural toppling with a sliding movement between (he faces of the toppling columns (afier Hoek & Bray, 1981). Figure 7.15. Block toppling example (afier Goodman & Bray, 1976) Short colunins in the toe zone receive the thrust of the longer overleaning behind columns and a sliding movement is induced at the slope foot. Sliding movement sets the toppling of the behind column free to develop higher up the slope. 7.2.1.3 Block-flexure toppling Block-flexure toppling is shown in Figure 7.16. Failure mechanisms are charac- 210 Rock slope stability analysis terized by pseudo-continuous flexure along columns which are divided by numerous cross joints. The toppling of the columns is determined by the block displacement accurnu- lation on the sub-horizontal joints, rather than the block-flexural failure mechan- ism. Because of several small movements, there are fewer tension cracks than in flexural toppling and fewer edge-to-face contacts and voids than in block toppling (Plate 7.3) Figure 7.16. Block flexural toppling example (afier Goodman & Bray: 1976). =] flexural toppling on an excavated rock wall in Villa Simius, Sardi- Roetfalls, topples and buckles 211 7.2.1.4 Secondary toppling modes Figure 7.17 shows the examples of some potential secondary toppling failure mechanisins described by Goodman & Bray (1976). These instability phenomena are induced by a toe weakening caused by natural events such as erosion or human activity such as mining or civil excavation works. In the described cases, the principal instability mode is the sliding and the slumping of some parts of the slope while the toppling of some free rock blocks is induced as a consequence of the principal movement (Plate 7.4) The examples reported in Figure 7.17 refer to: |, Slide head toppling (Figure 7.174). The example shows a layered rock slope with a cross joint system which isolates thin and high rock blocks. Toe erosion or excavation work induces a sliding movement in the upper layer. In the upper part of the slope. the rock blocks which are not involved in the sliding movement topples into the new void at the slide head. 2. Slide base toppling (Figure 7.1 7b). The example shows a soil slope lying on a steeply dipping layered rock mass. Regressive rotational sliding and slumping movements induce a shear force along the top of the rock mass able 10 provoke flexural toppling of the sub-verticat rock layer. 3. Slide roe toppling (Figure 7.1 7c). The example shows a rock slope made up of different ical formations. Two mechanisms can be noted: The upper geological formation is layered and a layer sliding phenonienon is in progress. The lower formation is like a blocky system and the thrust of the upper layers induces block toppling movement in the lower mass. 4. Tension crack toppling (Figure 7.174). The example shows toppling tension cracks ina several meters high stream bank. The tension cracks are generated above steep slopes and may free potential blocks. This phenomenon can arise in soft rocks. such as those quoted by Goodman & Bray (1976): Chalk, voleanic rocks or in stiff clay and damp sands 5. Toppling und slumping (Figure 7.17e). The example shows a rock slab | on a soil deposit. The rock formation is made up of long columns separated by a steeply dipping discontinuity. An instability phenomenon in the soil deposit. caused by rotational sliding, may induce weathering of the rock slab toe with a consequent crack propagation of the non-perfect persistent pre-existing rock discontinuities. The rock columns are completely free to move independently and are weathered at the toe. The toppling movement in the rock slab can also be induced by tensile stresses 212 Rock slope stability analysis fa) {b) Figure 7.17. Secondary toppling modes suggested by Goodman & Bray: a) Slide he: (oppling: b) Slide base toppling: c) Slide toe toppling; d) Tension erack toppling: e) Toppli and slumping determined by the large difference in deformation characteristics between the rock and soil deposits. Tensile stresses in the rock determine crack propagation of the existing rock structural defects. Water pressures in the opened cracks, caused by rainfall, may be sufficient 10 provoke the free column toppling Rockfalls, topples and buckles 213 orig Plate 7.4. Examples of secondary toppling induced by landslide in a lower stiff formation or by the contrast in deformation between rigid and deformable materials: The Temple Valley of Agrigenium, Sicily Italy, The Agrigentum temples were built on a calcarenitic plateau 'y plunging northwards. The plateau lies on a lower stiff blue clay formation. Contrast in deformation between calcurenitic rocks and clays determines tensile stresses in the stiffer geological formation with lateral spead and toppling of blocks. 214 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 7.4 (continued). The ancient town of Orvieto, Umbria. aly. Orvieto rises on the top of a hill formed by a tol skib delimited by a cliff about 60 m high which fies over a gentler clay slope. The clay slope is affected by landslides which extend to the superficial satened portion of the original stiff elay. The instability conditions of the rock slab are closely related 10 the imeraction between tuff and clays. As a consequence of the clay movements and of the contrast in deformation between tuff and clay. tensile stresses are induced in the rocks determining openings of pre-existing sub vertical failures in the cliff with column toppling rock Rockfalls, topples and buckles 215 Plate 7.4 (continved). The ancient town of Civita of Bagnoregio, Lazio, Waly. Civita of Bognoregio was built on the top of a hill made of pyroclastic soils superimposed on over-consolidated pliocene clays. The erosive and deterioration process in the clays causes progressive toppling of the pyroclastic soil above. 7.2.2 Single block toppling limit equilibrium The toppling analysis ofa single black has been discussed in Chapter 2. The stable condition and the motion incipience condition of a rock block can be determined by using statical equilibrium equations. The block motion analysis must be studied by using the dynamic equilibrium equation. The toppling analysis reported in Chapter 2 refers to a completely isolated block. The analysis of the potential block movements, which are removable according to the block theory, from a free slope surface and have the kinematic possibility of rotating and/or sliding, has been carried out by Mauldon & Goodman (1990). The analysis of the rotational kinematisms of blocks in a rock mass has been presented, by Mauldon & Goodman, in graphic terms, on a stereographic projec tion, The graphical method used the notations developed by the Goodman & Shi (1985) block theory which is discussed in Chapter 8. ‘The equilibrium conditions of a three joint rock pyramid bounded by a planar free surface is analyzed with reference to the case of Figure 7.18a-c. In this example, proposed by Mauldon & Goodman (1990), the tetrahedron 216 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 7.18. Edge rotations of a tetrahedron with 1 free face (after Mauldon & Goodman, 1990). ABCD (Figure 7.18a) has the free face ABC. The rotation about the line BC is examined. The median plane BCE, determined by the intersection between the line BC and point E which bisects the AD edge, is constructed. The fk edge is the rotation axis and m is the median plane through fk (Figure 7.18b). If the active force G is directed imto a the block can rotate or slide. If G is directed into b the block cannot rotate, but it may slide. A section drawn through the tetrahedron ABCD containing the edge AD is given in Figure 7. 18c. B’ is any point on the line BC. The median plane (the plane for which /, = /,) is given by the following geometrical relation: cot, = 2cot a+cot B where ot), cand B are all <7. The case of rock blocks delimited by 4 joints and 2 free surfaces, as in the example of Figure 7.19, is examined. The blocks ABCDFGHE are laterally Rockfalls, topples and buckles 217 Figure 7.19. Edge rotation condition of a rock block hounded by four joints and two free surfaces: a) Rotation around CG is not permitted; b) Rotation around CG is permitted when the resvitant G of the active force Falls in the empty space. Figure 7.20, Potential mnovement of the rock of Figure 7, 19%: 2} Initial condition (only sliding novement is possible); b) Sliding and toppling are (b) possible. delimited by the planes ABCD and FEHG which are respectively paraile] and perpendicular to the free surface AFGC. Figure 7.19a also shows the vertical section of the block through the ABCD plane; Figure 7.19b also shows the vertical section of the block of the same figure through the ABCD plane. The CG edge rotation conditions are examined. The CG edge block can rotate when: — The resultant G of the active force falls outside the CD line (in the empty space); 218 Rock slope stability analysis — The angle between the CDHG and the BEND planes is greater than 90°. In the case of the block of Figure 7.19a a rotation movement around the line CG is not possible since the rock mass behind the BDHE plane prevents the uplift of the BDHE face. In the case of the block of Figure 7.19b the rotation movement around the line CG is permitted by the rock mass at the back. The rotation of the block of Figure 7.19a may only occur when a sliding movement is large enough to set the block of the rock mass at the back free (Figure 7.20). 7.2.3 A block system toppling analysis 7.2.3.1. Limit equilibrium analysis A procedure for the toppling and sliding analysis of a regular system of blocks has been proposed by Goodman & Bray (1976) (Figure 7.21). The purpose of the analysis is to assess the limit equilibrium condition of the overall blocky system and to determine external forces, such as a cable force, required to stabilize the slope made up by the blocky system The procedure considers the equilibrium of the forces of each block starting from the uppermost block and determining the interaction force with the adjacent block down to the slope toe. When the lower force obtained on the toe block is positive (downward directed) the slope is unstable, when it is zero, the limiting equilibrium condition is reached. Figure 7.22 shows the forces acting on a single block and the limiting equilibrium conditions for the toppling and sliding of a single block. Since the geometry of the blocky system and the friction angle of the block sides and bases are known (or assumed to be known) the equilibrium of each Figure 7.21. Goodman & Bray model for limiting equilibrium analysis of toppling on a stepped base Rockfalls, topples and buckles 219 ba W, (lan 6- cos a~ sina) Y= tant Figure 7.22. Limiting equilibrivm condition of the nth block: a) Forces acting on the nth block; b) Toppling of the mth black: c) Sliding of the mih block. block can be solved by establishing if the toppling or the sliding mode is critical. The method is suitable for only particular geometries of the blocky system, which consider the system rigid and use the stalical equilibrium equations 7.2.3.2 Numerical methods Numerical methods can be applied in rock slope analysis to model the various mechanisms of primary and secondary toppling failures. The limit equilibrium method is based on restrictive hypothesis of the rock slope behaviour that can be overcome using appropriate numerical methods. The limit equilibrium method considers only potentially unstable masses and failure surfaces and solves only the equilibrium of forces. Joint stiffness, rock block eiasticity, cracking propagation and progressive slope Failure are not taken into account. Furthermore, the limit equilibrium method does not consider the influence of the stress state evolution on the equilibrium conditions of the potentially unstable examined masses The numerical methods that are currently used to model the above quoted phenomena, which play on important role in primary and secondary toppling, are: the finite clement method (FEM), the distinct element method (DEM) and the boundary element method (BEM) 220. Rock slope stability analysis (b) Figure 7.23. Rock slab lying on a soil deposit: a) Real geometrical situation; b) Schematized FEM mesh. The finite element method application in slope analysis allows one to model (Figure 7.23): = The history of the stress state in the modelling area (it is possible to carry out the simulation of constructions and excavations); - The different deformation behaviour of rock and soil formations; — The constitutive laws of the geological media (it is possible to consider the elasto-plasticity or the creeping of the materials); = The principat fault and the joints. ‘The principal limitation of the FEM application to slope stability problems carried out up to now are: ~ Only small deformation fields have been considered; ~ The discontinuities are considered as completely persistent and crack propa- gation phenomena are not simulated; = The slope stability problems are examined in static fields and only the incipience of toppling movement or shearing movement have been assessed by examining tension and shear zones in the modelized area The finite element method has been used for investigating the toppling failure by several authors. Kalkani & Piteau (1976) examined the stress states induced by the water table uplift in an elastic field using a 2-D FEM model. PEM analyses were carried out to investigate the toppling failure at Hell's Gate Bluffs in Canada. The toppling instability phenomena were predicted on the basis of the extention of the tensile stress zones. . - ye Brown et al. (1980) used FEM to study the Nevis Bluff rock slope failure in Rockfalls, topples and buckles 221 New Zealand. The study involved the back analysis of a failed slope and joint elements were introduced into the FEM model for flexural toppling analysis. Evans et al. (1981) used the finite element method to model rock slope mechanical behaviour in the Grose Valley in New South Wales. FEM analyses were carried out (0 investigate the mechanism of secondary toppling failure in the examined sock slope. The FEM model set up for the analysis included joint elements, whilst geological phenomena such as rock weathering and rock creep behaviour were taken into account. The distinct element method application in slope analysis allows one to model (Figure 7.24): — The rock mass as a system of blocks (see Chapter 9); — The different phases of the slope formation; — The rock block movements; — The interactive behaviour of a discontinuous medium with a continuous medium when the DEM method is coupled with the boundary element method (BEM) or with the finite difference method. The principal limitations of DEM application to slope stability problems carried out up to now are: — The rock slopes are modelled as a system of blocks. The block contacts are perfectly persistent; ~ Cracking propagation phenomena in the rock are not predicted. On joints \ L, 4 | | | 4 / raat \ I a shear () (b) Failure Figure 7.24. a) Fissured rock slope; b) DEM model of the slope. 222 Rock slope stability analysis The distinct element method has been used to investigate the toppling failure by several authors such as: Cundall et al. (1975), Hocking (1978), Voegele (1978), Ishida et al. (1987). Boundary element methods can be applied to the study of crack propagation problems in rock slopes. Fracture mechanics concepts have been transferred to the rock slope stability problems to analyze the mechanical behaviour of non completely persistent joints. Scavia (1990 a, b) developed a numerical procedure to determine the stress concentration in discontinuity tips to evaluate failure propagation conditions, starting from the fracture tip. The procedure is based on the discontinuity displacement method (DDM) principle application (Crouch & Starfield, 1983). DDM isa particular application of the indirect boundary element method. The standard displacement discontinuity method has been modified by Scavia, as far as the low slope stress states are concerned, in order to introduce some special displacement discontinuity elements. The discontinuity initiation of pro- pagation is thus detected by taking the joint closure-opening behaviour and the joint dilatant and frictional behaviour into account. 7.3 ROCK BUCKLING Buckling modes of slope failure are possible when the rock discontinuities are approximately parallel to the slope face in such a way as to separate thin slabs from the rock mass. Buckling phenomena are typical in sedimentary layered rocks. Bedding planes may separate slabs and flexural buckling can be induced by extemai forces such as water pressures, stress concentration in the slab plane or the slab weight, especially in the case in which the slab is concavely curved upwards Several authors have proposed methods to analyse rock slope buckling: Corbin (1978), Goodman (1976), Johnson (1970), Kutter (1974) and Nilsen (1987). The following sections report analytical formulations for rock buckling analysis developed by Cavers (1981). The analysed buckling modes of slope failure are: Flexural buckling of plane slabs, three hinge buckling of plane slabs, and three hinge buckling of curve slabs. 7.3.1 Flexural buckling of plane slabs The flexural buckling of a plane slab is a failure mechanism which is only of theoretical importance since it is seldom ‘in situ’ surveyed. The failure mechan- ism analysis may be used to determine an upper limit of possible slope heights. Rockfalls, topples and buckles 223 The classical buckling theory (the Euler method) is applied, making the following assumptions: 1. The slab is schematized as a rectangular base column made up of a material which works in an elastic field according to the Hooke law, 2. The slope of the deflection curve is approximated by a linear function; 3. The column is weightless; 4, The column axis is perfectly straight. ‘The flexural buckling critical load per unit width evaluates as: KreEl b bIR (7.7) where Eis the intact rock elastic moduls; [is the inertia moment (I= bd/ 12); dis the slab thickness and K is a constant describing the slab end conditions (K = | for pinned ends). ‘The application of Equation 7.7 to a slope requires the determination of the ratio between the length of the slab subjected lo buckiing (/,) and the total slope length (Figure 7.25). Base friction model tests (Cavers, 1981) gave results for /,// values varying in the range 0.46-0.36 (upper and lower solution) The driving force Py (Figure 7.25) is expressed as: Po = (Wp Sin Wp cos tan 6,~ Ipc) b (78) where 6; and ¢ are the friction angle and the cohesion on the discontinuity plane which separates the slab, respectively. In the cautious hypothesis of /,//=0.5 and for K = 1, as in the case of rock slab containing cross joints perpendicular 10 Figure 7.25. Simplified model for the flexural stability analysis of a continuous slab (after Cavers, 1981). 224 Rock slope stability analysis bedding, one obtains: Py/b=0.75 hd (ysin a- ycos tan 6; c/d) (1.9) where yis the rock slab unit weight The critical slope length is obtained by equating Equation 7.9 to Equation 7.7 and by substituting 0.5 for /,: ; weed 2.25 (ysin a ycos a tan 6; ~ c/d) (7.10) 7.3.2 Three hinge beam models for plane slopes ‘The assumptions which are made in order to analyze the failure model shown in Figure 7.26 are: 1. The slope has a plane face and the discontinuity separating the slab is parallel to the slope; 2. The footwall slab is cut by three parallel joints (hinge points), perpendicular - to the slab plane; 3. The rock blocks, delimited by the discontinuity and by the cross joints, are rigid; 4. Water forces acting parallel to the slope are neglected; 5. The slab is free laterally and on the crest: 6. The slope is analyzed in the incipient failure condition and contact forces between the blocks and underlying slope are assumed to be zero (a) (b) (c) Figure 7.26. Three hinge beam model for a plane model: 1) Initial slope geometry: b) Slope geomeity during the deformation; c) Single elemenis and applied forces (after Cavers, 1981). Rockfalls. topples and buckles 225 The failure mode which is examined by the model can only be due to a lateral force acting perpendicularly to the slab plane. This is the case of the water forces Uy and Uyas shown in Figure 7.26. The system of blocks is stable until the middle hinge point B moves outside the line connecting the upper and ower hing points A and C. respectively. Since the blocks are assumed to be rigid, the system of blocks can move only when the upper slab yields and provides space as the blocks rotate. The stability increases, if no failure occurs through the intact block, with the slope height increase since the restraining forces acting on the blocks increase with the slope height. The limiting equilibrium condition of the system can’ be determined by examining the force and moment equilibrium of the two blocks For block 1, one obtains: Force equilibrium in the X axis direction: P,+W,sina-P, =0 (11) Force equilibrium in the ¥ axis direction: -W, cosa-U, +Q,~Q,=0 (7.12) Moment equilibrium about A: U,X, + Qi, +d/2W, sina-l,/2W, cosa-Pyd=0 (7.13) For block 2 one obtains: Force equilibrium in the X direction: P,+W, sina—P,=0 (7.14) Force equilibrium in the ¥ direction: U,-Q-Q;-W, cos =0 7.15) Moment equilibrium about C: W, d/2 sin a+ ly/2 Wy cos 1 U,Xy + Pad + Oy! =0 (7.16) By symmetry one obtains: Py =P, 17) Q,=2> (7.18) There are therefore six equations and six unknowns and the system is deter: mined. The solution of the system of equations requires the following conditions for slope stability: Py >P,—(W, +5) sina (7.19a) 226 Rock slope stability analysis P. +a (W,(d/2 sin o —1,/2 cos &) + U5X,)} , (7.196) apg Mlelsina 1)/2.c0s 0) + U,X, + Wad sin at] P)= PW, sina. (7180) O,=U,+0,-W, cos. (1.194) where: 0, = Willy/2e0s a= d/2 sin a ~ ct) UX, + 4(P;—W,sin @) (7.39) 1 and -Q,-W, cosa (7-196) 7.3.3 Three hinge buckling of curved slopes The three hinge buckling geometrical model for a curved slope is shown in Figure 7.27. The assumptions for a curved slope are shown in Figure 7.27. The assump- tions for acurved slope are similar to those for the plane slope case. (a) (b) Figure 7.27. Three hinge buckling of a curved slope: a) Instability mechunism: b) Forces applied 0 the single elements (after Cavers, 1981). Rockfalls, topples and buckles 227 The force and moment equilibrium for the two blocks results in the following six equations: Block | Equilibrium in the X direction: = P,cos 8, —Q,sin ®, +P, + Wysina—D, cos (Bp, +0) (7.20) +U,cos (By, +a) =0 Equilibrium in the Y direction; P sin 6, - Qcos 8, - Q,-W,cos &-D sin (Bp, + &) an + U,sin (By, +0) =0 Moment equilibrium about B: PX pant OX oan t VW Xun + DiXp,9- Ui Xyyp =0 (7.22) Block 2: Equilibrium in the X direction: P.c0s 8, + Qy sin 8, ~P cos (8, +83) — Oy sin (9, + 8.) + Wy since ~D, 005 (Bp, + ot) + Uz cos (By, + ot) =0 (7.23) Equilibrium in the Y direction: ~Pysin 8, +Q, cos 6, + Py sin (8, + 83) —Q, cos (8, + 8;) — W,cos 0. D,sin(Bp, + &) + Uy sin (By, + 0) =0 (7.224) Moment equilibrium about B: Ps Xp.g~ Os Xoyg— Ws Xvg D2 Xivyn + U2 Xyyg = 0 (7.25) by symmetry one obtains: P\=P, (7.26) Q,=0) (721) The six equation system obtained from Equations 7.20-7.27 can be expressed in matrix form: [A] [F] = [8] where: (FY = (Pi, Oy, Pas Ops Px 25) 228 Rock slope stability analysis -cos8, -sin®, = 0 0 0 sind, cose, 0 =I 0 0 A 0 0 ~Xpsgp Xoas 0 0 cos@, sin@, 0 Cos (8, +8) -sin (8, + 8) -sin@, cos®, 0 0 — sin(®, +6) -cos(8, + 4,) 0 Q 0 0 Xpye ~Xoue -W, sin &+ D, cos (Bp, + 4) - U, cos (By, +) W, cos + D, sin (Bp, +) — U; sin (By, + &) WiXy,a-DiXp0 + UiXuye -W, sina +D, cos (Bp, +) — U, cos (By, +) W, cos & + D, sin (Bp, +0) —U, sin (By, + a) W Xp + D2X0.0~ Us Xue A further slab failure mode can also occur, due to shear stress on the contact planes between the blocks, both in the plane or in the curve slope case. The shear failure mode can only occur for low shear strengths on the failure planes. CHAPTER 8 Sliding phenomena analysis 8.1 SLIDING INSTABILITY TYPES Rock slides may be subdivided, according to the number of block units involved in the movements, into slides of a single or of a few units and slides of many units. In the first case, limit equilibrium methods which examine static equilibrium equations, are considered. In the second case, methods which examine the dynamic equilibrium equations are used according to the importance of relative displacements between the different block units involved in the phenomenon. In this chapter, limit equilibrium methods are developed for the stability analysis of a single or of a few blocks. The rock block geometrical schematization models can be simplified or rigorous. In the first case, some simplified assump- tions on the geometry of the sliding blocks, have been made. In the second case, the geometry of a sliding block and the kinematic controls are rigorously examined. 8.2 SIMPLIFIED METHODS Rock sliding phenomena may be divided, for limiting equilibrium analysis purposes, into: Plane sliding, and sliding on a two plane intersection line. These two sliding mechanisms may be further subdivided into the four types here described (Cravero & Giani, 1988). L. Plane sliding. The plane sliding phenomenon occurs in natural slopes or in slope excavations and in stratified or jointed rock masses where beddings or joint sets have an average dip direction similar to the slope face dip direction. Plane failure which determines rock sliding may occur on: — Asingle plane (Figure 8.1a); — A single plane terminating behind or before the slope crest and against a subvertical tension crack (Figure 8.16); nan 230 Rock slope stability analysis insta tension crack: c) A stepped surf 2 2) A polygonal shaped surface: €) The intersection line of two slid 1g planes: f) The inlersection of wo sliding planes terminating against a tension crack: ¢) The intersection of two stepped sliding surfaces: h) A polygonal line intersection of several sliding surface. — A stepped sliding surface determined by the intersections of planes of two discontinuity sets (Figure 8.1c); — A poligonally shaped surface formed by the intersections of planes belong- ing to the same discontinuity set (Figure 8.1d). 2. Sliding on the intersection line of two planes. Sliding on the intersection line of two planes occurs when two surfaces (plane, stepped or polygonal) intersect on a Jine which has a dip direction coming out of the slope face. This second sliding type failure surface may be made up of: — Two sliding planes which intercept slope faces or excavation walls (Figure 8.1e); = Twa sliding planes which intercept slope faces or excavation wails and a tension crack (Figure 8.10) Sliding surfaces may also be: — Stepped (Figure 8.1g) or — Made up of a few block bases intercepting on a common line and in reciprocal contact by means of subvertical failures (Figure 8. 1h). Sliding phenomena analysis 231 Instability occurs in all these cases and independently of the shape of the rock block or wedge, if rotations are not possible, for block detachment from the resting surfaces or for sliding on a surface or on a two plane intersection line. 8.2.1 Plane sliding 8.2.1.1 Single plane ‘The problem is defined by the slope geometry (area A of the sliding plane and its inclination «) and by the sliding rock mass weight W (Figure 8.2). ‘The effect of an extemal force R with the same dip direction of the slope and dipping at B angle, with reference to the horizontal, is also examined. This force may be considered the resulting force of more than one pre-stressed bolt or cable. The force R on the sliding plane is divided into two components, one normallo the sliding plane, the other tangent. The equilibrium equation for the translation in the normal and tangential directions to the sliding plane may be expressed as: N=Rsin (c+ B) + Wcos a S=W sin a -R cos (ct+B) The maximum shear resistance available along the sliding plane is written using the Coulomb criterion: Swain = (N= U) tang tea where U represents the uplift force due to hydraulic internal pressure, which is absent in the present scheme of a drained slope. When using the Barton criterion, and when knowning the normat stress acting on the sliding plane, apparent values of cohesion and friction angle may be used. Figure 8.2. Rock sliding on asingle plane problem varigbles. 232 Rock slope stability analysis The safety factor may be therefore expressed as: S, max _[Weoos@+R sin(a+B)}tang+cA Is] W sin aR cos (a +8) Equation. | of the safety factor can be used only if contact between the examined rock block and sliding plane exists. This condition, which excludes the possibility of rock block uplift, is controlled in the case of an acting uplift water force U. by the sign of the effective normal reaction to the sliding plane as: N-U>0O (8.1) 8.2.1.2 Plane sliding with tension crack The statical scheme of the problem is reported in Figure 8.3. In this situation the sliding plane area A and the weight W of the sliding mass are lower than those of the previous scheme. The depth : of the tension crack and the force U and V. due to water pressure, are introduced. The safety factor, corresponding 1o the examined statical scheme, is: pal cos— U~Vsin a + R sin (+ B)}tan o +cA - W sin aR cos (+B) + V cos a where V='4 y,,2? and U = %y,.2(H - 2) cosee a. The equation reported for the safety factor refers io a water pressure situation in which the water flow (Section 5.8) occurs only through principal discontinuities (or particularly opened joints or beddings) during intense rainfalls. The equation also includes the stabilizing force effects: these forces are usually introduced into Figure 8.3. Rock sliding on a single plane bounded by tension crack problem vari- ables in the presence of water pressures, Sliding phenomena analysis 233 the slope stability analysis proportional to the forces applied to pre-stressed rock anchorages. In the case of passive bolting (see Chapter 10) such as the grouted bar, the elements of the stabilizing system may be able to support tension or shear stresses. 8.2.1.3 Stepped sliding swface The 2-D type sliding situation on a stepped surface can be examined when two discontinvity sets are exposed on the rock mass with the following orientation feaiures. Both the discontinuity sets have a dip direction similar to the rock excavation face or natural slope face dip direction, but the first set has an average dip lower than the slope face, and the second is subvertical. The statical scheme is reported in Figure 8.4, ‘The necessary geometrical characteristics of the slope, in order to carry out a stability analysis, are: the slope height, the effective area of the sliding surface A, the mean failure surface A’, the inclination of the slope face , the average inclination angle of the first joint set @,, the average inclination angle of the second joint set 6, and the average inclination angle of the stepped surface ar Equation 8.1 may still be utilized for the safety factor calculation once the effective area of the sliding surface and the sliding mass weight are determined for the examined geometry problem The effective area A can be expressed as. tan (a-8,) ] tan (6, -8,) A=A’ cos (c1~ 8) ['- and weight Was: sin (B- a) 2sinB where Yp is the unit weight of the rock. WayQHA’ Figure 8.4, Rock sliding ona stepped effective surface A surface problem variables. 234 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 8.5. Comparison between the safety factors of a rock sliding on a stepped surface and of a rock sliding ona single plane; W’='Ay,H?; W= YoyghP?N3; A’=2N3/3 H: A= 2H: cA tang cA+Wocoscttand W sin or “Wein at tan ot F (on the stepped surface): cA tang _8¥3e_ tang + W'sina tana 3yH tana F (on the singte plane): cA tang 8¥3c tang + ane Wsina tna AH ana No tensile strength is assumed on the segments of the subvertical planes of the second discontinuity set by applying Equation 8.1 for the safety factor calcula- tion. This cautious hypothesis was suggested by Kovari & Fritz (1984). Jennings (1970) instead first dealt with this problem mathematically and proposed consid- ering a tensile strength along the second joint set where separation occurs. The hypothesis of Kovari & Fritz is justified by the fact that shear and tensile strengths are mobilized at quite different deformation values. The analytical formulation of this problem was developed by Kovari & Fritz. Kovari & Fritz (1984) also gave an analytical formulation for the stability problems discussed in Sections 8.2.1.4 and §.2.2.}-8.2.2.4, Figure 8.5 reports a comparison of stability analysis of shear failure along a single plane and along a stepped surface. The scheme and the formulation reported in the figure margin refer to a drained situation and both to an equal sliding plane inclination angle and to an average sliding surface situation. One can immediately notice that the two safety factors are the same in the case of zero cohesion. In the non-zero cohesion case the reduction quantities of the cohesion mobilized area and rock sliding volume are the same (V3), and the two safety factors are again the same. The two safety factors may be different if non-linear shear strength criterion or hydraulic pressures are considered. Avail- able shear strength is different for different normal stress acting on the sliding Sliding phenomena analysis 235 surface and different water pressure distributions may occur if water flows along one single discontinuity or a stepped shape discontinuity. 8.2.1.4 Polygonal sliding surface In the polygonal sliding surface case, shear failure occurs along discontinuity planes belonging (o a system with an average direction similar to that of the slope face. The sliding surface is therefore composed of several plane segments which make up a curvilinear shape. A sliding blocky system is detached from the rock mass by a sliding plane which intercepts the upper slope face on a line parallel to the slope crest. The system of blocks rests on the stable part of the rock slope in different n inclined planes down to the interception of the slope face on a tine parallel to the slope face strike. The model therefore involves the 7 sliding plane and n — | subvertical contact joints between the blocks which make up the sliding mass (Figure 8.1d). In the slope stability model definition, the sliding and the subvertical plane inclination contact may be determined on the basis of the geostructural survey. In a heavily jointed rock mass, the shape of the sliding polygonal surface may be obtained by imposing the condition of a minimum factor of safety for the system. The Sarma (1973) method of analysis is here described. This method was applied by Hoek (1983) in order to solve this stability problem by using, for shear strength determination, the Hoek & Brown non-linear strength criterion. The analytical formulation here developed refers to the Hoek implementation of the Sarma method. The geometry of the ith block and the forces acting on a single block are reported in Figure 8.6 Figure 8.6. Geometry of the ith block and forces acting on the block as in the Sarma method for stability analysis (aller Hoek, 1983). 236. Rock slope stabiliry analysis The geometry of the sliding mass is defined by the comer coordinates of the blocks. The phreatic surface is defined by the coordinates of its intersections with the block sides, A closed form solution is then used to calculate the critical horizontal acceleration K, required to induce a limiting state of equilibrium in the slope. The static safety factor of the slope is then found by reducing the values tan $ and ¢ to tan 6/F and c/F until K,=0. In order to determine whether the result of the analysis is acceptable, a final check is carried out to assess whether all the effective normal stresses acting across the bases and sides of the blocks are positive. If negative stresses are found, the block geometry must be varied until these negative stresses are eliminated. An additional check on the moment equilibrium is also recommended for critical slopes By examing the equations of the ith block and assuming that ZW,, 6, and d, are available from the previous block, the following equations can be written: 454) = (KT), )- XB; + OT; - YB PY? 8.2) 8,., = aresin (XT; ,)-X8;.)/di41] (8.3) b= XB,, ;—XB; : a; =arctan [(¥B,, ,-¥B,)/b)] (8.4) W, = Ye (VB; — YT; ,)(XT, ~XB;,,)+ (YT; - YB, , \(XT;, ,-XB)) (8.5) ZW, = (YW. - YB; 43) (8.6) The water forces can be calculated as follows: U,= Ay, (ZW, + ZW, ,1)b;- see (8.7) PW, = By, ZW? sec 8; (8.8) PW; 4 1 = AY ZW; \?8e08;4 where yp and y,, are the unit weights of rock and water respectively. The critical acceleration K, can be calculated as follows: an F Frat En F nnd On Cnet * + + + DE nEnet E302 K, 6.9) Pat Pnrln* Prin Onna * -- Pren€nss 202 where: a, = OW; Sin», - O:)R; COS bp, + S41 SiN (Op, ~ 0 ~ 8; 41) —S;sin (0,,- 4-8) (8.10) P; = Q; W; cos (bg,~ 0.) (8.11) @; = Qillcos (bp, — O% + 5,-5)) secs, (8.12) Q)= 500 (y,~ 0, + $5,,,- 8,41) €080s,,, 13) Sliding phenomena analysis 237 (8.14) Sins = s,., ter PWia 112 ds.) (8.15) R= 1, Sec c4,-U; tan bs, where the pedixes B, and S; refer to the base and the side of the ith block. In this sense cp,, for example, is the cohesion at the base of the ith block. Inthe case in which K,0, the safety factor is calculated by reducing the shear strength simultaneously on all sliding surfaces, until acceleration, K, calculated by means of Equation 8.9, is equal to 0. This is obtained by substituting the following shear strength values in Equation 8.10: Ca lF lang /F. Cs JF, lan Qs/F, cs, ./F andtan ds, /F Once the value of K, fora given safety factor has been determined, the forces acting on the sides and bases of the blocks are found by progressively solving the following equations. starting from the known condition that E, = 0 (E, is the force acting on the left face of the first block): Ei, =4;-p K + Ee; (8.16) x; = (E,— PW,) tan ds, + Cs, 4; (8.17) N,=(W, +X), ,c088;,,-X,cos8;-E;, sin 8, , +E, sin 8 + Ujtan Og, sin oF; ~ cy); tan C4) COS bp, Sec (Og, — Ct) (8.18) T,=j~ U,) an Gg, + ep, by See O (8.19) The effective nonnal stresses acting across the base and the sides of a slice are calculated as follows: 6g, = (N;- Uj)/b,sec &% (8.20) O'5,=(E- PWiIdis 0's, = Ein PW WA (8.21) All the effective normal stresses must be positive for an acceptable solution. The final check for moment equilibrium is obtained by taking the moments around the lower left hand corer of the block (Figure 8.6): MAX see 4,608 (0, + 8;,,) EZ; + Ere Zeer Xia +h, sec a, sin (01, + 8; , )1-WiXG,~Xp,) + K Wi(YG,-¥B)=0 (8.22) where XG;, ¥G;are the coordinates of the center of gravity of block i Starting from the first block, where Z, = 0, by assuming a value for /,, the moment arm Z; , , can be calculated. The values of Z, and Z,, , should lie within the block boundary, preferably in the middle third. 8.2.1.5 Practical example Aback-analysis of a landslide in a gypsum quarry is presented in this example 238 Rock slope stability analysis Gypsum quarry exploitations have been carried out in a hilly area between the province of Torino and Asti in the North-West of Italy. As the gypsum exploited masses are outcropping and extend down to a few hundred meiers, the quarry activity have been developed on superficial excava- tions and on underground room excavations, Gypsum orebodies. with the shape of a few hundred thick blocks. are interca- lated with shale and clayshale formations of a few centimeters thick The quarry operations have been carried out in a largely urbanized area and have therefore detennined serious slope stability and subsidence problems in a land where agricultural and industrial activities are in continuous development. The quarry planning must take these environmental factors into account The proposed example concems the stability conditions of a gypsum quarry face excavated till reaching an average distance of only 4-5 m from the contact plane between the gypsum and a clayshale formation. Two slope failures have occured during periods of heavy rains: The first instability movement occured in 1982 on a Sliding surface formed by the clayshale contact and a failure plane crossing the gypsum mass down to the quarry face toe. the second movement occured in 1990 on a sliding surface again formed by the clayshale contact, but outgoing from the slope at the base and passing into a clayshale intercalation (Plate 8.1). Plate 8.1, Landslide movement which occurred in 1990 in a gypsum quarry. Sliding phenomena analysis 239 Figure 8.7a reports for a vertical section of the quarry face: 1. The slope profile before the 1982 landslide; 2. The slope profile after the 1982 landslide; 3. The slope profile after the 1990 landslide; 4, The designed slope profile determined by a stabilized embankment con- struction; 5, The geometrical position of the gypsum-clayshale contact and the clayshale intercalation. The incipience of the repetitive movement of the slope has constituted a serious danger for the hill top surface on the clayshale side where there are farms and vineyard exploitations. Land recovery requires the stabilization of the broken gypsum face and of the upper clayshale slope uncovered by the landslides. The slope stabilization design involves the construction of an embankment to fill the unstable slope. The geometrical features of the embankment can be determined once the shear strength parameters of the material forming the slope have been assessed. The embankment has been constructed with loose clayshale material gathered from a newly discovered gypsum mass which has still to be exploited. Therefore all the examined geomaterials exhibit low shear strength characteristics and the presence of water infilling has a significant effect on the consistence degree of the clayey materials. The back analysis carried out on the landslides has the aim of estimating the peak and the residual shear strength of the gypsum mass, the clayshale disconti- nuities and the water pressure entity able to provoke instabilities. The first landslide movement, induced by the water pressures acting on the contact clayshale-gypsum plane. occured in a peak strength condition of the clayshale and gypsum mass material. The contact plane is averagely 45° dipping, whilst the failure in the gypsum mass has an almost planar shape ‘The movement caused the change of the slope morphology as shown in Figure 8.7a and the fail in the shear strength of the materials which were subjected to the sliding. The movement was arrested when a new limit equilibrium of the slope was found. The second instability phenomenon involved the movement of a larger mass, the sliding surface was formed by a contact with a clayshale intercalation at a 10 m depth with respect to the slope base level. The clayshale intercalation has an average inclination of about 25°. The reactivation of the movement, again induced by the water flowing through the clayshale-gypsum contact, occurred ina residual shear strength condition of the already sheared part of the sliding surface and in a peak shear strength condition of the clayshale intercation and of the lower part of the contact plane. The reactivation of the instability caused a rotational movement of the gypsum 240 Rock slope stability analysis ayyosd odojg (z 20661 Ut P1990 Yarym tI9WaAOLH AK! 1 UL poxinaaa ey Aurnb wnsdAz ay Jo vonsas jraiua, (“L'g 2aNBig Sliding phenomena analysis 241 | ets J | oe fe ; —— ne De eed 2 5 v 3 Figure 8.7 (continued). b) Shear strength envelopes for: 1) Gypsum mass (4, 234. B = 675, T = -.0005); 2) Broken gypsum mass (6, = 5 MPa, A= ~.0005): 3) Calyshale (6, = SMPu, A = .234. B = .675, T = -.0005); 4) Fissured clay shale (6, = 5 MPa, A =.129, B= .655, T= -.0002). mass at the slope toe until a new limit equilibrium condition was reached The back analysis carried out to determine the peak and the residual shear strength parameters and the water pressures acting on the slope in the instability incipience conditions involved the following stability analyses: 1. Stability analysis of the gypsum face which considered the geometrical slope profile previous to the 1982 landslide movement and the peak shear strength of the sliding surface: 2. Stability analysis of the gypsum face which considered the geometrical slope profile subsequent to the 1982 landslide movement and the residual shear strength of the sliding surface; 3. Stability analysis of the gypsum face which considered the geometricai slope profile subsequent to the 1982 landslide movement and the residual shear strength of the already sheared surface and the peak shear strength of the surface sheared in the 1990 landslide; 4. Stability analysis of the gypsum face which considered the geometrical slope profile subsequent to the 1990 Jandslide movement and the residual shear strength of the sliding surface 242 Rock slope stability analysis In order to }imit the range of variation of the shear strength parameters of the gypsum mass and of the clay-shale discontinuities, the following tests were carried out in the laboratory: — Uniaxial strength of intact gypsum rock (C, = 10 MPa); — Uniaxial strength of sound clayshale (C, = 5 MPa): — Basic friction angle of gypsum discontinuities (, = 35°). A slope face survey was also carried out to determine the quality of the gypsum and the clayshale exposure. The fractures and the clayshale intercalation were then quantitatively described paying particular attention to the water flow and free. moisture visible in individual discontinuities or in the gypsum mass. The stability analyses were carried out using a limit equilibrium method for polygonal sliding surfaces: The Janbu method he water pressures were schematized by using the pore pressure r, parameter Ou = Yo Wy My). where Y, and yy are the water and gypsum unit weight respectively and h,. and ht, are the heights of the water and of the sliding mass with reference to the sliding surface in every slice in which the mass is divided using the Janbu method. The required solution of the back-analysis was obtained by determining the peak and residual shear strength parameters and the pore pressure parameter able. to give a safety factor equal to one in all the four stability analyses. The shear strength behaviour of the gypsum mass, the broken gypsum mass, the clayshale and the sheared clayshale were determined according to the Hoek & Brown criterion (Figure 8.7b). The following ¢ and 6 parameters were assigned to the four examined ma- : Gypsum mass: c= 0.1 MPa, 6 = 22°: broken gypsum mass: ¢ = 0.02 MPa, = 20°; clayshale: c = 0.05 MPa. 6 = 22°: sheared clayshale: c= 0. 0= 18°. The ¢ and $ parameters were determined by drawing the tangent lines to the Hoek & Brown shear strength envelopes in correspondance to the average value of the normal stress 6 acting on the examined sliding surfaces in the Mohr plane. The values obtained for e are the intercepts of the tangent lines on the t axis; the values obtained for @ are the inclination angles of the tangent lines (Figure 8.7b), The 1, parameter used for all the four analyses had the value 0.15. 8.2.2 Sliding ona nvo plane intersection line 8.2.2.1 Wedge sliding Two simplified methods of wedge analysis with a horizontal crest failure have been given by Hoek & Bray (1981). The first method was proposed in order to explain the basic mechanics of wedge sliding. The second is a complete method and the only siniplification is given by the use of the spherical projection which provides approximations in the angle measurement. A third method which uses vectorial equations and which provides a complete wedge problem failure analysis has also been given by Hoek & Bray (1981). Sliding phenomena analysis 243 ; plane A Vosrection of sliding {c) Figure 8.8, Geometrical features for simplified wedge sliding analysis: a) View along the intersection line: b) View at right angles to the intersection line: ¢) Spherical projection of wedge sliding planes (afier Hock & Bray, 1981), The wedge failure pictorial view is given in Figure 8.le, whilst Figure 8.8 shows the wedge geometrical features required for the first approximate solution (Plate 8.2) The condition of sliding is defined, as in the case of plane failure, by y, > V,>0 (Figure 8.8b) where wy is the inclination of the slope face measured in the view at right angles to the line of intersection and ¥y, is the dip of the two sliding plane intersection tines In the hypothesis that only a frictional resistance component occurs on the sliding planes and that the friction angle @ is the same for both planes, the wedge safecty factor is given by (Figure 8.82): _ (Ry + Rgjtan Weiny, F 244 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 8.2. Wedge failure ex- ample. where R, and R, are the normal reaction on planes A and B of Figure 8.8a. Horizontal and ventical direction translation equilibrium equations have to be resolved in order to determine R, and Rg Ry sin (B-"AC)=Re sin (B+ 4 \ R, cos (B—'40)—R, cos (B+ 4E) =W cos y; where Ry + Ry = ose SMB . sin 4, from which pa sind and (8.23) sin 4G tan y, Sliding phenomena analysis 245 From the above quoted safety factor expression, the following considerations can be made for the wedge failure problem: — In the case of the absence of cohesion and water pressures, the safety factor is again independent of the wedge weight, while it is only dependent on the wedge geometry and the friction angle value. — When using a non-linear shear strength envelope, Equation 8.23 can still be used if the secant friction angle to the envelope at the G,, value acting on the sliding planes is used. The 6, value should be the same on planes A and B in order to have the same secant friction angle value on the A and B planes. ~ The wedge geometry which corresponds to the lower value of F is obtained when B is equal to 4G and consequently sin B/sin ‘4G = 1. In this case the safety factor is given as F = tan o/tan w, and represents the 2-D plane failure situation. = The B and ‘4 angles can be measured by using the spherical projection sliding plane representation as illustrated in Chapter 3 and a first preliminary safety factor assessment can be easily obtained. A second wedge failure analysis method, which takes the cohesion and water pressure effect into account, is here reported Figure 8.9 illustrates the wedge geometrical features required to solve the problem and the water pressure distribution assumed by Hoek & Bray (1981). upper slope face _l- slope face Fi w gure 8.9. Geometrical features and water pressure distribution diagram for a complete edge analysis: a) Pictorial view of the wedge reporting the numbering of the intersection lines and planes; b) Slope section passing through the intersection line 5: c) Spherical projection of the data required for wedge stabitity analysis (after Hoek & Bray. 1981). 246 Rock slope stability analysis The wedge safety factor was derived by a detailed analysis of this problem published by Hoek et al. (1973) and evaluates as: Fa (eX +egY) + A-22X) and, + (B- 2 Vy 1a dy (8.24) Ye 2p 2p where c, and cg are the cohesive strengths of planes A and B; ¢, and dy are the friction angles on plane A and B respectively; yg is the unit weight of the rock; ¥,. is the unit weight of water; A is the total height of the wedge: X. YA and B are dimensionless factors which depend on the geometry of the wed; xe 8a sin ®45 COS 8s,,, in O13 Sin 035 COS 8,4 COS W., ~CO8 Wh C05 Baan si Ye SiR® By COS W,—C08 W, C08 Ba where y, and w,, are the dips of planes A and B respectively and ys is the dip of the intersection line 5 (Figure 8.9c). Angles 8, represent the angles between the intersection lines and j(/=1, 2... 5, = J, 2c. 5) orthe angles between an intersection line and/or a normal line to planes A or B (nna or nb) (Figure 8.9c) The @ angles required for the solution of the wedge failure analysis problem can conveniently be measured on a stereoplot of the data which defines the geometry of the wedge and the slope (Figure 8.9c) The safety factor expression given by Equation 8.24 is the sum of four different sliding resistance contributions: — The cohesive resistance on plane A: — The cohesive resistance on plane B: ~ The resistance due to the friction available on plane A; — The frictional resistance available on plane &. This safety factor expression is therefore useful as it is easy to use in parametrical analysis when determining the contribution to the stability of the different strength components. The effect of water pressure reduction (drainage) can also be easily determined, It is sufficient to give the 0 value to the water term (y,./2%9) or to decrease the water term as much as is possible for the drainage effect and to calculate the correspondent safety factor increase. Sliding phenomena analysis 247 8.2.2.2 Analysis of a wedge with a tension crack A pictorial view of a wedge closed by a sub vertical tension crack on the slope crestis given in Figure 8.1f The two methods illustrated for the stability analysis of a wedge with a horizontal slope crest and with no tension cracks can also be applied in this case. ‘The first method provides a solution in terms of the safety factor which is not dependent on the existence and position of a tension crack since it only considers the frictional resistance and slope. The application of the second method involves the calculation of the four sliding resistance contributions which should be available for the equilibrium of the wedge located behind the tension crack (Figure 8.10). The principal difficulties in applying this method are due to the possible schematization of the water pressures. Water flowing through a tension crack produces a horizontal pressure which must be introduced into the equilibrium equations as in the case of re 8.10. Geome: I features for a wedge with tension crack stability analysis: a) Picto~ 1g the number of intersection lines and planes: b) Section of the riul view of the wedge report slope passing through the intersection line 5; c) Spherical projection of the data required for the stability analysis (alter Hoek & Bray, 1981). 248 Rock slope stability analysis a plane sliding with a tension crack (Figure 8.3). The determination of the safety factor, as in the case of the wedge with tension crack procedure, is here reported for the drained case. The safety factor is given by: 3 3 F=— (c,X +c,¥)+A tang, + Blan dg ~— (c,X, + cp¥) Ye i where Z is the depth of the tension crack. sin 6, Sin 8,5 C08 8ajq 8.2.2.3 Analvsis of a stepped wedge sliding If a simple wedge is intersected by one or more secondary sets of subvertical discontinuities. a panicular stepped failure mechanism can develop. A pictorial view of an example of such a mechanism with several steps on both the sliding surfaces is shown in Figure 8.1 Kovari & Fritz (1984) developed an analytical procedure to deal with this case and to determine the safety factor. The principal problems of the safety factor determination with the limit equilibrium method are: ~ The determination of the force acting on the sliding surfaces: — The determination of the available shear resistance on the sliding surfaces. A pictarial view of the stepped wedge failure mechanism and the spherical projection of the sliding planes are shown in Figure 8.1 1a. Figure 8.1 1b repons the data of a particular example of stepped wedge sliding analysis in the form of equal-asea spherical projection and is here discussed. The sliding planes of the stepped surfaces (R,, and P,,) and the mean planes of the stepped surface (P,,, and P,,) are reported in Figure &.1 1a in the form of poles and great circles. A stability analysis should be carried out, taking into consideration the geome- trical features of all the planes forming the wedge. In the simple case of a dry slope and of only frictional resistance. the safety factor is: sinB tang sin 4b tan yy From an engineering point of view it can be more reliable to consider the stepped surfaces as rough surfaces and (0 analyze the equilibrium condition in the hypothesis that the sliding planes are the mean planes of the stepped surfaces. The Sliding phenomena analysis 249 plane 2m sliding direction &) Figure 811, a) Pictorial view of the stepped wedge failure mechanism: b) Spherical projection of: P,, = first sliding plane pole. P,, = secand sliding plane pole, R,, = meun sliding plane pole !. R,, = mean sliding plane pole 2, P = set of planes forming the stepped surface and which coincides with the slope face pole. shear resistance t, available on the mean planes can be given by the Barton criterion or. in the case of tow stresses acting on the mean sliding plane. by: ty=6,, tan ($+), where jis the mean step angle. The safety factor, with these assumptions, is given as sinB tan(o+i) sin'al tanw, 8.2.2.4 Analysis ofa polygonal wedge failure The polygonal wedge sliding mode is characterized (Figure 8. 1h) by sliding along a polygonal line defined by more than one intersection of pairs of opposite sliding plane Jines. Kovari & Fritz (1984) developed an analytical procedure to determine an overall safety factor for this mechanism The principal problem for the stability analysis of such a case is that of, determining the interaction forces between a certain number of rock wedges. The lower wedge is exposed on the slope face and has the kinematic possibility of sliding. 250. Rock slope stability analysis The problem can be solved by using an iterative scheme in order to determine the wedge interaction force configuration for which the ratio between the avail- able and the mobilized shear strength on the sliding planes is constant. This ratio represents the overall safety factor for a rock wedge system. 8.2.2.5 Practical example A back-analysis of a landslide which occured in a quarry face during a heavy rainfall in 1978 is presented in this example (Plate 8.3), The quarry site is situated in the Luserna stone basin. The principal geological and geostructural features of the site and of the rock mass are reported in Chapter 6. The quarry face was 50 m high; the distance between the slope crest and a tension crack was assessed as being 5 m, whilst the planes determining the unstable rock belong to the joint sets k,, k; and ky reported on the stereonet of Figure 8.12a in the form of great circles. The dip and the dip direction of the excavation faces and the discontinvity planes, are as follows: = The excavation face is 80° dipping with a 60° dip direction; ~ The upper face of the quarry is almost horizontal: ~ The k, joint plane is 70° dipping with a 65° dip direction; Plate 8.2, Landslide movement which occurred in 1978 in a Luserna stone quarry, Sliding phenomena analysis 251 sliding wedge {cy Figure 8.12. a) Spherical projection of the joints and of the slope face (A = ky, B= ky, T= hy), b) Pictorial view of the wedge; c) Diagram of the safety factor versus water pressure condition (Z,,/Z). ~ The ky joint plane is 70° dipping with a 350° dip direction: = The f; joint plane is 80° dipping with a 280° dip direction. A rock wedge can be formed by the intersection of the planes: k,. ky and ky, ky are sliding planes, ky isthe tension crack plane (Figure 8.12b). The maximum rock wedge which can occur passes through the slope toe and is a very thin wedge; the average effective normal stress, in dry conditions, is 0.02 MPa and 0.31 MPa on the k, and A, planes. The limit equilibrium condition, in the case of complete persistence of the joint planes, can be determined for a peak friction angle (6, + /) of 6t.6° on both the sliding planes. (and 252 Rock slope stability analysis The average values determined for the residual friction angle vary in the 30-35° range: the JRC coefficient of the sliding planes vary in the range 8-10, according tothe different lengths of the sliding planes; the JCS value of the material adjacent to the sliding plane is about 50 MPa. The peak friction angle which can be determined, according to the Barton criterion varies between 50° and 65° for the range of normal stresses acting on the sliding planes. The limit equilibrium condition almost corresponds to the maximum available mobilitation of the peak shear strength on the sliding planes. The instability phenomenon caused by the heavy rainfall is simulated in the stability analysis by progressively water filling the tension crack. The diagram of the safety factor variation with the tension crack water pressure increment is reported in Figure 8.12c. The water pressure value | corresponds to the complete water filling of the tension crack. The stability analysis is carried out in the hypothesis of a peak friction angle of 61.6°. The diagram shows that the water infiltration in the tension crack determines a decrease of the safety factor, till the ratio of 0.2 between the water height in the tension crack Z,, and the depth of the tension crack, Z, is reached, The safety factor for Z,/Z = 0.2 is 0.70. For large values of Z,.. the safety factor surprisely increases up to the value of 0.85. This result is due to the combination of two different causes which occur with the water filling increment = For Z,,/Z greater than 0.2, the wedge loses contact with one of the sliding planes (the effective pressure becomes lower than zero) and the sliding movement occurs along the deepest line of the other sliding plane: ~ The water force acting on the tension crack plane has a stabilizing effect since the norma) unit vector to the tension crack has a stabilizing direction when it is solved in the normal and the tangent component on the remaining sliding plane. The stability analysis presented in this example has been carried out using the wedge solution procedure given by Hoek & Bray (1981). 8.3 STABILITY ANALYSIS USING VECTOR METHODS Vector analysis methods provide the formulations for all the quantities relating to block morphology in a rock mass, including the volume of a block bounded by Joints, the area of each of its faces, the positions of its vertices and the positions and attitudes of its faces and edges. In the following pages, some basic vector analysis operations. which are needed for the calculation of the sliding planes areas and of the rock block volumes, are reported. Sliding phenomena analysis 253 8.3.1 Equations of lines and planes Figure 8.13 explains, according to the Goodman & Shi block theory symbology (1985), the relationship between the geological quantities (dip and dip direction) and the geometrical terms, ona Cartesian basis. The adopted conventions are: — The y-axis has the North direction, the x-axis has the East direction and the axis is upwards; = The dip direction is therefore defined by the horizontal angle B from y towards x: ~ Coordinates are represented by values of the intercepts X. ¥ and Z along the directions x, vand = A plane P. with a normal unit vector fi, is defined as the set of tips of radius vector x so that: x-fi, =D where D is the length of a perpendicular from the origin to the plane (Figure 8.1da). The plane equation can be given in form of coordinates: AX + BX +CZ=D where v =(X.¥. Z) ard ii, = (A.B. C). With reference to Figure 8.13b, the values of the coordinates of the normal sin oxsin B: B f y North — a ' i i I SS Soy Hor th - n/ Dip vector * Joint plane t x East @ (>) Figure $.13. a} Orientation of a plane and its normal 10 a Cartesian system: b) Direction cosines of the normal unit vector ft and projection nr of f to the plane OY. 254 Rock slope stability analysis z ta) Figure 8.4, a} Equation of a plane: b) Iniersection line of two pines, A line is defined as the intersection of two planes. Let P and P’ be two planes which have respectively the equations AX + BX +CZ+D=0 AX +BX+CZ+D'=0 These equations are also called the Cartesian straight line equations and uni- vocally define the line r, The line , instead, does not univocally define its equations. The two plane equations can be substituted by their two linear combinations, i. to represent the line with two other planes of the plane bundle defined by the two planes. A straight line can be defined by means of parametric equations. If P(X,, ¥,. Z,) is a point on the line defined with the above two plane equations, every other point P(X, ¥. Z) on the straight line has the coordinates: X=X,41X, veY,+r¥, Z=Z,+1Z, where ¢ is a real parameter and x, (X,, Y;, Z,) represents the line direction The intersection line of two joint planes determines an edge of a joint block. The intersection line of planes P, and P, which have unit normals fi, and Ay respectively is perpendicular to both ji, and fi, and is parallel to (Figure 8.14b): 1.2 A,X ay The 1,3 vector can be given in coordinate form. Sliding phenomena analysis 255 The vector cross product between A, = (X,Y; 2) and expressed as: Xy. Yar Zs) is £5 Ayxin= | X,Y, Z, Xy Yy 2 {and are the unit vectors parallel to the coordinate axes. The I, vector is then expressed in coordinate form as Ty =£125- 221). 122, XZ) YX The imersection point of a plane and a line can be described by solving the parametric line equations and the plane equation simultaneously. Let (X,. ¥,,.Z,) be a point on the line that has the direction of a radius vector to point (X;, Y¥,, Z,) (Figure 8. 14a). By substituting the values of X, ¥ and Z from the parametric line equation in the plane cquation and by solving the plane equations in order to determine /, one obtains: D-(AX, + BY, + CZ,) AX, + BY, +CZ, and the radius vector from the origin to the point of intersection of the line and the plane has its tip at point C(X. ¥, Z), where: X, +1,X; Y=¥,+t¥) Z=Z,+1,2Z, The coordinates (X, ¥, Z) of the comers of the polyhedral block which is given by the intersection of three planes (for example the planes P,, P, and P;) are detenminated by solving the following three plane equation system (Figure &.1Sa): AX +BY +C\Z=D, A,X +BY +C,Z=D, AX + BY + D; The determination of whether a point x(X, ¥. Z) is situated above or below a plane (the plane P) can be obtained by means of the scalar product (Figure 8.15b): fi, X Dy the point is above plane P. or in coordinate form: AX + BY + CZ < D. the point is below plane P AX + BY + CZ > D. the point is above plane P. 256 Rock slope stability analysis fa) (b) Figure 8.15. a) Comers ata block: b) Location of C, and C, as far as plane P is concerned 8.3.2 Volumes, areas. angles and forces Rock polyhedral solids can be of different shapes. For volume computation purposes. polyhedra are divided into tetrahedra. The volume of a polyhedron can then be computed as the sum of the tetrahedral volumes obtained from the subdivision. Figure 8.16 shows, as an example, the subdivision of a parallelepiped into six triangular prisms and the division of each prism into three tetrahedra. The volume V’ of a tetrahedron is given by (Figure 8.16b): Val%Sh=Ya(bxe) where 5 is the area of the parallelepiped base and h the parallelepiped height: a, b and ¢ are the thrce edge vectors radiating from each vertex of the tetrahedron. In coordinate form: a=(X,-X, ¥)-¥, Z-Z)) b=(%y-¥, ¥3-¥%y 2-2) cH(Xy- KX, Yy-¥,. ZZ) and: Sliding phenomena analysis 257 (p) Figure 8.16, t) Subdivision of a parallelepiped into two tri prism into three tetrahedra. rular prisms: b) Division of each 258. Rock slope stability analysis x, Yy-¥, 2,-Z, 1 Y-¥, 2-2, Xy-X, Yy-¥y Z-Z, The area A of the triangle with corners (a), @y, a3) and sides a = a, a, and b= a, ais: A='slaxb| and can be obtained as: Y-¥, ZZ, The angle between two intersected lines in space can be determined by considering the two vectors n4(X4, Yj. 2)) and ny(Xy, Vy. Zs) which define the line cos & [ny] In in coordinate fonn: XX, +V\¥s+2,Z + ZG cos a= fy =X\Xy 4 VY A force F is represented in magnitude and direction by the vector F which has components F=(X.¥.2) and magnitude: [Fl see +2 Gravitational force is proportional to the mass and is vertically downwards directed (-) Water forces are computed with reference to the polyhedral faces on which the water forces act. If P; are the faces of a polyhedral block. each with area A, and inward unit normal ii. the resultant of alll water force is: where S, is the integral of water pressure acting over face i. In many cases it is Sliding phenomena analysis 259 sufficiently accurate to substitute S, the centroid of the face i. PA,, where P, is the water pressure acting at 8.3.3 Warburton procedure for stability analysis of a polyhedral rack block 8.3.3.1 Principal features Warburton (1981) derived a computational procedure for the vectorial analysis of the stability of a single 3-D rock block. The block is considered rigid and bounded by acombination of discontinuity planes and excavation surfaces. The Warburton procedure examines only translational block movements, whilst rotations are excluded. The examined block can be an arbitrary polyhedron with various re-entrant surface features such as cavities and notches. In addition, any number of block faces may be free and exposed on excavation surfaces The procedure leads to the safety factor determination of a block which slides ona face or along the direction of the intersection line between two discontinuity planes, The fundamental part of the procedure is the kinematic analysis of the possible block movements (sliding along one face or two faces, block detachment or block mantaining contact with the rock mass) The areas of block faces, together with the black volume and the center of mass can be computed by applying the previously described methods (Goodman & Shi, 1983) or other methods such as that proposed by Warburton (Hall. 1976). The joint network pattern can instead be applied together with the geomechanical survey for reconstructing blocky rock geometry. 8.3.3.2. Block movement constraints The block movenient possibility depends on (wo types of conditions of the translation unit vector § (Figure 8.17) = Kinematic constraints (equal in number to the discontinuity number) A, $20 (8.25) the normal unit vectors fi, are positive when pointing towards the block: ~ Force constraints R-§>0 (8.26) where R is the external resujtant force. Uniqueness of # constraint R -§=max (subject to Equations 8.25 and 8.26) (8.27) It can be noted that, if fi, > 0, the block moves away from the fixed face, but. if fi, &, = 0, the block moves parallel to the fixed face. maintaining contact and sliding along it Moreover, if the constraints (Equations 8.25 and 8.26) permit a range of 260 Rock slope stability analysis {d) le) if) Figure §.17, Influence of ¢ on the different fixed face positions (after Cravero & Giani, 1988), directions: the direction in which the block will actually move is the one in which the resultant of the driving force is maximum 8.3.3.3 Idemtification of block movements types The type of block movement identification procedure introduces and examines, step by step, the constraints imposed by Equations 8.25 and 8.26. In the initial step the block is considered as free (completely isolated from the rock mass). This requirenrent gives (Figure 8.1 7a) (8.28) where # is the driving force unit vector. This movement, so called type 0 block movement. represents the problem solution when Equation 8.25, now expressed by the fi, - #2 0 conditions, are verified simultaneously with Equations 8.26 and 8.27. which are automatically satistied when Equation 8.28 is verified. If, ina second step. a fixed face (discontinuity plane) is introduced orientated so that fi, -# <0. the type 0 block movement 1s changed either to deflect in a new direction. or to prevent all movements. which is the particular case for which: A |. The new # is obtained by determining the orthographic projection of R Ps Sliding phenomena analysis 261 aie -~(R-A,)A, (8.29) Equation 8.29 defines type | of block movements (sliding on a discontinuity plane) (Figure 8.1 7b). Ina third step, a second fixed face (a second discontinuity plane) is introduced by imposing an additional geometrical constraint. WF the second discontinuity plane is orientated in such a way as to satisfy the conditions with reference tof, fg f, 20 (8.30) the movement possibility is maintained along f, (Figure 8.17c). If the opposite relation is verified fy f, <0 (8.31) A face 2 introduction will change block movements along the effective fall line of face |, either deflecting it in a new direction, or preventing al) movements if no such S exists. The effect of face 2 on the block movement ditection depends on the relative orientation between fi, and f which implies the existence of the conditions (Figure 8.17d-f): fy PO (8.32) fig P20 (8.33) If fig: F==1. a {ace 2 introduction implies no possibility of movement, The other possible solutions for Equations 8.32 and 8.33 require the orthographic projection of Fto the face 2 determination, called, which corresponds to the possibilities: -f,20 (8.34) hy fy<0 (8.35) The realization of Equation 8.34 implies that, for syrnmetry with Equation 8.30. sliding occurs on face 2 (Figure 8.17d) and then: fi, (8.36) which is the condition for the type | movement. Equations 8.3] and 8.34 are also symmetrical and their realization determines the block movement direction coincident with the intersection line between face 1 and face 2 (discontinuity planes | and 2) (Figure 8.17e-f): hh: i oe fy X Ay (8.37) The line detined by the I) vector can be an effective discontinuity plane intersection or a fictious intersection obtained by an ideal proiongaton of the dicrantinuity nlanee | and 9 (Fianra 818) The arthasanal nroiection af R ania, 262 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 8.18. Example of a concave rock block for which the direction of the stiding 1s parallel 1o the intersection fine of faces 1 and 2. moveme: the intersection line is therefore (R + /\,)/,) and $ is in the same direction as this vector. therefore (type 2 movement): F=sen(R fh (8.38) The eventual perpendicularity beuween R and /,, (R - /, ment The block movement type identification procedure is of the trial and error type and is carried out, for a known resultant of the active forces, as follows. AS a first tentative, $= # is assumed and the realization of Equation 8.25 is checked for all the fixed faces. If one or more conditions are not sastisfied, the type 0 movement is not possible and the type 1 movement is assumed as a second tentative. This new possibility is only considered for the faces which satisfy the special conditions f;- # <0. IF K fixed faces pass the test, $ will coincide with one of the, directions. ‘The possibility of the type 2 movement also needs to be verified. This verification is subordinate to that of the special conditions which derive from the couple of fixed faces introduction. A number / of valid combinations can be obtained and § belongs to one of the two groups K or /, obtained from the tentative conditions. ‘The J determination involves checking the geometrical conditions. which arise step by step with introduction of the n block fixed faces. A faster identification scheme, which determines § by setting up a tentative solution, is preferable. The tentative solutions which satisfy Equation 8.26 can be set up in R - §> 0 ascending order. The allowable movement unit vector # coincides with that which gives R - 4 minimum value: such a § direction is the only direction which also satisfies Equation 8.27. = 0) prevents move- Sliding phenomena analysis 263 This identification procedure gives a univocal solution even in the case in which the same solution is obtained by two or more tentative solutions. This particular coincidence implies that the block movement is controlled by three or more fixed faces which generate parallel intersection lines. Even though the above reported scalar product calculation is immediate, Warburton suggests the following expression for the type 0 identification ws (8.39) from which it follows that the minimum searched value corresponds to the fixed face on which the negative value of the scalar product fi, - # is the absolute maximum value. R-s=|RI [1- 8.3.3.4. Safety factor determination The ratio between the components of the resistant force R, and the active force R, defines the safety factor for the movement type compatible with the constraints imposed on the rock block. If it is assumed that the available shear strength on the fixed faces is given by the components due to the cohesion and the friction angle, the value of the forces involved in the safety factor expression can be defined for the block movement ype as: Type | R,=R-f=|R| 1-77) R, =A, —(R- A) tan 9; Type 2 R,=Rsga(R Aly . = CA; +cAj-fy iid [Ty ? tan o,f, A] 1j[?- tan o; and the safety factor (F types One can note that the safety factor computation, obtained by using the limit equilibrium method. can be carried out only in the case of the statically deter- mined system (block sliding on one or two faces). Different gcometrical condi- tions. such as that of block movement on three or more fixed faces constitute a statically undetermined system, which cannot be dealt with rigorously with this methodology. R,/R,) can be determined for the two block movement 8.3.3.5 Application example The Warburton procedure is applied to the stability analysis of a hexahedral rock block (Cravero & Giani, 1988). The rock block is delimited by two excavation faces (F,. Fs) and four discontinuity planes (P,. Py. P;. P4). which are oriented (dip and dip direction) as follows: 264 Rock slope stabiliry analysis F (80°, 185°); P, (42°, 12 F (20°, 185°); Py (75°. 2 P; (80°, 205°) 0°); Ps (38°, 170°) and are subjected to the weight force R = (0, 0,-1) The normal unit vectors i,. directed towards the block, satisfy Equation 8.32 with minimum value (X= 8,» #=-.788) for plane 4 which gives the first tentative solution ¥ (Equation 8.39). The arrangement, in ascending order, of the A, -#* product results leads to the sequence definition of the planes (P,, P;, Ps. P;) on which the correspondent unit vectors (f,..f,. fy fy) are determined. The combinations between the sequence elements indicates that the couples (P,, Py; Py, Py: P). Pai Py. Ps) and their symmetrical couples satisfy Equations 8.31 and 8.35 by idemify as admissible directions. the correspondent edges (intersection lines) (4). fia. /ya.f\3) Equation 8.27 is satisfied for the group of the |R - /,| products, by detennin- ing the minimum Z between the group and ¥ and by therefore identying iy. In the case in which only frictional resistances occur on the two sliding planes (P,, P3), the block stability analysis leads to a safety factor value of 1.78 for $= 35°. 8.3.4 Block theory 8.3.4.1 Introduction The block theory (Shi & Goodman, 1981; Goodman & Shi. 1982, 1985) can be applied (o find the critical blocks created by discontinuity intersections in a rock mass free along defined surfaces, _ The critical blocks can liberate, by moving or detaching»from the rock mass. other blocks that were previously ned: ‘The block theory can therefore be applied in aféasibility tage of an excavation project with the purpose of determining both a stable orientation of the excavation faces or the required stabilizing forces. This theory, as with the previously dealt with vectorial analysis method. considers all the discontinuity surfaces to be perfectly planar and persistent. The mathematical theory on which the method is based is formulated in geometrical and topological terms ‘whilst the stability condition analyses are carried out in statical equation terms. The techniques developed by the theory (o describe and examine blocks uses vector analysis or graphical methods. This book gives some basic principles and applications of the theory mainly by means of graphical procedures. 8.3.4.2 Stereographic projection of lines and planes The block theory utilizes. for the graphical representation of lines and planes. the (cqual-angle) ‘Stereographic projection. “This” type of projection represents a particular perspective form in Which only a projection focus occurs. This focus Sliding phenomena analysis 6: a (4) Yo (e) Figure &.!9. Siereographic projection mechanism of a plane and its normal (a-b). of a vector and the opposite of the vector (¢-c) (alter Goodman & Shi. 1985). can be made coincident in a spherical projection with one of the two poles of the reference projection sphere (upper focus or lower focus F as in the case of Figure 8.17). The projection rays circumscribe the traces left on the reference sphere. by the projecting objects and put them on the projection plane: the equatorial plane Typical features of this type of projection are: — The projection of planes (inclined planes) are circles; ~The projection of intersection lines between two planes are the intersection points of the circles: — The angles between the planes are maintained. Figure 8.19a-¢ shdws the stereographic projection mechanism of a plane, its normal, a vector and the opposite to a vector. Figure 8.19a represents the section of the reference sphere drawn along the maximum projecting plane dip; AB is the diameter of the circumference obtained by the intersection between the reference sphere and the projecting plane. Since the lower focai point projection is adopted, the two points A and B project into 4, and B,, inside and outside the reference circle respectively. It can be noted that all the directions intercepting the upper hemisphere project inside the projecting circle (reference circle), while all the directions intercepting the lower hemisphere project outside the projecting circle. 266 Rock slope stability analysis A basic aspect of the block theory can be then shown:_All the directions outgoing, from the sphere center which lie inside the reference sphere are upward directed; all the directions outside the reference sphere are downward directed, Figure 8.19b represents, in the xy-piane (horizontal projection plane) the circumference P and point NV. The circumference P ig the projection of plane P; point Mis the projection of the intersection between the reference sphere and the unit vector 4,, normal to plane P. Point C is the center of the circle which represents the projection of plane P. Figure 8. 19c represents the vector v and its opposite ~v in the Cartesian system OXYZ. Figure 8.19d represents the intersection between the vector v and the reference sphere in the vertical section, through the reference sphere along the direction of Y : Figure 8.19e represents, on the projection plane, the points ¥, and vi, represent- ing vectors v and —v respectively. The vector v is defined in polar coordinates (ov,, B) and in Cartesian coordinates (X,, Y,)- One can note that 1, the extreme of vector v (upwards directed), lies inside the reference circle, whilst vy, the extreme of the vector —v (downward directed), lies outside the reference circle thereby proving the previous proposition. 8.3.4.3 Construction of a plane ona stereonet Figure 8.20a-b shows the lines of latitude and longitude of a reference sphere. Figure 8.20a shows these lines for one hemisphere only: Figure 8.20b shows these lines for the entire sphere except a region around the position of the focus. The longitudinal lines are given as great circles and represent the stereogra- phical projection of planes; the latitudal lines are given as small circles and represent stereographical projections of loci of lines (through a common origin) which make an equal angle with a given direction through the origin (cones). The great circles shown in Figure 8.20b are projections of planes dip directed towards the East or the West and dipping in the 0-90° range, with a 10° step. The small circles shown in Figure &.20b represent the projection of a family of cones around the intersection line of great circles. Figure 8.2! shows an example of a stereograph projection of a plane. The plane is 50° dipping with 50° of dip direction angle. The construction technique is similar to the one shown in Chapter 3 for the spherical equal-area projections of planes. In the stereographic case the direction WCE of the sterconet of Figure 8.20 should be superimposed with the dip direction of the plane reported in Figure 8.20a (point A). The required great circle can then be drawn by following the equal-dip great circle of the stereonet The cone projection can be constructed by firstly determining the cone center in the stereanet. The cone should then be drawn. on the basis of its aperture angle, by choosing the required small circle between the latitudinal lines of Figure 8.20b. Sliding phenomena analysis 267 ple Figure. 8.20, Siereonet reporting lutinudinal and longitudinal lines of the reference sphere: a) For one hemisphere only; b) For the entire sphere except a region around the foci (after Goodman & Shi. 1983), The distance between the stereonet origin and the cone center in the stereonet (OC)is given by: OC =R sine] (cos + c0s &) where & is the radius of the reference sphere; 6 is the cone aperture and @ is the cone axis inclination The direction of the cone axis, defined by the angle between the cone axis onhographic projection and the Norther direction. can be determined on the stereonet of Figure 8.20a. 268 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 8.21. Stereographic representation of a plane dipping 50° and with a dip direc- tion of 50” 8.3.4.4 Typology ond removability of blocks Ifone considers that every discontinuity (joint) plane divides the space into two half-spaces. a joint pyramid (JP) is defined as the set of points common to all the half-spaces bounded by the plane of each face of rock block when these planes are shifted (0 pass through a common origin. If one considers that the joint pyramid is exposed on the excavation faces (excavation front and upper excavation front). and is therefore bounded by these faces, the excavation faces will be added to the other joints thus obtaining the block pyramid (BP). A block can be convex or concave (Figure 8.22). Only convex blocks will be dealt with in this book. The block theory distinguishes between blocks which are not exposed on the excavation faces (JB) and blocks exposed on the excavation faces. The blocks exposed on the excavation faces are distinguished in finite and infinité blocks. Figure 8.23a iljustrates the difference between finite blocks and infinite blocks. Figure 8.23 refers to a 2-D case and represents: a) two possible intersection types between the excavation face trace and two joint planes. b) the intersections of the planes shifted to a common origin The upper half-space of a plane / is called U;, whilst the tower half-space is called L.. Sliding phenomena analysis 269 fa) Figure 8.22. a) A convex block; (8) —_b) Aconcave block. @ 1 (a) Figure 8.22. Finite and infinite blocks. The blocks are bounded by two joints and by an excavation face: a) Two possible intersection types between the excavation Fuce Irace and the traces of the two joints: b) The intersection of the joint planes in a common origin, One can see that the block reported in the upper pan of Figure $.23a is infinite (the joint planes are not intersected inside the rock mass) and the bleck of the lower pan of Figure 8.23a is finite. a The finite block theorem establishes a criterion to distinguish whether a block, is finite or infinite. The joints and the excavation face of the blocks of Figure 8.23a are shifted to. a common origin, The half-space outside the excavation face (free or empty space) is defined as a space pyramid (SP). whilst the space of the rock mass is designed as the excavation pyramid (EP). When there is more than one excavation face. the SP defining the empty space is identified by all the directions going outside the rock mass in the free space, while the ER. defining the rock mass space. is identified by all the directions inside the rock mass. The theorems which are discussed below for the cases of only one excavation 210 Rock slope stability analysis face can be,extended.to the case.of more than one excayation face. The block pyramid (BP) can then be. obtained, by the intersection.((Q) of the joint pyramid and the excavation pyramid (EP): BP=JPN EP A block is finite if and only if: JPCEP=0 This equation is cquivalent to stating that a block is finite if and only if the joint pyramid is entirely contained in the space pyramid, that is, if and only if: JP SP The joint pyramids of Figure 8.23a are represented in Figure.8.23b by the regions. which contain. the direction common.to. the two joint planes. The upper joint pyramid JP is defined by U? L2. L8 defines the excavation pyramid (EP) and Uf is. the space,pyramid (SP). Since JP is not included within SP. the upper block is infinite. The lower joint pyramid JP is defined by U? LY. L9 defines the excavation pyramid EP-and, US is the space pyramid SP. Since, in this case, JP is entirely included in SR the block is therefore finite., A finite convex block can be removable or non-removable according to its shape relative to the excavation The theorem on.the removability ofia finite, convex block (Goodman & Shi,, 1985) establishesthe necessary conditions for the removability or non-removabil- ity of a finite block. A convex block is removable if its block pyramid is empty and its joint pyramid is not empty. A, convex block is non removabl> “peredYaf its block pyramid is empty and its joint pyramid is also empty. Figure 8.24 illustrates an example, of both removable, and non-removable blocks. Block A of Figure 8.24 is determined by the half-spaces U,,.U>, Uy and Ls. If the planes which define the block are shifted to aicommon origin.(Figure 8.24a), the joint pyramid for this block (IP,) is U? U9 U9. It can be noted that there is a region common to these shifted half-spaces and therefore JP, is notempty. the block’ pyramid BP, is U? U2 U9 L2 and is empty because it is entirely _ contained inSP, Block B of Figure 8.24b is determined by the half-spaces L,, U». Uy, Ls. The, joint pyramid JP, is L2U9 US. The only point common to these shifted hatfspaces , is the origin and therefore JP, is empty. The block pyramid BP, is LU9 U9 L9and is empty because it is entirely.contained in'SP. Block A is removable, while block B is non- removable. Figure 8.25 reports an application example of the stereographic projection technique for the identification of the removable blocks in a 3-D field Sliding phenomena analysis 271 (5) -The only point common 0 0 tol u yr Up and Ly Raginn common ay? gl HB Bys Mae Uy 2 Si (2) (b) Figure §.24, Removable und non-removable blocks: a) Block A is removable: b) Block & is, non-removuble (:tfier Goodman & Shi, 1985) ON son Set * io 4 Pe LS po VrN Ges Figure 8.25. Convex rock slope and determination of the joint pyramids and of the removable blocks (after Cravero & Giani, 1988). Dips and dip directions of.the four discontinuity planes and of the avo excavation faces and the great circles representing the stereographical projections of these planes are reported in Figure 8.25 A joint pyramid: belonging to 9 given block pyramid, plots en a stereographic 272 Rock slope stability analysis projection as a region enclosed within portions of great circles. For the examined case. there are four non-parallel joint planes and therefore 3” possible blocks. created by their intersections, However, as demonstrated by Goodman & Shi, when there are more than three joint planes, a number N of possible joint blocks (Np = 2 [n= 1) +2], where mis the number of joint planes) does not appear on the stereographic projection. These V, blocks are finite because they determine empty joint pyramids. When these joint pyramids are intersected by an excavation face, the resulting block pyramids are tapered and therefore non-removable from the rock mass. The number of regions which appear on the stereographic projection is therefore Vy = nln 1) +2. In the case of the example of Figure 8.25, the number of possible therefore 14, The regions which represent the joint pyramids are identified by the combina- tions of upper or tower half-spaces of the four joint planes. The upper half-space of a plane is identified with the code 0, the lower with the code | The joint pyramid with codes 0000 corresponds, in the example of Figure 8.26, to the region which is within all the four great circles representing the four joints. The block formed by this joint pyramid lies in the upper space of all the four joint planes. The joint pyramid with codes 0101 corresponds to the region which is inside the circles representing joints | and 3 and is outside the circles representing joints 2and 4. The removable blocks satisfy criteria JP # 0 and JP. < SP. Each JP, with a code shown on the stereographic projection. is not empty, as above reported and therefore satisfies the first criterion. The second criterion for the block removabil- ity requires that the JP falls entirely inside the circles corresponding to the excavation faces (i.e. entirely contained in SP, where SP = Us U Us) The removable blocks of the example are formed with JP corresponding 10 regions 0000, 0100, 1100, 0101, 1000, 0011, 0010, 1010. jons is 8.3.4.5 Kinematic analysis of the removable blocks The analysis of the kinematic conditions for block sliding or for block lifting is cared out in order to determine the blocks for which the stability conditions needs 10 be verified The kinentatic analysis is here carried out by only considering the simple case in which the extemal resultant force is due to gravity. The kinematic conditions of detachment and lifting are therefore defined, with reference to the graphic solution. as follows: A block tends to lift when the joint pyramid w hich forms the block is the one that contains the gravity unit vector. A block can slide along the maximum dip of plane i. when the sliding direction §, satisfies the condition 3, € (JPN P,) where JP is the joint pyramid which forms the block and P; is the projection of plane i, This condition graphically occurs when one side of the JP is the circular arc Jength that contains 3,. The JP should Sliding phenomena analysis 273 also be on the side of the plane j that does not contain the gravity unit vector. A block can slide along the intersection line of two planes with the sliding direction §;, (the direction along the line of intersection that makes an acute angle with the direction of the gravity) when — The IP. which forms the block, is on the side of the plane j that does not contain §; Le. if is inside the great circle for plane j. JP must be outside the great circle for plane j: ~— IPis also on the side of the plane / that does not contain §;, The case of the example of Figure 8.25 is again considered in order to determine which blocks have the kinematic possibility of lifting or sliding The gravity force is vertical downwards; the unit vector of the gravity force projects its extremes: The first in the reference sphere center, the second at the infinite. Figure 8.26 reports, in addition to the great circles plotted for the joints and excavation faces of the previous example, the regions of the pyramids which form potentially unstable blocks. ‘The potential unstable blocks, also called key blocks, are determined by: — The joint pyramid 1111 which can lift because the correspondent region contains the unit vector of gravity; = The joint pyramid 1100 which can slide on plane — The joint pyramids 0000, 0101, 0100, 1000 which can slide in the directions 3). 81- Sy, and §, respectively. The other removable block 0011. 0010, 1010 do not have the kinematic possibility of sliding. Figure 8.26. Deiermination of the kinematic conditions for sliding or lifting of the block pyramids reported in Figure 8.25. The area of possible sliding is lined (after Cravero & Giani, 1988), 274 Rock slope stability analysis 8.3.4.6 Equilibrium regions A graphical procedure can be used in order to determine the limiting value of the friction angle able to maintain a joint pyramid, with reference to a potential kinematic sliding condition, stable. The plane sliding condition is examined with reference to the example of Figure 8.27a-b. Figure 8.27a reports the stereographic projections of the reference sphere, of the plane (P,} with a dip angle ct of 13° and a dip direction angle B of 343° and of a family of small circles, These small circles are the cones which have. as a common axis, the upward normal to the plane P, and different 6 values as aperture angles. The plane P, can be considered as representative of a set of joints with the same Figure 8.27. a) Projection of a possible sliding plane and projection of ihe cones (after Gooxtman & Shi, 1985); b) Projection of a cone with a angle of aperture and it, axis on the vertical section drawn along the deepest line of plane P,. Sliding phenomena analysis 275 ‘orientation: the region corresponding 10 the joint pyramid (JP,) U, is denoted as | and the upward normal ji, points out of the JP,. Figure 8.27 reports, on the vertical section drawn on the deepest line of the plane P), the cone with ft, axis and a generic aperture angle 6. It can be noted that for 90° of aperture, the cone projects a circle which coincides with the plane P, and for a 13° angle of aperture the cone projection point C’ goes on to infinite. The projection of the cone of 13° aperture angle separates the area containing the projection of the gravity unit vector from the area which does not contain this projection (stable area $ > @). It is also possible to extend this criterion for the stable and unstable area construction (equilibrium region) to the case in which the active resultant is not only due to gravity. The cone aperture angle which projects the small circle which divides the region containing the projection of the unit vector of the external force from the region which does not contain the esternal force defines the limit equilibrium friction angle and separates two different equilibrium condition regions. The conditions of plane sliding and of sliding along the two plane intersection line are examined with reference to the joint pyramid 000 of Figure 8.28 defined by the planes: P, (= 42°, B 120°), P, (4 = 75°, B 250°) and P; (0 = 80°. B 205°) The equilibrium regions are reported in Figure 8.28 and the method for construct- ing these regions is as follows: Figure 8.28, Equilibrium regions of the joint pyramid 000 of the example of Cravero & Giani, 1988) re 8.25 (after 276 Rock slope stability analysis I. The JP denoted with 000 is projected by using the stereographic procedure and its sides P,, are labeled by establishing the clockwise order of the sides: P,, Ps. Py, 2. The three comers of the JP are labeled C,,. and j being the indexes denoting the common sides. The corners are, in clockwise order, Cys. Cy, and Cy). The comers C;,of the JP are directions along the line of intersections of P, and P., For every intersection of planes P, and P,, there are (wo intersection points? The projection of the opposite vectors I, and -1,,. The projection of I, is inside the reference circle (the dotted circle) and is therefore directed into the upper hemisphere, -[,; is outside the reference circle and is divecied into the lower hemisphere. The three corners of the JP are therefore the stereographic projection of: Cy Cn 3. The projections (1«,) of normal vector (;) and the great circle segments connecting 1, and C,, are constructed Because the dip and the dip direction of the three joints forming the JP are Known, the vectors and great circle segments can be constructed by using a stereonet. For the examined JP: There are two great circles which pass through each couple of w; and C,, points. If te, x €, is upward directed the great circle segment must be drawn anticlockwise from w,to C,: otherwise it must be drawn clockwise The great circle segments connecting w;. and C,, are drawn using the same approach. Finally, the great circle segments connecting w', and w; are drawn proceeding in the order of the sides of the JP. For the examined JP, the great circle segments constructed according to this procedure are: W'yCyxi WyC ya: Wy Cysi WyCays HC Lepey Wy, 4. The sliding mode of each region determined by the previous construction ave identified as follows — Lifting mode is defined by the region inside the JP; this is termed ‘mode 0"; ~ Single plane sliding along plane i, in direction $,, is delimited by the spherical triangle whose comers are C,,, 1, and C,. This is termed ‘mode i”: — Double face sliding on planes i and j along direction $,, is delimited by the spherical triangle whose comers are w;, C,, and w;. This is termed ‘move i” No sliding can occur, even with zero friction on the joints, when the active resultant force projects inside the spherical polygon, whose comers are w, Ww. 1 w,. This region is denoted S In the example of Figure 8.28, plane sliding occurs on all the three joint planes 1. 2, 3 and the correspondent regions are C,y1'\C,:- Cp,sCy5 and Cy Cra. Sliding phenomena analysis 277 Double face sliding occurs along the direction of the unit vectors G3. C3, G33 and the correspondent regions are 1'5C 36"), W34C yy, WC 3h 5. The curves which represent a constant equilibrium condition are cons- tructed. These curves have the purpose of showing the friction angle value able to keep the block stable, for every possible sliding kinematism. The curves are small circles in the plane sliding regions and great circles in the double plane sliding regions. The small circles are stereographic projections of cones with the normal vector to the sliding joint plane axis and with different > value aperture angles. The great circles are the stereographic projections of planes, drawn between the two intersection points 4, (Figure 8.28) lying on the boundary between the i and j single plane sliding regions and the ij double plane sliding region. The friction angle required to maintain the block in the limiting equilibrium condition is the minimum @ value which contains the projection of the active resultant unit vector. In the simple gravitational case, this projection is infinite outside the great circle arc of the sliding plane (single plane sliding case) or of the point which projects the two plane sliding edge (double plane sliding case). This condition is given by the great circle concavity change in the single plane sliding region. One can see, by observing the example of Figure 8.28, that the friction angle value, correspondent to the block limit equilibrium condition is between 40° and 50° for region I. between 70° and 80° for region 2, about 80° for region 3, between 20° and 30° for region 12; between 70° and 80° for region 13 and between 70° and 80° for region 23 8.3.4.7 Application example An application example of the equilibrium region graphical method to a stability analysis of a rock block is developed with the purpose of illustrating the practical advantage of this technique. The same application example is developed by using the classical wedge analysis method in parametric form. Graphical solutions and wedge analysis results are compared. Figure 8.29 reports the joint pyramid and the block pyramid for two joint system cases and for three different excavation surface and joint system orienta- tion situations. The dip and dip direction of the joint planes (A. B) and of the excavation surfaces (F, S) are Case | Case 2 Case 3 Dipdi. Dip Dipdic Dip Dip dir. Dip e) ° © ©) a) A 70 130 70 40 70 B 75 240 15 310 15 F 85 185 85 185, 85 s 15 180 15 180 15. 278 Rock slope stability analysis fa) ) (ce) Figure 8.29. Joint pyramid and block pyramid for the following cases: a) A (130, 70). B (240, 75), F (185. 85). S (180, 15): B) A (130. 70). B (240, 75). F (185, 85), $ (180, 75); ¢) A (40, 70), B (310, 75), F (185, 85), 5 (180, 15). Sliding phenomena analysis 279 Figure 8.29a-c report the great circles of the two joint pianes (continuous lines), the great circles of the excavation surface planes (dotted lines), the reference circle (pointed line) and the digits denoting the three joint pyramid regions (00, 01, 10). ‘The intersection of the joint pyramid 00 with the excavation pyramid leads to three different situations for the case of Figure 8.29a-c. The intersection between the JP and the EP of Figure 8.29a gives a removable block pyramid and a potential unstable joint pyramid which can slide only along the plane | and 2 intersection line (Figure 8.30a) The intersection between JP and EP of Figure 8.29b gives an infinite block pyramid, Figure $.30b shows a pictorial view for this case; the intersection line between the joint planes does not intersect the upper excavation face. The intersection between JP and EP of Figure 8.29c gives an infinite block pyramid. Figure 8.30c reports a pictorial view for this case: the intersection line between the joint planes does not intersect the slope face. Figure 8.31 reports the equilibrium regions for the joint pyramid 00 of Figure 8.29b. One can examine 4 different potential unstable phenomena: Sliding on the joint plane 1 (Region 1); sliding on the joint plane 2 (Region 2): sliding on the intersection line between the joints 1 and 2. along the downward direction (Region | 2); lifting (Region 0). The friction angle values required for the block limit equilibrium condition are: ~ 70° for the block equilibrium of plane I; = 75° for the block equilibrium of plane 2; ~ between 55° and 60° for the block equilibrium along the intersection line of planes 1 and 2 (change of concavity of the great circles of region 12 in Figure 8.31). Table 8.1 reports the results of the stability analysis carried out with the wedge analysis limit equilibrium method on the tetrahedron delimited by the joints and by the slope faces oriented as in the case of Figure 8.29b. The results refer to a completely defined geometry block: the reported safety factors refer to sliding along the intersection line between planes | and 2. - ty Ved Figure 8.30. [niersections between the joint pyramids and the excavation pyramids reporied in Figure 8.29: a) Removable and potentially unstable block pyramid; b-c) Infinite block pyramid. 280. Rock slope stability analysis 80 Figure 8.31, Equilibrium region for the joint pyramid of Figure 8.29a, Table 8.1. Wedge stability analysis carried out using the limit equi yor plane A aplane A wof plane B 70 130.0 85.0 Kinematism; Sliding along the intersection line Factor of safety Friction angie of the A and B planes 0.307 35 0.380 30 0.461 35 0.552 40 0.658 45 0.784 50 0.940 55 1.140 60 Lath 65 Sliding phenomena analysis 281 The limiting condition for the equilibrium (F = |) is determined, as in the block theory application case, for a friction angle value between 55° and 60°. 8.4 PROBABILISTIC METHODS 8.4.1 Introduction Several uncertainties exist in the estimation of the stability condition of a slope. These uncertainties may depend on the strength and geometric parameter estima- tion and the estimation model used. The first uncertainty is due to the spatial variability of the material properties and the uncertainty in their measurements The second is due to the reliability of the hypothesis carried out 1o model rock mass mechanical behaviour. In the case, for example, where the limit equilibrium method is applied to the stability of a tetrahedral rock solid, which has the kinematical possibility of sliding along the two intersection discontinuity plane lines, the estimation values of ihe discontinuity plane shear strength and of the water pressures uncertainties belong 10 the first type, the uncertainties due to the stability analysis method hypothesis belong to the second type. Moreover, the uncertainties in the estima- tion of the sliding discontinuity plane orientations belong to the first type. The rock mass modelling approximations, for example, those which consider the rock block rigid, affects the safety factor estimation and belongs to the second type. The assumption of a rigid block or of a simplified rock geometry may, in particular, lead to bias errors in the safely factor estimation A slope stability probabilistic analysis has the task of quantitatively taking both these source uncertainty types into account. A probabilistic analysis is based on a correct randomness determination of the parameters affected by uncertainties in estimation and is therefore based on the determination of the probability density function of cach of the random variables which governs the stability problem. It should to be pointed out that the task of determining the probability density function is more difficult for rock joint strength parameters than for enginecring material parameters such as concrete or steel. Probabilistic techniques are therefore usually applied to concrete and steel structure analyses whilst they are not yet standardized in the rock mechanics field. Rock mass mechanical characterization includes different levels and types of uncertainties. Increasing the number of surveys and measurements does not lead to the elimination of these uncertainties. Morever, the costs may not be practicable forall kinds of siope analysis problems. The problem of the determination of the scale effect on the peak discontinuity shear strength can remain unresolved. even when ‘in situ’ shear tests have been carried out with prohibitive costs. The choice of different function types for the probability density curves (Gaussian. log-normal, etc.) can ead to different magnitude order results of the 282 Rock slope stability analysis probability associated to the very low instability risk which could be considered as acceptable for the examined problem. The accuracy of an experimental probability density distribution depends on the number of observations. Geometrical features of rock discontinuities such as. spacing. orientation and persistence are gathered at lower cosis than shear strength features of discontinuities Besides the probability density distribution of the parameters which governs the slope stability problems and which is considered as a random variable, a probabilistic analysis model requires the knowlege or the reliable estimation of: — The independence of the random variables or the correlation between random variables (such as strength parameters. in particular in the case of the non-linear shear strength criterion assumption): = The spatial variability of the random variables including the autocorrelations and hence the use of geostatistic techniques (as discussed in Chapter 6); = The slope stability analysis model There are several basic approaches to carry out a probabilistic analysis of a slope stability problem (Mostyn & Small, 1987): = Methods including the probability distribution of the random variables in the equilibrium equations of the analysis madel: = Approximate analysis methods; ~ Monte Carlo simwlation method applied to standard limiting equilibrium procedures: ~ Fuzzy methodology: This methodology is not a strict probalistie methodo- logy approach, since it does not respect the axioms of the probability theory. Itis also important, from an engineering point of view, to decide the probability of an unstable event realization which can be accepted in a slope excavation design or in a natural slope analysis For the civil engineering of rock or soil structures, a notional zero probability of failure is often required. This requirement can be impossible in rigorous terms of zero probability and in addition often leads to a very cautious design. On the other hand, as pointed out by Mostyn & Smal! (1987), Shulize (1979) and ‘Tabba (1984), there have been a surprisingly large number of soil and rock structure failures. In contrast to civil engineering applications. the probabilistic approach to slope design has been more favourably accepted for several years in the mining engineering field. both for the short term character of the excavation and for the economic aspect (Young, 1977; Herget. 1978; MacMahon. 1971). The major interaction between mining and civil engineering has recently led to a remarkble development of probabilistic approaches in slope stability analysis. 8.4.2 Stability indexes Safety factor F has been defined as the ratio between the maximum available Sliding phenomena analysis 283 demand \ (a) ————» (b) ve we smec-d Figure 8.32. ») Probubility density distribution of capacity C and demand D; b) Probability density distribution of the SM safety margin resistant forces and the mobilized resistant forces (these last forces coincide with the 50 called sliding or active forces). By letting the maximum available resistant forces be defined as capacity C and the stiding forces as demand D. the C and D quantities will be random variables since most of the parameters which determine the D and C values are known with a ceriain aleatoriety degree. The difference between the random variables C and D is called the safety margin SM (SM = C ~D) and will also be a random variable (Figure 8.32). The dotted area inside the probability density curve (Figure 8.326) denates the probability that the random variable SM £ 0 (instability event), The instability probability given by C -D <0 is expressed as: P,= P((C-D) <0) =P(SM <0) The reliability index R is defined as: R ~Py 8.4.3 Monte Carlo method ‘The name Monte Carlo was given to the method, because. before computers were introduced, the ‘roulette’ represented one of the easiest and known methods of generating random numbers, 284 Rock slope stability analysis The principal characteristic of the Monte Carlo method is that of generating a large quantity of random numbers varying between 0 and 1. The examined problem variables are generated by these random numbers in such a way as to respect the assumed probability distribution curves. These curves can also be histograms, set up according to experimental data results A Monte Carlo method simulation can be carried out in order (0 determine the probability density distribution of a safety factor or of a safety margin. Monte Carlo simulations are commonly adopted to solve problems that are not easily solved by analytical means. The Monte Carlo procedure is carried out following these steps: 1. A deterministic method, such as the limit equilibrium method, is chosen and used to relate the safety factor or the safely margin as being dependent on parameters of the problem which should be modelled probabilistically (these parameters can be. for example, the shear strength features or/and the sliding plane orientation). 2. The probability density distribution obtained from experimental data mea- surements can be constructed in a histogram form (Figure 8.33). In the case, for instance, of plane sliding stability analysis, the dip angle of the sliding plane can be the random variable. 3. The cumulative disiribution is constructed for each random variable proba- bility density distribution. This cumulative curve can be drawn, by dividing, for instance. the variation field of each probabilistic parameter into ten intervals, in such a way that an increasing value between 0 and | corresponds to each central value of these intervals (Figure 8.33). 4, Random valves are generated and the correspondent values of the random variables are determined (Figure 8.33). In the case of the example, random values varying in the 0-I field are generated and for each generation, the correspondent dip angle is determined. 5. The random variable values obtained by the random generation are used as 36 one 9 1S 25 35 45 585 65 (b) m of the plane inclination (a) and its Figure 8.33, Example of a probability density hist cumulative distribution (b). Sliding phenomena analysis 285 input data for the determination of the correspondent safety factor with the chosen deterministic method. 6. The operation described in points 4 and 5 are repeated until a stable distribution of the safety factor or safety margin probability density is obtained. A reliable number of generations should be as much as to allow the distribution to be stable according to the designed approximation degree. The distribution stability can be controlled by means of the comparison between two probability density distributions obtained with different generation numbers. The X° test can be used for this purpose This method is simple and versatile to apply even though the generation number needed to reach the stability of the distribution requires computer use (the case in which the required generation number is greater than 1000 is not unusual) Hammersley & Handscomb (1964) treated the problem of the number of genera- tions and error margin in the Monte Carlo method application in detail 8.4.4 Rosenblucth point estimate method Like the Monte Carlo method, the point estimate method uses a deterministic procedure. The method was given by Rosenblueth (1975, 1981) and proposed by Harr (1981) for the solution of geomechanical problems. The method allows one to use several correlated random variables given by their two or three first statistical moments (mean. standard deviation, skewness) (o obtain results ex- pressed in terms of the first statistical moments of the examined parameter (the safety factor or the safety margin in the slope stability problem case). The method was initially limited to a three correlated variable analysis and its extension to any number of correlated or independent random variables has been criticized (Rosenblueth, 1981; Bolle ct ai., 1987) The principles and the procedure of the point estimate method are here given (Bolle et al., 1987) The distribution of a random variable x, is concentrated in two particular points located at x,, = m; + 6; and x,_ = m,— 0; m; being the mean value of x; and G; the standard deviation of the x; distribution. ‘The probabilities associated to these points are P, and P_, which are functions of the non-synimetry of the distribution In the case of N correlated variables (for example: N= 2 and ¢ and @ are the two variables), the 2” estimate points are located in each combination of the 2.x, and x,_ values (wo correlated random variables x7, and x9: Xygs.Nogi Urge V5 Thole! x.) and the 2" probabilities associated to these points are functions of the panial correlations of the variables. The deterministic procedure (in this case for the safety factor or for the safety margin determination) is carried out for these 2 sets of values (for any determina- tion, one set of vaiues is introduced as input values). One can estimate the first statistical moments of the resulting parameters by oblaining 2” sets of results 286 Rock slope stability analysis 8.4.5 Application example Let the parameters considered as random variables in the slope stability problem be the cohesion ¢ and the friction angle $ on a sliding plane surface (Figure 8.34), The slope safety factor is obtained by means of a deterministic procedure and depends onc and 6(F = F(c, 9)). Let the distribution of the random variables ¢ and 6 be symmetrical and let m(c). 1(), 6(c) and o($) be the mean values and the standard deviations of the cohesion and friction angle distributions respectively. The points on which the two random variable distributions are concentrated are: ¢, =1(c) + O(c), ¢_= (©) = G(¢), 9, = 2(9) + 5() and b_ = m(9) - 0(9). The safety factor mean value is given as: MF) = ALF le,. 4) + F(Cy 9.) + FEC 04) + FC OD), the standard deviation value of the probability density function of F is given as: OF) = ALFC 4 4) + FCC. 0) + PC.) + PCE OPS c¢ (MPa) 2.0 1.5 ls 4 1 0.8 (2) L as (b) 3234 75 38 40 ee) Figure 8.34. a) Plane sliding: b) Correlation between ¢ and ¢ (after Rosenblueth, 1985). Figure 8.35. Concentration points of the probability density function given in Section 8.4.5. Sliding phenomena analysis 287 where F(c,. 6,), for example, is the safety factor value obtained by introducing the ¢, and 6, values as input data for the cohesion and the friction angle into safety factor deterministic expression. If the ¢ and @ variables are correlated and r is their correlation coefficient (Figure 8.34). the estimate points of the probability density function are given in Figure 8.35. 8.4.6 Conditioned probability and Bayes theorem The applications of the stability problem study carried out by using a probabilistic approach can give good results when the design can be updated on the basis of the experimental measurements obtained during work. The reinforcing slope works carried out in different time stages can also be better calibrated if control measurement results are progressively gathered. Probabilistic approaches are required in the rock mechanics field since the survey and measurement data are not uniquivocally interpretable and do not completely avoid the randomness of the parameters governing the slope stability problem. ‘The probability of an event can be conditioned by a previously obtained event. In order to show an example clarifying the applicability of the slope stability analysis probabilistic approach which takes conditioned probability into account, some probability theory concepts are here briefly given Let A and B be two events: The probability that A occurs once B has occurred is indicated as P[A/B] and is called the conditioned probability of A. in the hypothesis that B has occurred P(A/B] is defined as: P[A/B] = P[AB|/P[B] or alternatively as P[AB] = P[A/B] - P[B] where P[AB] indicates the probability that both A and B occur and P(B) is the marginal probability that B occurs. The probability of the simultaneous realization of two events (intersection) is equal to the product of the first event probability for the conditioned second event probability, This concept can be extended to any number of events. In the case of three events A, B and C: P(ABC] = PA] - P(B/A] - PIC/AB] where P[C/4B] is the C event realization probability once events A and B have already occurred. In the case of a number N of events (multiplication rule): PUA\Ag- «Ay = PIA\]- PIAg/Ay] - PIA3/AyAg] «. [PAy/AAy. «Ay a] If the N events Ay, Ay... , Ay are incompatible (for instance, the realization of event A, excludes the possibility of the subsequent realization of event A,) and collectively include all the possibilities: 288 Rock slope stability analysis ¥ DPlad= | If the realization of event B is precedeed or caused by one of the A; events, without knowing which A, event itis, the realization of B is called an ‘a posteriori event” The realization of an A, event is called an ‘a priori’ event The realization of B which is joined with the realization of one of the A; events is given as: y P\8)= LPAe) and by applying the multiplication role, the above expression becomes (total probability theorem): P(8]=PIB/A,]- P(A\) + PIB/A3}- PAs +... M + PIB/(Ay] PLAy] = > PIB/A)- PIA) ai The B realization probability is modified once the A; realization is known. By using the conditioned probability expression (Bayes theorem] one obiains: x PIA,/B) = (PLA) PIBIAM / 1 P(B/A,) PIA} i 8.4.7 Application example A Bayes theorem application example proposed by Marr (1981) is here reported The example is slightly modified, since it has been adapted to a slope stability problem. The upper part of a quarry excavation slope is made up of a morenic deposit. The designed average slope angles of the quarry rock and of the morenic deposit are logically very different and the exploitation activity involves excavation of the morenic material with tree and vegetation asportation (Figure 8.36). These operations cause further costs and technical difficulties for future land reclama- tion. ‘An important problem for the quarry design is the geometrical identification of the contact plane between the morenic deposit and the exploited rock mass. Atthe distance of SO m from the stope face, a 0.5 probability of finding the rock mass at a 15 m depth has been assessed on the basis of the orientation of the discontinuities surveyed on the rock exposure, A 0.5 probability of not finding the rock mass at this depth. is therefore assessed. A Grilling carried out in the morenic deposit, by means of mine role foil, came accross a material more resistant than the morenic material at a depth of 15 m from the top slope level. The drilling was then interrupted at this depth. The Sliding phenomena analysis 289 Ndrilling Figure 8.36. Rock excavation face und morenic cover, presence of this resistant material at this depth can be due to finding the rock mass contact or even to a large morenic block. The probability of a large morenic block having becn found has been assessed equal to 0.3 It is necessary (0 update the probability of the rock mass contact, at a 1S m depth, on the basis of this event occurring (the result of destructive drilling). The Bayes formula is used for this purpose, once the different probability types have been defined. P (interruption/rock] = P{//R] =0.5 P \interruption/block] = P[//B) = 0.5 P [rock| = P|R) =0.7 P iblock) = P[B) =0.3 P [interruption due to the rock contact] = P[R//] = (PUI/R]- PIR]] / {PU/R)- PLR] + PUI/B) - PLB] =0.7 Itis important to point out that the proposed example does not have the purpose of illustrating or suggesting a real practical case application, but only ta show that it is possible to gather and utilize apparently useless information. 8.4.8 Fi y set theory The fuzzy set theory is an ordinary set theory generalization. While an ordinary set is defined as a collection of objects which have some common properties, a fuzzy set is defined as an object collection belonging to a set according to a membership degree that is usually quantified with a number varying in a 0-1 range. ‘A qualitative judgement on an object feature can be expressed by means of a correspondent quantitative value able to give to this object its membership degree to an object set which has this type of feature. If itis required, for example, to define a class of a very weathered rack mass, it is necessary to previously answer the question: ‘How weathered must the 290 Rock slope stability analysis weathered rock mass be?" and the answer to this question can be given by a subjective judgement. The very weathered rock mass class is then delimited by an imprecise and vague boundary which represents a fuzzy set, since it allows the rock mass of this class to have different weathering degrees and a different membership degree to the class. Descriptive words referring to a plastic or fragile behaviour or phrases such as “intensely weathered rocks’ can be, by means of the fuzzy set theory, numerically treated or interpreted by using membership functions or linguistic variables that the membership functions serve to describe. The fuzzy set theory has been utilized in rock mechanics in decisional system making set ups (Lin & Fairhurst, 1988), in rock mass classification index evaluation (Nguyen. 1985b; Nguyen & Ashworth, {985) or in rock slope stability analysis (Sakurai & Shimizu, 1987). 8.4.9 Rock slope stability analysis application The geometrical and physico-mechanical features which can be known with a certain aleatoriety degree (for example: Shear sirength parameters, sliding plane orientation, etc.) are considered as fuzzy instead of random, when described by subjective engineering judgement, The fuzzy methodology is used for fuzzy defined variables. The probabilistic approach is used for random variables. A fuzzy number can be defined as a quantity, known in an imprecise way with approximatively the value M (or Af as in the symbology proposed by Dubois & Prade. 1980). A number which approximately has the value of 2 is defined. for instance, by the function drawn in Figure 8.37a. The membership function assigns a degree between 0 and | to the objects belonging (o the fuzzy set. Figure 8.37a shows that 2 belongs to the fuzzy number, approximately equal to 2, with a membership degree of 1, whilst 1.7 belongs to the fuzzy number, approximately equal to 2, with a membership degree of 0.7. Sakurai & Shimizu (1987) treats a membership function of a fuzzy number M by representing it with 4 parameters: M = (iy... m3. m,) (Figure 8.37b). Shear strengih parameters can be treated as fuzzy numbers (c. 9) and can be represented as in Figure 8.37c-d. A single plane sliding case in a triangular rock slope has been examined (Figure 8.38); the safety factor has been given, by using the limit equilibrium method, as: F =(c-A +W cos tan 9) / (Wsin a) The safety factor can be obtained as a fuzzy number, by using the above quoted F expression and the fast computation formula proposed by Dubois & Prade (1980): Sliding phenomena analysis 291 ee f 5 sei Hy 2Z 6 33 m1 3 £¢ yt & I 5 8) — ~ —— > 23 25 80 25 19 128 150 (a) cohesion, c(Kpa) (c) 1 1 | = = ce ‘oe 52 S38 10 20 30.40 50 60 friction angle, *(") (b) (a) Figure 8.37, Membership degree of a quantity (0 3 fuzzy number. Figure 8.38, Plane sliding on a slope. Wsinw cxA + Wcos tan 6. Wsina where the above reported four F expressions inside the parenthesis correspond to the m, my, mts and m, numbers required for the fuzzy number M membership function representation, The safety factor, expressed as a fuzzy number, is graphically reported in Figure 8.39. It is then possible, at this point, to come back to the initial language, such as that of the qualitative or the subjective engineering judgement. Sakurai & Shimizu proposed defining a slope stability class on the basis of the 292 Rock slope stability analysis 21 2 3 Figure 8.39. Example of the membership 5 7 degree of the safely factor to a fuzzy safety factor — number. 1 ! 1 t a 1 1 2 i ee \ ao Y 1 $3 ! i 22 ; I & 20 — off —:__\__, 1 safety 1 safety a (b) (a) factor factor , ) : i ‘ ol : > safety ~ safety factor factor {c) (3) Figure 8.40. Rock stability class: a) Unstable; b) Scarse: c) Fair; d) Stable (after Sakurai & Shimizu, 1987) obtained safety factor fuzzy sets. Figure 8.40 reports the proposed rock stability class membership functions. 8.5 CONCLUDING REMARKS ON THE GRAPHICAL METHODS IN ROCK SLOPE STABILITY ANALYSIS Equal-area and equal-angle spherical projections are used to represent joint planes. to individuate potential sliding kinematisms and to determine safety factors of potentially unstable rock blocks. In rock mechanics technical literature, wedge analysis vectorial methods use the equal-area projection to visualize rock slope stability problems (Hoek & Bray, 1981), whilst the block theory (Goodman & Shi, 1985) uses the equal-angle projection both for the same purpose and to individuate key blocks. Sliding phenomena analysis 293 \ slope face. reference sfere 32. Bo 218.0 = slope face tb) Figure 8.41. a) Equal-area spherical projection of the joint sets K,, K, and of the excavation face: b) Equal-angle projection of the joint sets K. Ky and of the excavation face and upper excavation face. Figure 8.41a-b report the spherical projection of two discontinuity planes (K, and K;) surveyed in a rock slope and of the excavation planes for the same slope stability example. These planes are represented in equal-area projections in Figure 8.41a and in equal-angle in Figure 8.41b. For stability analysis, the solid rock bounded by the discontinuity planes K and 294 Rock slope stability analysis Ky and by the slope faces, are examined. The solids rocks which are examined are: a) The solid rock which lies above plane K;, and plane K's; b) The solid rock which lies above plane K; and below plane K Both the a) and b) solid rocks lie below the two slope faces. Solid rock a) is represented by the dotted area of Figure 8.41b (equal-angle projection) whilst solid b) is represented by the pointed area. Solid rock a) can be visualized, in Figure 8.41a, as the solid which tends to slide along the K. K, plane intersection line, while solid b) can be visualized as the solid which tends to slide on plane K, An examination of the equal-angle projection of Figure 8.41b allows one to make the following remarks: = Solid rock a) docs not have the possibility of sliding, since the area representing the solid is not inside the zone bounded by the excavation faces (the area inside the two slope face great circles which represents the convex slope SP = U, U U,, excavation face + upper excavation face); = Solid rock b) has the possibility of sliding since the area representing the solid is completely inside the great circles representing the slope faces. In the author's opinion these conclusions, determined by the equal-angle spherical projection examination, are not so clear if equal-area projection is used and only vectorial equation use allows one to determine rock solid potential sliding kinematisms. CHAPTER 9 Dynamic equilibrium equation method 9.1 METHOD OF ANALYSIS This chapter deals with the dynamic stability analysis method for rock slopes. Several ways of approaching this problem have been proposed in rock mechanics literature. The methods can be subdivided into empirical (Hoek, 1976), analytical and numerical methods. Only analytical and numerical methods are dealt with in this chapter. The examined numerical method is the Distinct Element Method (DEM). The DEM incorporates the dynamic equilibrium equations of the blocks which form the rock mass in the numerical procedure. For this reason the DEM is well suited both for static and dynamic analysis. The analytical methods can be subdivided into the pseudostatic and dynamic method (overall displacement method). Both methods are here dealt with 9.2. DISTINCT ELEMENT METHOD 9.2.1 Introduction The Distinct Element Method (Cundall, 1971) can be applied to the mechanical behaviour analysis of a system of rock blocks. The principal difference between the DEM features and other discontinuous medium method features, such as the Goodman & Shi block theory, discussed in the previous chapter are (Hart et al., 1988): 1. The blocks can be subjected to large rotations and large displacements and each movement is relative to the other block movements; 2. The block interacting forces create a blocky system geometry modifica- tion; 3. The solution procedure is explicit in the time domain. The principal advantages of the DEM application for slope stability problems are as follows: 296 Rock slope stability analysis 1, It is possible to model both stable rock masses or unstable rock masses. When a block is subjected to an unbalanced force, it accelerates, by moving towards a new position. When a force equilibrium is determined, the system can be considered as being in a resting equilibrium or in a constant velocity move- ment. 2. The forces are generated between blocks in contact. Overlapping bewween blocks in contact is possible, from a numerical simulation point of view. This overlapping is smal} if compared with the block sizes. 3. The computation sequence, between u blocky system state and the subse- quent state occurs for small time increments. The final solution is reached when a stable equilibrium or a uniform continuous motion situation is determined. The method was set up for the 2-D problem analysis, but it has also been developed for the 3-D problem analysis (Cundall, 1988) in order to describe, more realistically, the mechanical behaviour of discontinuous rock masses. The numerical formulation of the method was coded in a computer program (Cundal] & Hart, 1985) which takes into account the blocky system geomeiry, by considering polyhedral blocks. These blocks are divided into constant strain thetrahedra in order to simplify computation. Every thetrahedron is discretized by using a ‘finite difference’ grid scheme. The blocky system geometry of a DEM model can be constructed by using, on the basis of rock mass discontinuity features (Chapter 3), a joint network technique, such as one of those discussed in Chapter 6, or can be generated by using specific computer programmes (Lemos, 1987; Baroudi et al., 1990). 9.2.2 Theoretical formulation of the method The theoretical formulation of the method is here illustrated with reference to the 2-D problem analysis. The problem domain is divided into a system of blocks (Figure 9.1, Plate 9.1) The block gcometry is defined by spacing, persistence and orientation of rock mass discontinuities. A block can interact or detach from the adjacent blocks. The fundamental equations of the method are: Figure 9.1. Distinct Element Method model examples (after Homand-Etienne e Dynamic equilibrium equation method 297 3 SS ROR Ske mules Plate 9.1. The rock slope site described by the madel of Figure 9.1. By F. Homand-Etienne. — The force-displacement law which relates the forces developed at block contact to the relative displacements; = The motion equation which defines the motion of each block, such as that due to unbalanced forces acting on the block ‘The solution procedure is explicit in the time domain. The term explicit refers to the fact that the unknown quantities of the system equation are given as known term functions and hence the system solution does not require transposition, elimination or back substitution procedure use or iterative technique use, as in an implicit formulation. In an explicit formulation use, a finite time is required for information to propagate through a system of blocks. The time interval has to be chosen small enough so that information passes between neighboring blocks at a speed less than is physically possible and the numerical procedure must be stable. The main disadvantage of the explicit method is the small time step: On one hand the time step value is connected to the block masses and the discontinuity stiffnessess, on the other hand, explicit procedure allows one large displacements and non-linear or postelastic behaviour discontinuous structures with no addi- tional computing effort. 9.2.3. Block deformability Blocks may be rigid or deformable. In several applications, such as in the largest 298 Rock slope stability analysis part of the rock slope stability problems, the deformation of the single block can be neglected. In the other cases, the block deformability can be considered. Two numerical techniques can be used for these purposes, In the first case the blocks are termed “simply-deformable” and each block is allowed three degrees of freedom to deform internally. In the second case the blocks are termed ‘fully-deformable’ and an arbitrary deformation of blocks is permitted through intemal block discretization in finite differences zones. The fully-deformable blocks are internally discretized in finite difference triangles, The vertices of these triangles are finite difference gridpoints and the motion equation can be written for each gridpoint as follows: {, onjds +F, sot 4g; m where sis the surface enclosing the mass n! lumped at the gridpoint; n, is the unit normal to s; F, is the resultant of all the extemal forces applied to the gridpoint; g, is the gravitational acceleration. Strains and rotations refer, for each time step, to the model displacement, as: “A 8, = Ali; + i) 6. = VACit,.— 6 = Ali; Gp) Since incremental quantities are treated, it has to be pointed out that the above reported law does not imply a restriction as far as small strains are concerned. The constitutive laws are applied to the deformable block in incremental form, in such a way as to be easily implemented for non linear problem analysis. In the elastic field: Avy=)de,8; + 21de, where A and [J are the Lamé constants; Arjare the elastic increments of the stress tensor; Ae, are the incremental strains; A€, is the increment of volumetric strain and 8, is the Kronecker delta function {if i , otherwise itis nil}. Non-linear and post-peak sirength behaviour law models can be readily incor porated into the mathematical formulation of the procedure. In an explicit formulation, after each time step, the strain state in each zone is computed and the correspondent stress state must be computed in order to proceed to the next time step. The stresses are uniquely defined by the stress-strain model for each linear-elastic, non-linear and post-peak strength constitutive model. 9.2.4 Discominuity behaviour model The discontinuity deformability and strength features are represented by spring slider systems with prescribed force-displacement relationships, which allow the Dynamic equilibrium equation method 299 Figure 9.2. Schematization of the mechanical behaviour of discontinuities (after Cundatl & Han, 1985). fa) (b) (b) {c) (a) fe) Figure 9.3. Geometry of block contacts: a) Comer to edge; b) Edge to edge: c) Length of the contact: é) Rounding of the contact comer (¢ = center, d= length af the rounded comer); e) Different types of contact between blocks (after Cundall & Hart, 1985). evaluation of shear and normal forces between blocks (Figure 9.2a). The over- lapping penetration amount between two adjacent blocks can be determined by knowing the block geometry and the block centroid translation and rotation. ‘The force-displacement relationship which can be used is: where AF, and AF, are the incremental normal and shear forces; Au, and Aw, are the incremental normal and tangential displacements and K,, and K, are the normal and shear discontinuity stiffnessess (Figures 9.2b and 9.3a). 300 Rock slope stability analysis The contact between two block edges (in 2-D fields, block edges substitute block faces) can be schematized by the two comer edge contacts (Figure 9.3b). The contact length ] can be obtained as: 6, =F/l 1, = Fil whilst the stress increments can be obtained in terms of the discontinuity stiffnessess expressed in the [FI-2] units as: Ao, = k, Au; 1,=kAu, 9.1) In the case of fully deformable blocks, some finite difference gridpoints, which discretize block zones, may be placed along the original edge positions (Figure 9.3¢). These gridpoints can be treated as new comers, since the block edge becomes able to deform into a polygonal line. The expression for the stress increment calculation does not change. The overlapping block (Figure 9.3a-b) is only a mathematical way of comput- ing relative norma) displacernents. If discontinuity normal stiffness is increased, the overlap displacement decreases. The stress increments, determined at cach time step with Equations 9.1, are added to the previous stresses and the constitutive criteria are checked in the non-elastic field. If ano-tension material with a shear strength behaviour (given by the Coulomb criterion) is assumed, 0,<0 |t,| =c-o, tan (positive stresses are tensile stresses). The discontinuity shear behaviour can be assigned in such a way that the stress increments depend on the displacement increments, on the current stresses and on other shear behaviour parameters (JRC and JCS, if Barton criterion is assumed) do, At, = fiAu,, Au, 6, T,--.) The comers of the blocks are easier schematized as being. rounded in numerical application (Figure 9.3d). In real situations, comer blocks may be crushed by a squeezing contact with a block edge or with another corner block. A geometrical schematization of a rectangular comer could lead, in a numerical modelling, to infinite stress values at the comers causing difficult to treat singularities. A further problem in the block motion modelling is the updating of the different contact types for each time step. In the numerical modelling, the assemblage technique has to include the new contacts and to eliminate the contacts lost during telative block movements, Dynamic equilibrium equation method 301 Figure 9.3e shows different types of contacts between blocks for the 2-D case. These contacts are called domains, 9.2.5 Mation equations The magnitude and the direction of the resultant off balance moment and forces acting on an individual block determine the motion of the block. The motion equation of a block is described by the translation and the rotation of the block around its centroid. If a varying with time force F() is considered to be acting on a single mass, the Newton second law of motion can be written in the form: dinlor=F]/m (9.2) The central difference scheme can be written, at the times, for the left-hand side of Equation 9.2 as: Bie HAD gt) aU and by substituting the correspondent terms of Equation 9.3 to the left-hand side of Equation 9.2, one obtains: iru (9.3) MD 4 F()/im- At If the velocities at the half-time step are stored (central difference scheme) it is possible to express the time / + Ar displacement as: OD a lg ff S2D ap where (1) is the displacement obtained from the previous step and is known Figure 9.4 shows the central difference scheme and the F, u, 1, id calculation cycle used in the distinct element formulation. The velocity equations, in the case of several forces acting on the blocks Figure 9.4. Central difference calculation scheme. As the forces depend on the displace- ments, the calculation starts at — //2 with it 302 Rock slope stability analysis (gravity included), are: SFO m TM +A) = QUOD 4, At HEF BUDD yf) 4 +e, /Ar (9.4) where 6 is the angular velocity of the block about the centroid; / is the moment of inertia of the block and i, are the velocity components of the block centroid The updated velocities obtained by Equations 9.4 are used to determine the new biock location: OM 300 4 OSD y Of +812) = Q 4 t+ 4 ar where 6, is the rotation of the block around its centroid and x, are the coordinates of the block centroid. A new block position is determined for each iteration and new contact forces are generated. The resulting forces and moments are used to calculate linear and angular acceleration of each block. Block velocities and block displacements are deter- mined by means of the integration over incremental time steps. The procedure is repeated till a satisfactory equilibrium state or an instability mode is reached. 9.2.6 Calculation sequence In the completely explicit calculation scheme which proceeds with time incre- ments, the principal computation cycle consists of the application of the motion law to all the mass points. Subsequently, the force increments are determined. These increments are obtained for all the contacts and the continuous zones from the displacement increments by applying the assigned force-displacement law. The calculation cycle is developed for all the blocks through the following phases: 1. Accelerate centroid determination from the acting force-sums. 2. Accelerate grid-point miass determination from the intemal and boundary forces for deformable blocks. 3. Comer velocity and displacement updating. 4. Application of the new relative velocities to surrounding contacts. 5. Resetting the force sums. ‘The calculation cycle is developed for all the contacts through the following phases 1. Contact force updating: This operation is carried out by using the behaviour law which relates these forces to the relative contact velocity. Dynamic equilibrium equation method 303 2. Determination of the force sums in the centroids and in the gridpoints 3. Computation of strain rates and subsequently of the new stresses and of the corresponding gridpoint forces. 9.2.7 Stotie analysis In static problem solutions, a damping has to be used to dissipate vibrational energy and allow the system to converge to a steady state situation, without indefinite oscillations. Two forms of viscous damping have been proposed for the distinct element formulation: A mass proportional damping and a stiffness proportional damping. The mass proportional damping has an effect similar to that of a block system drawn in a viscous fluid (i.e. a damping of the motion relative to the reference structure). The stiffness proportional damping is physically equivalent to that produced by dashpols across contacts. These dashpots allow the dumping of the relative motion of the block. ‘The dashpots across the contacts work both in the normal direction and in the shear direction; the dashpots working in a shear field are disactivated during sliding. Both damping types can be separately and jointly used. The mass proponional damping is useful in low frequency motion reduction, where the whole blocky system ‘sloshes" from side to side. The stiffness proportional damping is more effective for the high frequence noise of the individual blocks when blocks ‘rattle’ against the neighbouring blocks. From a physical point of view, the mass proportional damping can be in- terpreted as a viscous dashpot set connected to each block centroid. The dashpots generate a force opposing the block velocity and is proportional to both the velocity and block mass, The motion equation which takes the viscous damping into account, can be written as: di1/dt=F m—air=g where ais the damping constant. A new finite difference equation can be written as: yee Flt Mid 5 pft-anry ar M 2 and by considering that the damping force is centered at time #, one obtains: pur HT ~ (a 12) + (FIM + gl 1+aAt/2 il The rotations are damped in the same way. 304 Rock slope stability analysis 9.2.8 Boundary element representation for zones distant from the examined area ‘The Boundary Element Method (BEM) is a suitable too! for the DEM model of boundary zones. The BEM method is usually performed for elastic field analysis and the BEM model, in the application which is joined to the DEM or FEM method, is used to discretize those zones of the rock structures where the rock mass behaviour is not elasto-plastic or elasto-fragile. Numerical modelling in which two different numerical methods were applied to a rock structure analysis (FEM and BEM, DEM and BEM) have been carried out by different authors such as Brady & Wassyng (1981) or Lemos (1983) The region, on which the BEM method is applied, is represented by a stiffness matrix K which relates the forces and the displacements at the interface of the two domains (that analyzed with DEM and that with BEM), BEM solutions are analytical and can be that of an infinite plane or that of a half-plane. The elastic modulus of the BEM region has to be assigned according to the equivalent deformability of the blocky system. The block motion defines the displacements at the interface, at every time step. The BEM coupling gives the elastic reaction forces on the boundary which are given by: Fo-ku 9.2.9 Coupled problems The distinct element methad has been applied to the fully-coupled mechanical- hydraulic analysis. The coupling is given by: 1) A law which states the relation- ship between the hydraulic contact (joint conductivity) and the mechanical deformation, 2) The dependence of the mechanical problem on the Buid pressure in the contacts (joints). The problem is analyzed both in the fully-saturated domain condition and in the uniform pressures in the modellized domains. The fluid flow is determined by the pressure difference in the adjacent domains. ‘The flow rate is calculated in two different ways depending on the type of contact. In the point contact case (i.e. comer-edge or comer-comer), the flow rate is: qa-kAp where k, is a contact permeability parameter. In the distributed contact case (ie. contact edge to edge) the flow rate computation can be carried out by using the fracture cubic flow law (eventually modified according to the empirical formulation discussed in Chapter 5). The cubic law can be expressed, with reference to the blocky system, as: q=-ka* dpi Dynamic equilibrium equation method 305 where kj is a joint permeability coefficient, a is the contact hydraulic aperture and Tis the contact length. The hydraulic aperture is given during the computation steps, as: a=a,+da where a, is the aperture at zero normal stress and Aa is the mechanical change in aperture due (o the normal contact displacement. A minimum value, called a,,., is assumed for the aperture, The mechanical closure does not influence the contact permeability below the value assumed for res The flow rates through the contacts are computed, at every time step, on the basis of the above quoted formulations. Subsequently, the domain pressure and the possible change of the domain areas which are due to the motion of the surrounding blocks are updated according to the joint flow network. The updated domain pressures are expressed as: P=P, +k, QSUA-k,AATA,, where p, is the previous domain pressure, k,, is the bulk modulus of the flow, Q is the sum of flow rates into the domain from all the surrounding contacts: BA=A-A, A, =(A+A,)/2 where A and A, are, respectively, the previous and the updated demain areas. The updated domain pressures are then added to the forces which have been applied to the block faces which limit the domains, This procedure determines the effective normal stresses on all the contacts and the total stresses, in the imperme- able blocks. The fivid low numeric algorithm stability requires that, for slow domain area variations, the maximum time step is limited to: Ad = min (A/(,, LA) where min [:] indicates the minimum value of the term included within the square parenthesis and the sum of k; is extended to all the contacts surrounding the domain (k; being = max [k,, k;a°/I]). The At value is assumed to be the analysis time step when it is lower than the corresponding minimum mechanical problem time step. In the case of edge to edge contact, the domain area is given by the product of the contact length for the contact aperture. Since the minimum value “,.. of the contact aperture is positive, the domain area is always positive. From the numerical solution point of view, a minimum value for the domain area can be selected for computation efficiency. A high value of the contact permeabilities or a very small domain area requires very small time steps. Moreover the fluid filling discontinuity increases the apparent stiffness by k,./a. When ais small. the mechanical stiffness can be largely increased by reducing the time step. 306 Rock slope stability analysis a | Figure 9.5. Description of free field conditions and seismic input in a DEM 3 model of a rock excavation. 9.2.10 Dynamic analysis The DEM is a powerful tool for rock mass mechanical behaviour analysis during wave propagation due to seismic events or rock blasting (Heuzé et al., 1990) The explicit solution in the time domain used by DEM is appropriate for following the time propagation of a stress wave. Care must be taken in two particular situations in rock structure dynamic behaviour modelling which refer to the model boundary description (Brady & Lemos, 1988). The first is to employ boundaries for the problem domain which permit energy radiation and do not reflect outward propagating waves into the model. A technique available to define non reflecting boundaries is based on the use of dashpots as viscous damping elements around the boundary of the problem domain (Lysmer & Kuhlemeyer, 1969). The second is to establish free field conditions at a distance laterally from the location of interest for the analysis of the upward propagation of a stress wave. Figure 9.5 shows the boundary conditions assigned to a DEM model in order to take the free-field motion which would exist in the absence of a structure based on the rock or of an excavation in the rock into account. Figure 9.5 also shows the seismic input which is represented as an upward propagating plane wave applied to the base of the model. 9.2.11 Other main DEM applications The distinct element method is also able to analyze the mechanical behaviour of other types of discontinuous rock structures such as tunnels, caverns, under- ground mining exploitations, rock foundations, and other rock structures. Reinforcing systems such as cablebolts, rockbolis or linings can be analyzed with DEM. The method is also versatile in the analysis of different instability modes and movements such as toppling. block falling and sliding. In the stability problem field, it is possible to determine a safety factor by means of a limit equilibrium Dynamic equilibrium equation method 307 method obtained on the basis of the computed stresses and forces. Once the stress state in a rock slope is determined, the safety factor can be calculated for any examined shape and location of the sliding surface. 9.3 SEISMIC ANALYSIS 9.3.1 Pseudo-static method A pseudo-static analysis can be carried out by using the limit equilibrium method and by schematizing the dynamic loading occurence with a time constant force which is proportional to the mass of the potentially unstable volume of rock, according to the seismic coefficient. The seismic coefficient is assumed as being coincident with the maximum. acceleration recorded in the design accelerogram. This assumption can overe- stimate the seismic event unstabilizing effect, since it considers a force to be constantly applied, while in reality it acts only for brief time intervals. However, since the rock mass shear strength depends on the displacements caused by the dynamic loading, it is difficult 10 evaluate the shear strength parameter decrease and to assess whether the method and the assumed parameter lead to an overesti- mation of the seismic event action when using the limit equilibrium method. The safety factor, determined by using the pseudostatic method, is given, with reference to the geometrical and mechanical quantities reported in Figure 9.6, as: c-A + W(cos B—cxsin B) tan > W(sin B + axcos B) where is the assumed seismic coefficient. (9.5) Figure 9.6. Static and pseudostatic forces in a slope plane failure case. 308 Rock slope stability analysis 9.3.2 Overall displacement method Newmark (1965) proposed the basic elements of a procedure to evaluate the potential displacements of an embankment due to seismic waves. Newmark considered the sliding phenomenon incipience as being dependent on the magni- tude of the inertia forces acting on the potential unstable embankment mass. The movement occurs when the inertia forces induced by an earthquake on a potential sliding mass are large enough to exceed the yield acceleration Newmark analyzed a soil mass which moved by sliding along a failure surface under the action of the inertia forces due to earthquake shaking, Newmark also considered the potential unstable soil mass as being a rigid body, which, subjected to an external force, slides on an inclined plane (Figure 9.7). The movement occurs when the inertia forces induced by the seismic event exceeds the minimum dynamic resistance which maintains the slope in the limit equilibrium condition. The failure mechanism and the yield acceleration which correspond to the minimum dynamic resistance have to be firstly determined in order to solve the limit equilibrium equations of the stiff block lying on an inclined plane. Subse- acceleration (g) time (s) Figure 9.8. Example of an accelerogram designed for an earthquake. Dynamic equilibrium equation method 309 quently. the overall displacement of the rigid block subjected to a time variable external force can be calculated. In the calculation procedure, a design earthquake, described by the time histories of the ground motion, should be selected. Time histories of motion should be provided for acceleration, velocity and displacement for three mutually orthogonal coordinate directions. ‘A model presented by Chang et al. (1984) developed for the evaluation of the critical state and the subsequent responce to earthquakes, is here reported. The model applies the pseudo-static limit equilibrium analysis for the determination of the critical state of the slope and the Newmark analytical procedure to assess the displacement of the rigid block. The computation procedure of the Chang et al. model can be subdivided into the following steps: (. A designed earthquake (see the example of Figure 9.8) is selected and the seismic accelerations, k,, are determined for all the time steps considered during the earthquake shaking. The choice of the constant time interval of 0.01 s was suggested by the model authors to designate the time and to subsequently estimate all the corresponding accelerations. The acceleration within a time interval is assumed to be linear, but not necessarily constant. 2. The motion acceleration x, acting on the sliding block can be calculated for the case of a block ona plane (Figure 9.9) (when k = k.. and ¥) as follows W, cos B-k, W, sinB=N, (9.6) WV, sin B+, WV, cos B= +N, tand (9.7) and ifk=k; > k, W, cos Bk, W, sin B=, (9.8) W, sin B+4;W, cos B-(c + Ny tan) =F, cos > (9.9) (a) (b) 79.9, it) Equilibrium of forces on a block at rest: b} Forces on sliding block (after Chang etal. 1984). 310 Rock slope stability analysis: then the substitution of Equations 9.6-9.9 in equation: F/=Wyiee ee cos(—B) f= (hy -hde (9.10) 3. By using the results obtained in step 2 and starting from the beginning of the seismic event, the first positive motion acceleration ¥,, which corresponds to the starting of the sliding motion at the time 1,, is determined If & is the first positive motion acceleration, then ¥,_, at time 1, must be negative, except the particular case in which <,_, =0. Time s, at which ¥ = O must then be computed. The motion velocity x will start to increase from zero from this time. By linear interpolation one obtains: At the time in which the acceleration induced by the seismic event exceeds the yield acceleration, the sliding block velocity increases from zero and the motion displacement x occurs. 4. The motion velocity ;, at the time 1, can be computed by assuming a linear variation of the acceleration as: 8/2,-0) By knowing j, the motion velocity.t;, , atthe time f,, ,can similarly be calculated as: x, ie = HUG AL MG. — 0/2) The value of x, , ,, in this equation, is obtained from Equation 9.10. Afl the velocities, in the selected time, can be calculated by using the same procedure. The resistance to the uphill movement can be assumed as being indefinitely large without causing serious errors, as Newmark pointed out. The rigid block can only slide downhill with positive velocity regardless of the direction of the accelera- tion. If the velocity passes from positive to negative, the times at which the velocity is equal to zero and the sliding block starts to move. must be found, If, in the interval between two selected times, the velocity passes from positive to negative, the time at which the velocity is zero must be found. If, for example, x, , is positive and ; , is negative, the displacement increases until the velocity becomes zero. The time at which becomes zero can be calculated by using the following relation Dynamic equilibrium equation method 311 aie net his Mier fies) & atlas 71) =O However, if, during a time interval, the velocity changes from positive to negative and the acceleration changes from negative to positive, the time /, , », and the time 4,4 1» Should also be computed (Figure 9.10). This occurs because the velocity cannot be negative (uphill stiding is not possible). Thus the velocity remains nil between the time /, ,, and the time 1, , 2. The block will slide again, between the time t, and s,, .. Whenever the motion acceleration becomes positives 1, , » will be the time at which the movement will again occur. The time 1, , » can be expressed as: (isos iat Biea-Aia) Two non-consecutive displacements can be computed during the time which passes from f,, , {0 1; >. However, the calculations for these two separated displacements are required only in the case in which the motion accelation is { { \ taf ‘i per t {b) Figure 9.10. Sliding mass motion with positive I 7 velocity in 1, + 1 and positive acceleration in 1,+2: a) Negative acceleration in 1, + | and positive in 1, +2; b) Ia negative velocity is possible: c) If a ve velocity is noi possible (afier Chang et al.. i toy NLA tel 312 Rock slope stabiliry analysis negative at the time f,, , and positive at the time f,,,». Otherwise, only the times, . will be required and the movement will cease at time f, , > A similar situation can also occur when x; , 3 is positive. This is the case when, attimet,, ,. the acceleration is negative and the velocity is positive and at time s,, 5 when both the acceleration and the velocity are positive. The velocity at time 1, . > (Figure 9.11a-c) needs to be checked in order to evaluate the above quoted situations. 5, The displacement x, between time 1, and time f,, , can be calculated as: ie Mier 8 tA lhe — D+ (24K, +44) GaP /6 (11) Thus the block overall displacement can be determined by applying Equation 9.11 to all the times of the seismic event. ‘The principal factors that should be considered in order to apply the above given method to the rock slope stability analysis in seismic conditions are: ~ The Coulomb criterion, expressed in terms of cohesion and friction angle is nat always available for joint shear strength in dynamic conditions: — The joint water pressures and the interactive block movement-water pressu- re behaviour should be incorporated in a dynamic rock slope analysis model; ~ Complex geometry shaped rock blocks, such as tetrahedra should be consi- dered. Since the joints are in some ways rough, the JRC-JCS model of shear joint behaviour (see Chapter 4) can be applied to follow the shear displacement of rigid {b) Figure 9.11. Sliding mass motion with positive velocity. (c) both ins, + Land 1,+ 2: 2) Negative acceleration ins, + 1 and positive in /, + 2; b) Always positive velocity: c) Negative velocity between s,,, ands, , > if a negative velocity is possible: 4) Nil velocity between (, and, yf a negative velocity is not possible (after (a) Changet al, 1984) Dynamic equilibrium equation method 313 Plate 9.2, Rocfalls w hich occured during the 1986 Friuli. Italy eanhquake: tn the left part the Signs of a previous insiability movement are recognizable. By VL. Civita blocks during earthquake shaking (Bandis. 1988). Moreover, during cyclic shear- the block movements along the joints can involve large displacement at a h rate. The residual frictional joint resistance can change, by a decrease in the hard rock joint case or an increase in the softer rock case, during high rate shearing (Craw ford & Curran. 1981). In the case of water flowing through the discontiavities of a rock slope, the fluctuations, during earthquake shaking, of the normal stress acting on the sliding planes may introduce high joint water pressures causing a decrease of the 314 Rock slope stability analysis effective stresses and of the slope stability conditions. In a dynamic rock slope analysis model, the computation of the water pressures and of the consequent effective normal stresses have to be carried out even though a reasonably accurate estimation of water pressures and effective normal stresses is difficult, because of the uncertainty of several parameter assessments. Icis also necessary to point ovt that when the sliding rock block is subjected to sufficiently high vertical acceleration, it looses contact with the lower joint wall and the frictional joint resistance is also lost (Cravero et al., 1988) (Plate 9.2). The dynamic rock slope stability analysis model which applies the Newmark permanent displacement analysis has been extended to rock wedge seismic displacement study (Ghosh & Haupt, 1989: Barla & Scavia, 1987). CHAPTER 10 Stabilization and protection methods 10.1. INTRODUCTION The effectiveness of a rock slope stabilization method can be quantitatively assessed by referring to the positive variation of the slope safety facter. Thus, a positive effect of a stabilization work occurs when the driving force acting on a potential unstable rock slope mass is reduced of when the resisting force increases. The variation of the driving and resisting force can be determined if the slope stability analysis is carried out by using the limit equilibrium method since the critical failure surface or several potential failure surfaces are identified. In some rock mass movement types such as secondary toppling failure modes. the most effective remedial measures can instead be designed by means of numerical sinvulations carried out using stress analysis or distinct element meth- ods Excavation, filling, rock bolting and drainage can be numerically simulated and the effect of these remedial measures on the stability conditions can be assessed by examining the overall slope stress and displacement variations Stabilization measures are also applied to reduce the rate of the rock mass weakening or the alteration process. In this case it is difficult to quantify the effectiveness of the remedial works by means of stability analysis. Protection methods are used in rockfall problems and their effectiveness can be directly determined by simulating the presence of protection works in rockfall modelling Examples of the design aspects of remedial works are reported in the following sections 10.2 EXCAVATION AND GEOMETRICAL SLOPE PARAMETER DESIGN ‘A rock slope excavation is designed by determining the slope geometry as far as the stability is concemed. 316 Rock slope stability analysis Excavation works can also be carried out for remedial purposes. The main slope excavation remedial measures involve: 1, Reducing the slope height: Reducing the slope inclination; Removing unstable or potential unstable materials: Incorporating benches in the slopes: 5. Using an excavation technique that minimizes rock mass damage. A potential instability phenomenon should be previously identified in order to quantify the improvement of the rock slope stability obtained by using the above quoted excavation remedial measures. Instability phenomena may occur for rock sliding along discontinuity planes (Figure 10.12), for rock toppling and sliding of blocks bound by discontinuity planes (Figure 10.1b) for rock sliding along failure surfaces which cross the rock matrix (Figure 10.1c) or for secondary toppling failure phenomena (Figure 10.14) Limiting equilibrium methods can be applied (o the slope stability analyses in the cases Figure 10.la-c. The stability improvement can be determined by comparing the safety factor computed in the presence and in absence of 2 remedial excavation work The remedial measures, such as reducing the slope height, reducing the slope inctination and incorporating benches in the slope, produce an improvement of the slope stability condition which can be quantified in a limiting equilibrium, BUN factive thrust zone passive thrust zone (c) (a) Figure 10.1. Flaitening of unstable slope: a) Plane shear Failure case: b) Rock block toppling and sliding: c) Circular failure in solt or wey, racks: d) Secondary toppling failure. Stabilization and protection methods 317 analysis since these remedies reduce the driving forces in the safety factor expression. The stability analysis of the case shown in Figure 10.1d can instead be carried out by using a stress-strain analysis method and then by a numerical simulation of the remedial measure application. The effectiveness of the remedial measure can also be quantified by a comparison between the stress states determined in the presence and absence of remedial works. 10.2.1 Rock sliding along discominuity planes In the case of rock sliding along a discontinuity plane (Figure 10.la), an improvement of the slope stability cannot be determined by slope height reducing or flattening if the discontinuity shear strength is only given by the residual frictional component. In the drained case, the computed safety factor remains the same unless a potential unstable rock is completely removed. In the undrained case and for particular groundflow conditions, the slope angle reduction can provoke a decrease of the slope stability condition, as illustrated by Hoek & Bray (1981: Chapter 5, Example 3). In the case in which the sliding plane exhibits a cohesive strength or a shear strength also due to joint asperity failure and diJatancy components, a stability improvement is achieved by fattening or reducing the height of the slope. It can be shown that a cohesion on a discontinuity plane can be assessed when the discontinuity is estimated as being not completely persistent, while dilatancy and asperity failure shear strength components of the discontinuity depend on the joint wall roughness and compressive strength and on the good match of the joint wall. The usc of a discontinuity persistence degrce lower than {00% can lead, in a slope stability analysis, to a safety factor even | order of magnitude greater in the completely persistent discontinuity case. SRM (1978) therefore suggested rea- sonable caution before assuming that discontinuities are not completely persi- stent. As the slope excavation determines a rock mass relaxation with a conse- quent increase of joint aperture, the joint roughness coefficients should be considered, in a stability analysis, as far as the rock mass relaxation is concerned. A comparative example of a triangular slope stability improvement determined by slope height reduction, flattening and incorporation of benches is reported in Figure 10.2 The examined situations are: 1. A triangular 30 m high slope, with a vertical slope face; 2. A triangular slope with a reduced height of 10 m and a ventical slope face; 3. A 30m high slope flattened down to 60° as far as situation | is concerned: 4. A30mhigh slope in which benches are incorporated so that an average face inclination of 60° is reached. For all the 4 examined cases, the sliding surface is a discontinuity plane, dipping 45° and passing through the slope toe. 318 Rock slope stability analysis a) (2) _ i \ (3) (a) re 10.2. Influence of the geometrical slope parameters on the slope stabisity condition: 1) 30m. Wes 12151, 4 =42.42 m, IRC = 4.26, ICS =44.7 MPa = 45°: 2) = 10m. Ws 14.14 m. JRC =4.75.JCS = 46.2 MPa, & = 45°: 3) = 30m, W= S414 42.42. IRC = 4.26, JCS = 44.7 MPa, & = 45°. B = 60°; 4) H= 30m. W= S14 tA = 42.42 m IRC= Copp A FW 08 Lam 0, me 98 W sin ot Weos or-1an (6, + IRC logy, ICS/6,)) F (Barton) = ———— ——- ———s Wein ot Resulis: F (c. oy: F, =0.98. F. Fy =1.04.F, = 1.04. 37, Fy = 1.28. Fy= 1.25: F (Barton): Fy = 1.00, Fy= 8.13, Stabilization and protection methods 3)9 ‘The shear strength parameters of the discontinuity planes are given according to the Barton criterion in stability analysis. The residual friction angle of the discontinuity is 35° whilst the JRC, and JCS, values obtained ona | m reference length are 5 and 50 MPa respectively. Since the JRC and JCS values are scale dependent, new IRC and JCS values have been determined for the maximum lengths of the sliding plane line for the 4 analyzed situations. The empirical fonnulas proposed by Barton & Bakhtar (1983: Chapter 4) have been used to assess JCS and JRC values for the real scale problem case | £, 7.081RCo IRS = IRS, i Figure 10.3 shows the two shear strength envelopes obtained for the different sliding surface lengths of the analyzed situation (Cases }, 3 and 4: sliding lengt 42.42 m; Case 2: sliding length = 14.14 m). A third shear strength envelope is shown in Figure 10.3 in terms of apparent cohesion and friction angle. 1a) Figure 10.3. Shear strength criteria used to define the available resistance on the sliding p) of the Figure 10.1 examples: 1) Cyop = 0.04 MPA, Quon = 38; 2) 8, = 35°, IRC = 4.74, ICS = 46.2 MPa: 3) 6, = 35°. IRC = 4.26. JCS = 44.7 MPa. 320 Rock slope stability analysis This envelope was determined by drawing the tangent line to the curve | inthe point corresponding to the G,, value which acts on the sliding plane of situation | Figure 10.2 repons the safety factor expressions for the two shear strength criteria used: The apparent c and @ criterion and the Barton criterion. The safety factor values for the four analyzed situations and for the two criteria used are also reported Slope height reduction, flattening and the incorporation of benches determine an improvement of the slope safety factor for both the shear parameters sets used. The following conclusion can be made: The apparent ¢ and @ values used are constant in the four analysis. For a correct comparison of the two safety factor formula applications, the scale influence on the dilatancy and asperity failure components should be taken into account by drawing a tangent line to each correspondent JRC shear strength envelope in the Mohr plane. A tangent point which determines the apparent c and 6 values should be located in correspon- dence to the normal stress acting on the examined sliding plane. However the 4 stability analysis were casried out using constant ¢ and apparent values in order to show the influence of the geometrical factors on the slope stability, One can see that the cohesive strength contribution to the stability depends on the slope height and inclination. In the particular vertical wall slope case, the safety factor, for the 45° dipping sliding plane, can be written as: 4e EP fay {aN app, Ya While in the case of 60° inclined wall slope. the safety factor, for the same sliding plane, can be written as: F. The two F expressions for the two respective slope weight-safety factor relations are plotted in Figure 10.4 The design of a slope excavation which incorporates the benches can be carried out by analyzing the single bench stability (Situation 2) and the overall excavated slope stability (Situation 3). The rock which has to be excavated in order to obtain the required slope safety factor can be determined from Figure 10.4b and the excavation costs can then be worked out. Once the average slope inclination and single bench height have been deter mined. the bench inclination and width can be designed. Since benches are incorporated in cut slopes in road consisuctions in order to Stabilization and protection methods 321 safety factor roodt 9 co | wey fo aa an Hm) 5 6 70 80 90 try Figure 10.4. Comparison between the slope excavation methods (a: Slope Rautening: b: Height reduction) of improving stability for the simulation considered in the example of Figure 10.2 (in abscissa: i = slope inclination, H = slope height (mm), W = weight reduction due 10 height slope and inclination decrement: in ordinate: F = salety factor), minimize the damage risks of rockfall, the benches are designed wide enough to allow the falling block to stop. An example reported in Section 10.5 shows a bench width design used to minimize rocklalt damage. ‘A slope which incorporates benches offers economical, environmental and statical advantages in cut slopes (Piteau & Peckover, 1978) (Plate 10.1) such as: — Erosion duc to groundwater runoff is controlled since the energy of surface flows is dissipated: = Berms can be equipped with draining ditches to intercept surface runoff water. with drain holes and other drainage facilities in order to divert the water off the slope and away from the problem area: — Stepped benches may be used on slope cuts in highly weathered rock materials to control erosion and to establish vegetation; 322 Rock slope stability analysis Plate 10.1. Excavation face incorporating benches, By G. Rabaioti. — Slope maintainance works such as scaling and trimming can easily be carried out when a slope incorporates carriage benches. 10.2.2 Rock slope toppling and sliding Rock slope toppling and sliding is typical of heavily jointed rock masses (Figure 10. 1b), The spacings of joint sets determine the unit size and the shape of the blocks. Geometrical parameters of slopes incorporating benches: Bench height, berm width and bench face angle should be designed in order to avoid block toppling and sliding conditions. When the rock mass quality is poor, the rock should be protected from blasting damages during excavation and particular care should be taken to maintain safety condition during works For this reason controlled blasting methods and maintaining works such as scaling and trimming of the rock faces should be carried out. 10.2.3 Circular failure in soft or weak rock In soft or weak rock slopes, failure may occur along a circular surface. In soft rocks such as gypsum, salt or talc, the strength parameters of the rock matrix may be very scarse whilst structural defects may be so rare as to drive a failure path Stabilization and protection methods 323 Figure 10.5. Evolution of slope instability phenomenon: it) Incipience of sliding along a circular surface: b) Slope configuration alter the first mass stumping: ¢) Slope afier the removal of slumped material; d) Subsequent slump also caused by the removal of the slumped material In weak rocks, the unit rock volume may be so small as to allow the failure surface to find the line of least resistance through the slope along a stepped or a circular path. In both cases stability analysis can be performed by using limit equilibrium methods suitable for soil mechanics problems such as that of Sarma (see Chapter 8) (Bishop. 1955; Janbu, 1973; Morgenstern & Price, 1965). In the soft rock case, the Mohr-Coulomb criterion can be used to define the shear resistance of the material, while in the weak rock case, the Hoek & Brown criterion can be uscd to assess the shear strength along the examined failure surfaces. Stability analysis can also be used as a design tool to find the geometry of a stable slope. While slope flattening is a remedial measure which usually provides an improvement of slope stability conditions, the removal of unstable material is a consolidation work which should be used with caution. Figure 10.5 shows the evolution of slumping phenomena in a slope in which the removal of unstable material has been carried out as a remedial measure. In this particular case. filling and drainage are on the contrary the most appropriate types of consolidation work. Filling operations can be carried out at the toe with the aim of constructing an enibankment in order to stabilize the slope. Drainage is carried out to lower the free surface. 10.2.4 Secondary 1oppling failure In the secondary toppling failure example of Figure 10.14, the rack instability 324 Rock slope stability analysis movements are mainly caused by landslides occurring on the slope on which the toppling rock rests. In this type of complex movement, as in other movements due to differences in the deformation features of the layers forming the slope, the consolidation works should be firstly devoted to the removal of the primary instability causes. Excavation works carried out to flatten the rock slope of Figure 10.1d can improve the stability for a short ime but do not represent a permanent solution which can only be obtained with the stabilization of the lower slope. Since rock slope unstabie phenomenon is due to stress field variation induced by movements of the lower slope, a stress strain analysis method, such as the finite element method, should be used to assess stability conditions and 10 design consolidation works. 10.3 DRAINAGE MEASURES The presence of water in joints has a fundamental influence on the slope stability. Hence, the knowledge of the water pressure distribution constitutes a basic input data for a stability analysis, The choice of a flow pattern rather than another pattem significantly changes the slope safety factor which can be obtained with a limit equilibrium method analysis. Joint water pressure control and drainage therefore assume a predominant importance as far as slope maintainance and stabilization is concerned Figure 10.6 reports two joint flow patterns which can be used to determine the joint water pressure distributions in a rock slope and therefore the slope safely factor, The example is shown in order to emphasize the importance of the role played by the joint water pressure in slope stability problems and consequently the importance of drainage measures in Slope stabilization. The unstable rock mass in Figure 10.6 slides along a discontinuity plane and is bound at the slope crest by a tension crack. The joint flow pattem of Figure 10.6a isa result of a Row along the sliding plane which communicates only with the tension crack. In the case of Figure 10.6b, id of joints, in the unstable mass, communicat- ing with the tension crack and the sliding plane, allows the water to flow and leads to a significant increment of the water pressure on the sliding plane. The safety factor computed for the water pressure distribution in the case of Figure 10.6b is 0.87 while the safety factor in the case of the Figure 10.6a is 1.08. The safety factor reduction obtained by using the joint water pattern of Figure 10.6b is about 20%. This large variation shows that the water pressure significant- ly influences the stability of rock slopes. Surface and subsurface drainage improve the slope stability when unfavorable ground water conditions exist. Surface drainage control involves (Piteau & Peckover, 1978) Stabilization and protection methods 325 + W / ay! ’ 4 | \' + 4 ¥ 8 v Po } (a) {b) Figure 10.6. Slope stability analysis for 1wo joint pressure distribution cases: a) Flow along the sliding plane; b) Flow along the sliding plane and the joinis in the sliding mass which communicate with the sliding plane: Fr (¥ cos «= U-Vsin a) tang Wsina+ Vcos x a) W = 4701, U = 601, V= 12.5, H = 20 m, B = 60°. a F = 1,08; b) W=470, U=5281,V=12.50H 0, F=0.87. — Draining sag ponds and water filled depressions that occur above the. slope working area Irom which water can flow to unstable zones; — Reshaping the surface of the slope area to control flow and surface runoff: — Impermeabilizing the slope crest to prevent excessive water infiltration: — Providing a flow line to divert undesiderable surface flows into non-problem areas; ~ Minimizing the removal of vegetation and establishing new vegetation growth. Methods for subsurface slope drainage include drain holes, pump wells. drainage galleries, sbafts and trenches. The design problem of a drain hole network is discussed in the following pages Figure 10.7 reports. as an example, a slope in which the sliding mass which has {0 be drained is bound by two potential sliding planes. The area to be drained is constant for each slope inclination and can be calculated as: 3H 2 ‘The drain hole application provides the reduction of the resultane T of the water forces acting on the sliding surface as far as the initial situation is concerned The dimensionless coefficient f (f = y,.. A/T) is defined as dependent on the water action: its inverse (f, = 1/f) is defined (Louis. 1974a) as the efficiency Figure 10.7. Scheme for the slid- ing plane water pressures in a rock slope stability problem (after Louis, 1974a), coefficient of a drainage grid and is used to quantify the effectiveness of the drainage. In a completely drained situation the coefficient f will be nil and f, infinite. The variation f, should be taken into consideration in order to choose the best solution for the slope stability as far the initial situation and the variation of the direction of the water force T is concemed. Ina drainage design it is useful to determine the flow network in the undrained situation and then to study the different flow networks and the correspondent coefficient f for the particular drainage system considered. The optimal solution can be found through the f coefficient analysis. The drain hole parameters which need to be designed are the optimal hole direction (8,,,) and the optimal hole length (Loy) Louis (1974a) demonstrated that, for a given problem. it is better to begin by determining the optimal direction 8,., of the drainage system for a given length and then to apply the same analysis procedure to find the optimal length L,,, of the drains that corresponds to the fixed @,,, direction of the drains The solution of the flow problem is usually gathered by using a numerical method. In the case in which the rock mass can be idealized as a continuous eguivalent medium and the Darcy flow assumption may be accepted, the finite element method can be used. The drain holes can be modelled as linear clements, Since the problem is usually solved in a 2-D field, when the drain hole is sepresented by a linear element, the spacing of drain holes is implicitly assumed to be equal to the unit of length used in the modelling. When the drainage is simulated with a narrow strip of surface elements, (he model represents an indefinite trench and not a single pipe. As the drainage is designed with a 2-D model, the real depth of drains should be set ata value L greater than the theoretical L,,, value computed in order to take the 3-D effect into account. L,,, is the effective length of drains while the real length is L. Stabilization and protection methods 327 Louis suggested selecting the value of 1.5 as the value o which related L,,, to LIL= Ly, &). A drainage network can be obtained with parallel drillings, 5 to 10 cm in diameter. Spacing of drain holes can range from 2 to 10 m depending on the permeability of the medium. AS an alternative to this practical engineering choice, a study of the flow network in the plane of the drains or in a 3-D field should be carried out Asan application example of this drain hole design procedure, the results of a set of analysis carried out by Louis (1974a) are here reported, in order to determine the optimal features of a drainage network in a rock slope. The slope is 75° dipping and is crossed by two discontinuity systems. The principal system has an inclination of 30° plunging towards the rock mass, while the secondary system is parallel to the slope face. The calculation of the potential grids and of the flow networks for the undrained situation (Figure 10.8) and for the different drain hole orientation (Figure 10.9) were carried out by Louis (1974a) using a computer program set up by Sharp (1970). Figure 10.10a-b show the curves which relate the water action coefficient with the inclination and length of the drains. These curves can be used to determine 6, opt ANd Loop, Figure 10.8. Equipotential Jines and free surface for the case of an undrained slope (after Louis. 1974a) 328 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 10.9. Equipotential fines and free sur- face for different drainage orientations (ufier Louis. 1974), 9.2 0.4 0.6 LH (a) (b) Figure 10.10, a) Water action coefficient versus drainage orientation diagram; b) Water action coefficient versus the ratio between the drainage length and the slope height (after Louis, 1974a). Stabilization and protection methods 329 10.4 SUPPORT AND REINFORCEMENT SYSTEMS The aim of a rock slope stabilization design with structural elements is: 1. To help the rock mass to support itself; 2. To apply extemal structures which are not part of the rock mass, but support itexternally, Rockbolts and cable bolts are reinforcing elements that are inserted into the rock mass in order to increase rock stiffness and strength. Buttresses and retaining walls are external support systems which offer passive resistance to the Joads imposed by the weight of unstable rock masses (Plate 10.2). Concrete buttresses and walls represent stiff supports which are seldom in direct contact with the rock walls which must be stabilized. The passive supporting action of a concrete wall starts to work after a movement of the unstable rock mass occurs. This movement can be large enough to allow the shear strength of the rock discontinuities to drop to residual values. The large stiffness of the concrete structures determines high valves of stress concentration in the zone where the rock mass movement has arisen. Concrete wall applications, as a stabilization measure, are therefore effective when the type, the locations of the movement and the weight of the unstable mass can be foreseen. Slope stabilization using concrete support structures is often, in practise, limited to local stability problems such as that of single blocks which are almost detached from rock walls (Plate 10.3) Rock mass stabilization and reinforcements using bolting is a proven technique that is currently used to prevent sliding, toppling and falling movements. Several types of rockbolis and cable bolts are now used throughout the world (Plates 10.4-10.6) Rockbolt and cable bolt systems can be classified on the basis of their different anchoring techiques. Stillborg (1986) considered the following group of bolts: Mechanically anchored rockbolts: Grouted rackbolts: Grouted cable bolts; Friction anchored rockbolts. Rockbolts are normally made of solid or tube formed steel; cable bolts are normally made of stéel wires which are layed in a strand or a rope configuration: Rockbolis and cable bolis can be installed untensioned or tensioned with cement grouting in the rock mass. Tensioned instalted bolts are called active reinforcements, untensioned in- stalled bolts are called passive reinforcements. The slope stability analysis of discontinuous rock masses reinforced with active or passive systems is discussed in the following sections. ‘ 330 Rock slope stabiliry analysis Plate 10.2. Under masonry used to support unstable rock masses. Above: A road slope cut at Levo di Stresa, By M Strola, Below: Road slope cut at Chiomonte, Piedmont, Italy. Stabilization and protection methods 331 Plate 10.3. Steel chain to temporary support unstable blocks. Reproduced by permission of Geodata. 332. Rock slope stability analysis Plate 10.5. Rockbolts reinforcing the foundation rock wall of the Santa Maria del Sasso Monastery. Lombardy: hls Stabilization and protection methods 333 Plate 10.6. Cable and rockbolting works on the Orvieto tufa cliff. 10.4.1 Active reinforcements The active reinforcement system of a rock mass given by prestressed bars or cables consists of (Figure 10.11): = Ananchoring zone where the anchor is embedded in the rock: — The unsupported length of the anchor bar or cable; — The anchor head and the bearing mass with the locking device The installation of pretensioned anchors in a rock slope stabilizes a potential sliding mass by increasing the normal stress and by decreasing the shear stress acting on the sliding plane. The increment of the normal stress determines an increment of the [rictional component of the shear strength on the sliding plane. The decrease of the acting fa) (db) te} Figure 10.11. Prestressed anchors: a) Anchoring zone: b) Unsupponed length of the bar: c) Anchor head 334 Rock slope stability analysis shear stress is determined when the force applied by prestressing is orientated in such a way as to counteract the sliding movement (Figure 10.12) The shear resistance component, due to the roughness of the wall discontinuity, can be incremented or decreased by the action of the anchoring forces: — The closure of the walls due to pretensioning increases the indentation of the rough surfaces in contact: = The increment of the normal stress acting on a rough discontinuity can determine the failure of the smaller wall asperities in contact In stability calculations with a limit equilibrium method, the reinforcement of rock slopes with pretensioned bolts is usually schematized by introducing, in the safety factor expression, the prestressing forces as outside forces of known constant direction and intensity. In this case, the deformation induced in the rock mass after tensioning and the variation in stress in the anchoring dusing the excavation work cannot be considered in a limit equilibrium analysis. Numerical simulation of a reinforced rock slope construction, in different e=at In 38* AA=82.82 Figure 10.12, a) Overall stability analysis of a rock slope reinforced with prestressed anchors; b) Diagram of the safety factor improvement (F) with anchor prestresving force increment T (ion). The correspondent ratios between the applied force and the slope weight are also reported in abscissa Stabilization and protection methods 335 excavation and cable-bolting phases, carried out using the finite element method can take the influence of rock matrix, rock discontinuity and rock reinforcement deformation features into account (Barla et al.. 1975). Stress-strain analysis methods can be used to back analyze, by comparing the measured and computed anchor deformations which may be produced by the excavation and to design the pretensioning loadings which must be applied to the anchoring in order to improve the slope stabilization. ‘The effectiveness of a prestressed cable bolt system occurs when the anchoring zone is embedded in the rock mass beyond the potential failure surface. The finite element method in a 2-D field is applied to plane shear problems. In this case, joint elements can be used to schematize the sliding plane, while the potentially unstable mass and the mass which is beyond the sliding plane. are schematized as an equivalent continuous medium. The optimal length of the anchor and the anchoring zone features can be examined by using the finite element method (Barla et al., 1975). The design problem of the optimal horizontal distance between the anchors mainly depends on the discontinuity spacing as the reinforcing system can be considered as being a concentrated load system. Welded meshes, concrete beams and sprizt beton can be used to distribute the bolt reinforcement over a wide area of the slope and hence minimize the number of bolts required. The safety and reliability of active reinforcement systems also depend on the. behaviour, in time. of the anchors, The main problems are due to the reduction or increase of the anchor stress determined by relaxation, creep and corrosion. Periodical control measurements of the loss in tension of the anchors can be carried out to assess if the reinforcement systems are still reliable. The choice of an active reinforcement system should also be made on an economy basis. A significant parameter that could be used for this purpose is the ratio between the total required prestressing force and the weight of the rock mass to be stabilized. The total required prestressing force is, for a unit thickness of a slope. the sum of the forces applied to the anchors in order to restore the designed safety factor to the slope Consider the example of Figure 10.2(3) for the case in which the safety factor needs to be restored up to 1.5, with an external force T. The geometrical features of the rock slope and of the line of application of the prestressing force are given in Figure 10.12a The safety factor computed with the limit equilibrium method, taking the prestressing forces as an equivalent force of a known constant direction and intensity into account, can be written as c-A+(Wcos @+T cos 8) tan Wsina—Tsin® 336 Rock slope stability analysis where 6 is the angle between the perpendicular line to the slidi direction of the restoring force. The force required to restore the designed safety factor can be obtained by imposing the required value of the safety factor in the above expression. The diagram of the safety factor improvement, with the increment of the restoring force. is reported in Figure 10.12. Figure 10.12b also shows the safety factor variation with the ratio between the restoring force and the weight of the rock mass which must be stabilized. The restoring force-unstable rock mass weight ratio required to increase the safety factor from 1.30 to 1.50 varies from 0.28 to 0.36. These high ratio values can show that, when the rock mass which must be stabilized is large, this technique is expensive (Panet, 1987) The design of the characteristics of the active reinforcement system which must be installed requires the choice of: — The number of cables (or bars) in a vertical slope slice with a unit thickness; — The horizontal distance between the cables (or bars): — The tensioning to be carried out on each cable (or bar): The features of the prestressed anchor or bar (unsupported length, sections of the wires forming the cable or bar, anchoring zone and anchoring head typology); — The characteristics of the system (concrete or steel beant) which must be applied to the slope face in order to redistribute the action of the single cable (or bar) over its designed influence area. The number 1 of cables required in a vertical slope slice with a unit thickness (e.g. | m. if the units assumed for the stability calculations are meters and tons) can be determined from the following expression: plane and the W (F sin o~cosartan 6) +c-A T, (F sin @ + cos 8 tan 4) ne where Tis the tension in service in each cable The number 1 of cables obtained by using the above quoted expression should be changed when the horizontal distance between the cable levels is different from the unit of length. The cable or bar tensioning can be carried out in uifferent stages up to a final tension greater than the designed cable (or bar) tension service in order to take the Joss in tension with time and the non uniform state of norma) stress induced by the reinforcements on the sliding planes. into account. Retensioning phases during the work service are usually designed. The tension in service 7, must be lower than the elastic limit T,, of the anchor cable wire or of the anchor bar (for example T, < 0.6 T,) and lower than the breaking point of the anchor embedded in the rock mass. The unsupported length of the cable (or bar) and the breaking tension stress of the anchoring zone can be checked by ‘in situ’ tensioning (ests. Stabilization and protection methods 337 10.4.2. Passive reinforcements A passive reinforcement refers to rock bolts or cable bolts installed untensioned in the rock mass. Rockbolts can be grouted with cement or resine or can be friction anchored such as ‘split set’ or ‘swellex”. Passive cable bolts are fully grouted with cement. A typical steel diameter of grouted rock bolts is 20 mm with a yield load of the steel element varying from 12 tons for the Rebar rockbolt grouted 10 28 tons for the Dywidag rockbolt grovted with cement. A flexirope cement grouted cable bolt has a typical cable diameter of 28 mm and a yield load of the cable of SO tons (Stillborg, 1986). Passive reinforcements give suppon action after the installation and increase the rock discontinuity available resistance only when a deformation in the reinforced rock mass occurs. As, in nature, the discontinuities are rough with a variable aperture and the bolts and the cables are usually not installed perpendicu- Jar to the discontinuities, the rock sliding movement induces a composite state of shear and tension stress in steel reinforcements. The mechanism of interaction between the reinforcement and the rock mass is even more complex for the difference in stiffness between steel, cement grout and rock. Ananalysis of the contribution of passive reinforcement to the shear strength of a discontinuity has been given by Panet (1987). The shear displacement along a natural discontinuity surface has a component U, tangential to the average discontinuity plane and a component U,, perpendicu- lar to the discontinuity. The component of the displacement U,, is due to the rock displacement which follows a rough surface (Figure 10.13a) The passive steel reinforcement intersects the discontinuity making an angle 6 with the perpendicular line to the average plane of the discontinuity: the resultant R of the forces acting on the cross section of the steel reinforcement forms the angle B with the direction of the steel element. R can be resolved in the perpendicular force N parallel to the steel element and in the shear force S perpendicular to the steel element direction. The contribution C,, of the steel element to the shear resistance of the disconti- auity is usually represented by the following expression: C, =F cos (8 +B) tang +R sin (8 +B) resin The C, assessment depends on the value of the angle 8 and hence on the value of the force R In the case in which the value of the angle @ = 0. the force R is parallel to the steel element direction. The steel element is subjected (0 a pure tension state of stress and the limit for the force R to work in an elastic field is: where G, is the elastic stress limit for the stecl reinforcement, d is the diameter of 338 Rock slope stability analysis Figure 10.13. Separation of the resultant R into parullel and perpendicular forces to the reinforcing har direction (alter Panes, 1987), the element and N, is the correspondent force available in elastic limit condi- tions. The valve of C,, is maximum if: the force R is directed parallel to the discontinuity plane. In the hypothesis in which the steel element is subjected to a pure shear stress, the tangential force R, corresponding to the elastic limit determined according to the Tresca criterion. can be expressed as: R=\AN, =" do, 4 The two cases of the steel element working in a pure tension field (8 = 0) and of the steel element shearad on a plane perpendicular to the element direction 1 == 6 B= -® lead to the upper and lower values for the resultant force R acting on the steel element. Stabilization and protection methods 339 The limit force R acting on the reinforcement element can be determined for every B value where where m= 4 tan B=colg (8 +8). The above quoted equation for the R/N, value was determined by applying the principle of maximum work and the limit force acting on the reinforcement as a vector with its ends on the center and on the perimeter of the ellipse (Schlosser et al., 1983) Ps} Ww.) ” \osN,S) The application of the equation for the R/N, determination involves the assess- ment of the and 8 and @ angles. By using the Barton criterion to characterize the discontinuity shear strength behaviour, the angle 6 can be determined as the roughness discontinuity profile: B=IRC logyg <= The value of 6 can be designed to reach the maximum value of C,, Spang & Egger (1990) examined, in addition to the geometrical and strength parameters of the passive reinforcement and of the rock mass. the influence of the deformation féatures of the two materials on the shear resistance of discontinui- ties. A wide number of laboratory and field tests allowed them to suggest an empirical relationship for C,, which takes the reinforced rock mass strenght and, deformation features into account. ‘The stability analysis of a passive reinforced rock slope can be carried out by using the limit equilibrium method and introducing the estimated value of C,, into the safety factor expression. As the passive reinforcement system works when a rock deformation occurs, the slope analysis can be cautiously carried out by neglecting any cohesion on the sliding planes. With reference to a plane shear problem, such as that of Figure 10.10a, the safety factor expression is: Wos atang +nC, Wsina 340. Rock slope stability analysis In passive reinforcements the problems of safety and reliability with time are greater than that of the active reinforcements. The main problem for a correct functioning with time of a passive reinforce- ment is 10 maintain the adherence between the reinforcing system and the rock mass. The corrosion of the steel reinforcement provoked by chemically aggress- ive environments can determine loss in tension and slippage of the steel elements. The grout can be fissured following rock shear movements and the steel elements can be subjected to corrosion. Friction anchored rockbolts are not recommended for a permanent reinforcement system even though special corrosion protections can be applied. 10.5 METHODS OF PROTECTION The design of protection measures, in sites affected by the risks of rockfall, firstly involves the evaluation of the rockfall characteristics and of the slope geometry. Rockfall modelling allows the designer to compute the maximum possible Tength of the path of a block detached from a rock slope, the distances between the bounces, the elevations of the block trajectory and the energy assumed by the block during the different falling, bouncing, rolling and sliding movements. ‘In situ’ observation of the previously occurred rockfall damages. in addition to the rockfall experimental test, helps in the calibration of the model. Geomechanical surveys of the discontinuity features of the rock mass are also useful 1o determine the size of the blocks which can detach from the rock face. The protection methods of civil and mining works (roadways. constructions, etc.) arc based on the following criteria: 1, Work location at a safe distance from the danger of rockfall; 2. Incorporation of benches in the rock slope to stop falling blocks before damage to the works; 3. Positioning of barriers to catch the blocks which are able to absorb the energy of the block impact; 4. Excavation of slope ditches in order to facilitate the falling of blocks in zones where the fiying block energy can be effectively absorbed and the block can easily be caught, 5. Construction of shelters in order to absorb the energy trasmitted by passing rock blocks. The first design criterion can be applied by determining the maximum possible. length of the rockfall path with “in situ’ observations and by using an analytical model. The incorporation of benches in a slope to stop falling blocks can also be designed by simulating a large number of rockfalls with a rockfall analysis computer program. The geometry of the benches can be varied till the best problem solution is Stabilization and protection methods 341 v(m) 1 80 2 607 ah 40 zo. one ae x It 20 10 oo 80 Figure 10.14. Example of rockfail modelling in a excavated slope which incorporates benches. The block puth computation has been carried out by using a rock all model proposed by Peifa (Fornaro et at., 1990). The data and the results of the problem are given as follows: 1) Coefficients of restitution: K,,= 0.4 K, = 0.7. rolling friction angle: v = 0.6, initial velocity of the block point 1: (v= 0. y= 82): ¥,, = I m/s; v,, = 0.6 m/s; 2) Rolling of the block down to point 2 (x= 10, y= 75); velocity components in point 2: , 8: Yyy =—8.91: 3) Block fall and impact at point 3 (17.3, $0): tye = 3.63 m/s, 2.3 m/s: velocity components after the impuct:¥sy9q = 2-54 M/S; Vtg, 8-91 m/s: 4) Block fall and impact at vei 25.8, 25) ape = 2-54 18% ye -23.9 1/5, velocity components after the impact: = ic 78 mfsiy 55 m/s:'5) Block fall and impact at point 5 (31.9, 0.18): zi 0 m/s, velocity components after the impact: V.55944 = 1-36 m/s: : 6) Bounce and impact at point 6 (34.6. 0.16): Yyggre = 1-36.78; V-¢pye velocily components after the impuct: V6, 99 MIS: Vey9q = 3.84 m/s; 7) Rolling and bouncing of the block till point 7 (35.6, 0.16). determined. The rock exposed on the plane of the beams can be covered with uncompacted rockfill or loose earth to effectively absorb a large part of the impact block energy and to reduce the height of the block bounce. In addition, catch fence installations on the berm edges allows one to decrease the berm width designed to stop all the falling blocks. Figure 10.14 shows an example of a rockfall computer simulation applied to the design of a slope which incorporates benches. 342. Rock slope stability analysis The choice of the location where the barriers can be installed first of all depends on the elevation of the blocks during the block movements. The elevation of the blocks refers to the slope profile. The design of the structure which intercepts the blocks is usually carried out with the energy method (Chan et al., 1986). In the energy method, the work carried out to deform the structure can be directly related to the kinetic eneray of impacting boulders. The structure is regarded as satisfactory if the designed falling block causes an acceptable degree of deformation The designer can choose to use a plastic method or elastic method. In the plastic method a permanent deformation of the structure to absorb eneray from the block is allowable. in the elastic method only temporary deformations are accepted. Descocudres (1988) reported the following expression for the computation energy absorbed by a structure which behaves in an elasto-plastic field P,-(¥,,— AY.) =E/(Mim + 1) =9m7/[2(M/n + 1) where P,, is the ultimate load of the structure; Y,, is the plastic displacement of the structure: ¥, is the elastic displacement of the structure: E is the impact energy of a mass with a velocity v: £ = 17/2; M is the mass of the structure. Different kinds of structures can be employed as barriers to catch the blacks: rail walls, catch walls, catch nets or fences. Rail walls are stiff barriers with a low capacity of energy absorbtion for the inner deformation. The kinetic energy of deformation is about 30-35 kN-m. This occurs. for instance when a 0.5 ton block energy is flying with a velocity of 10-12 m/s (Descoeudres, 1988). Different types of wire catch nets. which can be suspended on a cable anchored to the ground and connected to an array of posts fixed in the ground. are made by specialized companies (Plate 10.7). The energy that these catch systems can absorb is quoted and varies, according to the geometrical and mechanical proper- ties of the catch structure type. from 100 kKN-m up to values greater than 1200 kN-m. Slope ditches are often used as a protection method in combination with gabions, fence meshes or other barrier types positioned on the valley side of the ditches The ditches are exavated to catch the falling blocks before they start to roll or to change the block movement from rolling to bouncing (Figure 10.15).The effec- tiveness of a ditch is maximum when a block falls into the ditch. with an almost vertical trajectory. In this way the energy of the falling block can be effectively absorbed by covering the bottom of the ditch with uncompacted rock fill or loose earth Rockfall modelling can be applied for the best ditch positioning and for the ditch geometry design The effectiveness of a protection structure requires periodic restorations since block impacts determine structural damages. Stabilization and protection methods 343 Bb AAS i aH Plate 10.7. Wire-mesh fence to incercept falling blocks. By A. Morino, Geodata. 2 PI 10.15. Ditch use ta catch the block before rolling (a) or to chang. from falling to rolling (b) he block movement Figure Several authors evaluated the mechanics of rockfalls from cliff and talus slopes. The development of design criteria for ditches begun with the work of Ritchie (1963). The design parameters are the height and the angle of slope from which the block falls and the depth and width of the ditch of the fallout area (Figure 10.16a). 344 Rock slope stability analysis o st o re 10.16. Guidelines for rocktraps: a) From original data by Ritchie (1963): b). c) nt by Whiteside (1986) of Fookes & Sweeney chart (1976), Ritchie carried out a series of falling rock experiments and produced a guideline relationship between the geometrical parameters of the problems. Subsequently. on the basis of the results of the Ritchie work, Fookes & Sweeney (1976) drew up a design chan for a rock trap (Figure 10.16b). This design chart was critically reviewed by Whiteside (1986) who redrew the Ritchie data in the chart given in Figure (10. 16c).. Mak & Blomfield (1986) investigated the design of rock traps for a variety of presplit rock slopes up to 12 m high by examining 13,000 boulders. Stabilization and protection methods 345 Mak & Blomfield produced a design chart for pre-split slopes and showed that the Fookes & Sweeney chart for the rock trap design led to a conservative design when applied to relatively smooth pre-split rock faces. The results of Mak & Blomfield are instead in fairly close agreement with the results plotted in the Ritchie data redrawing reported in Figure 10.16c. Rockfall modelling is carried out to replace the use of the above reported design chart for the study of the influence on the rock paths of: — The variable slope geomet — The coefficients of restitution of the rocks in the bouncing mode of move- meni — The frictional values in the sliding and in the rolling mode; = The shape. weight and mechanical properties of the falling rock. The barriers which provide the designed probability of falling blocks which must be retained can be unfeasible for the required length or absorbtion capability of the barrier. therefore rockfall shelters can be chosen as an alternative protection system, Rockfall shelters are usually concrete structures covered on the roof by an absobing material such as soil backfill to dissipate the energy resulting from the impact of a boulder. As the shelters are more expensive, they are usually used in areas with serious rockfall problems. A design procedure for rockfal} shelters has. been described by Kirsten (1982). Roci slope shahility ana sts bs anup-to-dake hook providing informaten in a mew form and dealing wath the gromechans al problems of rack engineenng deugn ‘Starung from geological surveys and diwcontinuity data collocham. the book describes a number of procedures ate 10 axes the shear Behaviour of joents amd rock masses and te methods to model groundwater flow The input data, required for a slope analysin, are fr create ripen cipebreenr ae deepened angen pa Methods used to assess the stability degree of a rock wope are described as well a pron nuonal technayues for the movement of unstable racks. Rock fall model. toppling and buckling analvus methods are presented Dafferent types of rock siding analy procedures such as tradmonal lit equilibrium methods or the key Mock theary are dincuwed and compared. ‘The analysis of the mechanical brhaviowr of rock block and of a vywiem of blocks are invest eee a Newmark type expenmental data interpretation baswd.on Sunisdch, Soomnaeien eed Wisi Gag i well ar peaelah aio ok see male problems are presented A lst of almowt MIO elected references is gives for those reader eho wish to study the topes dealt in the book in greater detail, Landebide enchoced Saint Eres by the: ‘Gumardo highway near to Bednina, Switzer

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi